Home

Plug-In Modules - Electrocomponents

1. Status Indicators on the Micro830 Controllers Controller Status Indicators 10 16 Point Controllers 24 Point Controllers 48 Point Controllers ees Ss OT o000 T 1 om000 mi i OOOO 1a 0 oO o 2 E 3 Br 4 m z 2 5 E 4 4 cr 5 0a 6 z 5 L 6 T 0000 EES T 0000 7 J e 00 0 45031a 45017a 45037a Micro850 Controllers om000 1 om000 1 OOOO Lop 8 te 8 9 9 2 2 G 3 3 4 4 E 5 5 6 6 T 7 oo00 7 0000000000 oo000 00 45934 45935 Status Indicator Description Description State Indicates 1 Input status off Input is not energized On Input is energized terminal status 2 Power status off No input power or power error condition Green Power on 3 Run status off Not executing the user program Green Executing the user program in run mode Flashing green Memory module transfer in progress Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 305 Appendix F Troubleshooting Error Conditions 306 Status Indicator Description
2. Expansion I O Support Chapter 6 2085 1032T DC sourcing como DC sourcing COM DC sinking como DC sinking com2 1 00 ae I 16 7 4 1 01 r l 17 zr 1 02 meer 18 mz 24V DC 1 03 pei 2avoc M19 PT 1 04 gt 1 20 F 1 05 aan 1 21 cr l 06 2 74 l 22 Eer DC sourcing y es lt 7 DC sourcing y 1 23 po DC sinking DC sinking DC sinking DC sinking DC sourcing A 08 74 DC sourcing A 1 24 ert 1 09 aar l 25 r 10 244 1 26 or l 11 ia 7 l 27 T 24vDe 112 Fee 24vDC 1 28 27 113 r 1 29 re l 14 Meer 1 30 eer 115 mee 31 DC sinking Y COM DC sinking Y COM3 DC sourcing coM1 DC sourcing COM3 45300 See Wiring Options for the 2085 1032T Module on page 67 2085 0A8 L1 0 00 y A 0 01 ER o u 0 02 CRH 0 03 CR t 120V 240V AC L1 0 04 ER 0 05 cr e a 0 08 CRH 0 07 L1 y 45314 L2 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 63 Chapter6 Expansion 1 0 Support 2085 0B16 and 2085 O0V16
3. 12 345 8 6 7 8 Status Indicators AQ H L 0000000000 T Wssssssssg oceccess Messessssssssssssgg 16 4 OoOoOooooo0o00 an ae er ae 3 a ale i3 Gey ee gl it SE i o 20 GX 2 K amp P Da 22 i E H H al i 23 Li a nee 24 oo00000000 J m Decececcscocssssenpeccocesooessesesy 0000000000 45918 15141312 11 6 10 8 9 45915 Controller Description Description Description 1 Status indicators 9 Expansion I O slot cover 2 Optional power supply slot 0 DIN rail mounting latch 3 Plug in latch 1 Mode switch 4 Plug in screw hole 2 Type B connector USB port 5 40 pin high speed plug in connector 3 RS232 RS485 non isolated combo serial port 6 Removable 0 terminal block 4 RJ 45 EtherNet IP connector with embedded yellow and green LEDs 7 Right side cover 5 Optional AC power supply 8 Mounting screw hole mounting foot Status Indicator Description Description Description 16 Input status 21 Fault status 17 Module status 22 Force status 18 Network status 23 Serial communications status 19 Power status 24 Output status 20 Run status Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 5 Chapter 1 Hardware Overview Micro830 Controllers Number and Type of Inputs Outputs
4. 2085 0B16 2085 0V16 i DC o A DC CM0 CM1 CM0 CM1 Aa Pa Aaa aa CR 0 00 0 08 cr CR 0 00 cR 0 08 A LAA a CR 0 01 0 09 cr CR 0 01 cr 0 09 0 02 0 10 y 0 02 Am 0 10 OR Faa L CRH A CR 0 03 0 11 CR CA 0 03 CRY 0 11 CM0 CM1 CM0 CM0 nT fan inp aay RK 0 CR CR 0 04 0 12 ACR 244 DC Source MCR 0 04 ey 0 12 24VDC Sink Z cr 0 05 0 13 cr cr 0 05 CRH 0 13 x4 ake ee A A fo CRAH o we E cr 0 06 0 14 CR cr 0 06 A 0 14 A 0 07 0 15 A a 0 07 0 15 cm0 cM CM0 4 CM0 NC NC NC NC d y DC 4 4 Y DC 45306 A P z 45327 Terminal Block1 Terminal Block 2 Terminal Block1 Terminal Block 2 2085 OW8 L1 or DC or DC CM0 0 00 C FE 0 01 MCR M aN CRH o r font l CR 0 03 j 4CR CM2 0 04 or ZA R 0 05 pC CM3 0 06 aX 0 07 CR Ba L2 or DC or DC 45310 64 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Expansion I O Support Chapter 6 2085 OW16 L1 or DC or DC CMO 1 CM4 0 00 0 08 EN fi 0 01 cR 0 09 CR cM t CM5 0 02 ROM 0 10 cr y e N i Ee 0 03 CR 0 11 cR t cm2 t C
5. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Status Indicator Controller O X 4 ooogoogooo 5 HEBRE 16 oa 5 17 _ 4 5 18 19 _ B08 20 45031 0 R i OO00000000 13 12 11 10 6 9 7 Micro830 24 point Controllers and Status Indicators Controller 5 7 Status Indicator o000 14 0000 CCAA AAA oo _ Ea ii 5 15 E e E i 18 a H 18 a a PF U I 19 3 AANE ye 0000 Seer i r 20 2000 H LH H L 0O ml LE H 5917 1 o SOOOOOODDOOOGOOSOA In T T T 45016 13 12 11 10 9 6 9 8 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Hardware Overview Chapter 1 Micro830 48 point Controllers and Status Indicators Controller 12 304 5 8 6 T Status Indicator ETA pn o0o00000000 LO i O 144 0000000000 222222300 QA2OCKA O29990000002G95 poganmne ia il e o TA ala E EER ea E E 16 715 of Rar m l na 19 B00000050 ae F ii 2 2000000000 F T L 0000000000 2 SWADADIIIIATADAAIIIS SAAAIIIDADTAAAIITIDS il 45037 Controller Description in f 45036
6. Counter with Internal Direction Count Up Not Used 0 mode 1a Counter with Internal Count Up Not Used Reset Hold 1 Direction External Reset and Hold mode 1b Counter with External Count Up Down Direction Not Used 2 Direction mode 2a Counter with External Coun Direction Reset Hold 3 Direction Reset and Hold mode 2b Two Input Counter mode 3a Count Up Count Down Not Used 4 Two Input Counter with Count Up Count Down Reset Hold 5 External Reset and Hold mode 3b Quadrature Counter mode 4a A Type inpu B Type inpu Not Used 6 Quadrature Counter with A Type inpu B Type inpu Z Type Reset Hold 7 External Reset and Hold mode Ab Quadrature X4 Counter A Type inpu B Type inpu Not Used 8 mode 5a Quadrature X4 Counter with A Type inpu B Type inpu Z Type Reset Hold 9 External Reset and Hold 168 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Micro830 Micro850 24 point Controller HSC Input Wiring Mapping Modes of Operation Input 0 HSCO Input 2 HSC1 Input 4 HSC2 Input 6 HSC3 Input 1 HSCO Input 3 HSC1 Input 5 HSC2 Input 7 HSC3 Use the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Chapter 10 Input 2 HSCO Input 6 HSC2 Input 3 HSCO Input 7 HSC2 Mode Value in User Program Counter with Internal Direction
7. Description State Indicates Fault status Off No fault detected Red Controller hard fault Flashing red Application fault detected Force status Of No force conditions are active Amber Force conditions are active Serial Of No traffic for RS 232 RS 485 Cee Gags Traffic through RS 232 RS 485 Output status Of Output is not energized On Output is energized logic status Module status Steady Off No Power Flashing Green Standby Steady Green Device operational Flashing Red Minor fault minor and major recoverable faults Steady Red Major Fault non recoverable fault Flashing Green Self tes and Red Network status Steady Off Not powered no IP address Normal Operation The device is powered off or is powered on but with no IP address Flashing Green No connections An IP address is configured but no Ethernet application is connected Steady Green Connected At least one EtherNet IP session is established Flashing Red Connection timeout not implemented Steady Red Duplicate IP The device has detected that its IP address is being used by another device in the network This status is applicable only if the device s duplicate IP address detection ACD feature is enabled Flashing Green and Red Self test The device is performing power on self test POST During POST the network status indicator alternates flashing green and red The POWER an
8. 9 Right top view 45927 2085 1032T Hardware Components T TT Toei Mounting screw hole mounting foot bus connector male and female 2 Connector 7 latch hooks Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 57 Chapter6 Expansion 1 0 Support Installation 58 2085 1032T Hardware Components Description Description 3 Connector retaining arm 8 1 0 status LEDs 4 Cable grip 9 DIN rail mounting latch 5 Module interconnecting latch To install the Micro850 expansion I O you need to perform the following steps on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous WARNING If you insert or remove the module while backplane power is A location installations Be sure that power is removed before proceeding Mount the Module For more information on proper grounding guidelines see the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Module Spacing Maintain spacing from objects such as enclosure walls wireways and adjacent equipment Allow 50 8 mm 2 in of space on all sides for adequate ventilation as shown Top lt a pe Micro850 Side 2085 1 0 2085 I O 2085 1 0 2085 ECR 2 T Bottom 44913 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Expansion I O Support Chapter 6 Mounting Dimensions and DIN Rail Mounting 90 mm 28 mm
9. Description Description 1 Status indicators 8 Mounting screw hole mounting foot 2 Optional power supply slot 9 DIN rail mounting latch 3 Plug in latch 10 Mode switch 4 Plug in screw hole 11 Type B connector USB port 5 40 pin high speed plug in connector 12 RS232 RS485 non isolated combo serial port 6 Removable I O terminal block 13 Optional AC power supply 7 Right side cover Status Indicator Description Description Description 14 Input status 18 Force status 15 Power status 19 Serial communications status 16 Run status 20 Output status 17 Fault status Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Hardware Overview Micro850 Controllers Micro850 24 point Controllers and Status Indicators 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ra Status Indicators O Wie deed eeepocecoed aie 16 000 ia 17 18 Ep G 19 E 20
10. 100 mm 3 94 in VOS OOOOODOOOOOODOOOL ae eV Qe 45326 Micro850 24 Point Controllers 2080 LC50 24AWB 2080 LC050 240BB 2080 LC50 240VB 2080 LC50 24QWB 131 mm 5 16 in 1 lt g
11. Catalog Number Inputs Outputs Pro ase M0VAC 24VDC Relay 24v 2qv Support Support VAC Sink Source 2080 LC30 100WB 6 4 2 2080 LC30 100VB 6 4 1 2080 LC30 16AWB 10 6 2080 LC30 160WB 10 6 2 2080 LC30 160VB 10 6 1 2 2080 LC30 240BB 14 10 2 4 2080 LC30 240VB 14 10 2 4 2080 LC30 240WB 14 10 4 2080 LC30 48AWB 28 20 2080 LC30 480BB 28 20 3 6 2080 LC30 480VB 28 20 3 6 2080 LC30 480WB 28 20 6 Micro850 Controllers Number and Types of Inputs and Outputs Catalog Number Inputs Outputs PTO HSC 120v 24V Relay 2av 2qy_ SuBport Support AC DC Sink Source VAC 2080 LC50 24AWB 14 10 2080 LC50 240BB 14 10 2 4 2080 LC50 240VB 14 10 2 4 2080 LC50 240WB 14 10 4 2080 LC50 48AWB 28 20 2080 LC50 480BB 28 20 3 6 2080 LC50 480VB 28 20 3 6 2080 LC50 480WB 28 20 6 Programming Cables Micro800 controllers have a USB interface making standard USB cables usable as programming cables 6 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Hardware Overview Chapter 1 Use a standard USB A Male to B Male cable for programming the controller Embedded Serial Port Cables 45221 Embedded serial port cables for communication are listed here All embedded serial port cables must be 3 meters in length or shorter Embedded Serial Port Cable Selection Chart Connectors Length Cat No Connectors Length Cat No 8 pin Mini DIN to 8 pin Mini DIN 0 5 m 1 5 ft
12. Word Bit Position 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Status 0 DE3 DE2 DE1 DEO 0C3 0C2 OC1 OCO R3 R2 R1 RO S3 S2 S1 SO Status 1 03 02 01 00 U3 U2 U1 T3 T2 T1 TO CJC CJC CJC CJC over under 0C DE Status 2 PU GF CRC Reserved Field Descriptions for 2085 IRT4 Field Description CJC oc Cold Junction ndicates that the cold junction sensor is open circuit CUC DE Compensation bit when set indicates the cold junction sensor current Open Circuit readings is not reliable The previous reading shall be used instead It indicates internal compensation status if Tx is set CJC DE Cold Junction ndicates that the cold junction sensor current readings is not Compensation reliable The previous reading will be used instead It indicates Data Error internal compensation status if Tx is set CJC over Cold Junction ndicates cold junction sensor overrange above 75 C overrange Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Compensation 99 Chapter6 Expansion 1 0 Support Field Descriptions for 2085 IRT4 Field Description CJC under Cold Junction Indicates cold junction sensor is underrange below 25 C Compensation underrange CRC CRC error Indicates there is a CRC error on data receive All channelfault bits Sx are also set The error is cleared when the next good data is received DEx Data Error Indicates that the current
13. e Thermocouple T Description Defines the RTD or Thermocouple sensor type for the channel Units Set as C or F Sets the temperature unit to be used by the channel RTD Wiring Type Set as any of the following e 2 wire e 3 wire e 4 wire The wiring type for channel x This parameter is only available when the Sensor Type for the channel is RTD or 0 to 500 Ohm RTD 2Wire Cable Resistance 90 Replace value from 0 0 ohms 500 00 ohms to 0 0 ohms 655 35 ohms The specified cable resistance for the 2 wire cable When the RTD 2Wire Cable Resistance value is smaller than the input value it is subtracted from the input value during each read When the value is greater than the input value the under range or open status bit is set 1 To configure the wire resistance the Sensor Type must be RTD or 0 500 Ohm and the RTD Wiring Type must be 2 wire Otherwise this parameter is not available Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Configuration Parameters for 2085 IRT4 Configuration Property Data Format What to do Choose from the following options e Raw Proportional Data e Engineering Units 1 e Engineering Units 10 e Percent range Expansion I O Support Chapter 6 Description For more information see e Data format on page 76 e Valid Range of the Data Formats for 2085 IRT4 on page 77 Filter Update Time Se
14. e Upgrade the Micro800 controller s firmware revision using ControlFlash e Replace the Micro800 controller e Contact your local Rockwell Automation technical support representative for more information about firmware revisions for your Micro800 controller For more information on firmware revision compatibility go to http www rockwellautomation com support firmware html Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 309 Appendix F Troubleshooting List of Error Codes for Micro800 controllers Error Code Description Recommended Action OxF021 The 1 0 configuration in the user program Perform the following ee ek exist in the e Verify that you have selected the correct Micro800 controller from the Device l Toolbox e Correct the plug in I O module configuration in the user program to match that of the actual hardware configuration e Recompile and reload the program e Put the Micro800 controller into Run mode e If the error persists be sure to use Connected Components Workbench programming software to develop and download the program OxF022 The user program in the memory module Perform one of the following Pt sachin a aa e Upgrade the Micro800 controller s firmware revision using ControlFlash to be l compatible with the memory module e Replace the memory module e Contact your local Rockwell Automation technical support representative for more information about
15. x represents the expansion slot number 1 4 and yy represents the point number 00 07 for 2085 OW8 and 00 15 for 2085 OW 16 Analog 1 0 Data Mapping The following sections provide I O and status mapping for the following analog expansion I O modules Catalog Number Description 2085 IF4 4 channel 14 bit analog voltage current input module 2085 IF8 8 channel 14 bit analog voltage current input module 2085 0F4 4 channel 12 bit analog voltage current output module 2085 IRT4 4 channel 16 bit RTD and Thermocouple input module TIP Use the Connected Components Workbench software to see Global Variables Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 95 Chapter 6 Expansion 1 0 Support 2085 IF4 Status Data Mapping 2085 IF4 I O Data Mapping Analog input values are read from Global Variables _IO_Xx_AI_yy where x represents the expansion slot number 1 4 and yy represents the channel number 00 03 Analog input status values can be read from Global Variables IO_Xx_ST_yy where x represents the expansion slot number 1 4 and yy represents the status word number 00 02 Word R W 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Status 0 R PU GF CRC Reserved Status 1 R Reserved HHA1 LLA1 HA1 LA1 DE1 S1 Reserved HHAO LLAO HAO LAO DEO ISO Status 2 R Reserved HHA3 LLA3 HA3 LA3 DE3 83 Reserved HHA2 LLA2 HA2 LA2 DE2 S2 1 See Field Descriptions
16. Sets input to 0 to force the channel data word to 0 Delete and Replace an Expansion 1 0 Configuration Using our example project let us try to delete 2085 IF4 in slot 2 and 2085 OB16 in slot 3 Then let us replace the modules with 2085 OW 16 and another 2085 1Q32T module in slots 2 and 3 respectively To do this 1 On the project graphic in the center pane right click 2085 IF4 and click Delete Oo 2 RO 2085 148 2085 IF4 2085 IF8 2085 IM8 2085 IQ16 2085 1Q32T 2085 IRT4 2085 048 2085 OB16 _ 2085 OF4 2085 OV16 Data For al 2085 OW16 2085 0W8 92 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 B 2085 I1Q32T General Configuration 2085 0W16 General B 2085 1Q32T General Configuration 2085 IRT4 General Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Expansion I O Support Chapter 6 2 Another message box appears asking you if you want to empty the placeholders to the left to fill the empty slot Click No Connected Components Workbench A Do you want the empty module placeholders removed After deleting 2085 IF4 from slot 2 the project graphic should look like this 3 On the empty slot slot 2 right click and select 2085 OW 16 4 Next replace 2085 OB16 in slot 3 with a 2085 IQ32T device Right click 2085 OB16 in slot 3 and choose 2085 IQ32T The project graphic and Expansion Modules list should look lik
17. mss jy E i o 3 9in VANE f U Hes H E Ola n l 2 Ce ae a a a Dn D b d a a D a a D D a aa i fir 66 soosse 666 D Ne ee A ey A 45917 System Assembly Micro830 and Micro850 24 point Controllers Front 27 8 e 145 2 44 4 144 aa y TEE l a 2 N ig 110 8 escsessessesse9on Ja ji N N o0 Micro830 Micro850 24pt Controller with Micro800 Power Supply Measurements in millimeters 26 Expansion 1 0 Slots Applicable to Micro850 only Single width 1st slot Double width 2nd slot 2085 ECR terminator Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Install Your Controller Chapter 3 Micro830 and Micro850 24 point Controllers Side Micro830 Micro850 24pt Controller Expansion 1 0 Slots with Micro800 Power Supply Applicable to Micro850 only Single width 1st slot Double width 2nd slot Measurements in millimeters 2085 ECR terminator Micro830 and Micro850 48 point Controllers Front 100 1 110 8 Micro830 Micro850 48pt Controller with Micro800 Power Supply Expansion 1 0 Slots Applicable to Micro850 only Single width 1st slot Double width 2nd slot 2085 ECR terminator Measurements in millimeters Rockwell Aut
18. 1761 cBL AMoo 8 pin Mini DIN to 9 pin D Shell 0 5 m 1 5 ft 1761 cBL APoo 8 pin Mini DIN to 8 pin Mini DIN 2m 6 5ft 1761 CBL HMo2 8 pin Mini DIN to 9 pin D Shell 2m 6 5 ft 1761 CBL PMo2 8 pin Mini DIN to 6 pin RS 485 30 cm 1763 NC01 series A terminal block 11 8in 1 Series C or later for Class 1 Div 2 applications Embedded Ethernet Support For Micro850 controllers a 10 100 Base T Port with embedded green and yellow LED indicators is available for connection to an Ethernet network through any standard RJ 45 Ethernet cable The LED indicators serve as indicators for transmit and receive status RJ 45 Ethernet Port Pin Mapping Contact Signal Direction Primary Numbe Function r 1 TX OUT Transmit data 2 TX OUT Transmit data 3 RX IN Differential Ethernet Receive Data 4 Terminated 5 Terminated 6 RX IN Differential Ethernet Receive Data 7 Terminated 8 Terminated Shield Chassis Ground Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 yellow status LED RJ 45 connector green status LED 45920 The yellow status LED indicates Link solid yellow or No Link off The green status LED indicates activity blinking green or no activity off Chapter 1 Hardware Overview Micro850 controllers support Ethernet crossover cables 2711P CBL EX04 Ethernet Status Indication Micro850 controll
19. 20 65 C 4 149 F Temperature surrounding air max 65 C 149 F Temperature non operating IEC60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 40 85 C 40 185 F Relative humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat 5 95 noncondensing Vibration IEC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500 Hz Shock operating IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock 10g Shock non operating IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock DIN rail mounting 25 g Panel mounting 35 g ESD Immunity IEC 61000 4 2 6kV contact 8 kV air Radiated RF immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10 V M with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 80 2000 MHz 10 V M with 200 Hz sine wave 50 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz 10 V M with 200 Hz sine wave 50 Pulse 100 AM 1890 MHz 10 V M with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 2000 2700 MHz EFT B immunity IEC 61000 4 4 2 kV 5 kHz on signal ports Surge transient immunity IEC 61000 4 5 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF immunity IEC 61000 4 6 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz 231 AppendixA Specifications Certifications 2080 OW4l Certification when Value product is marked c UL us UL Listed Industrial
20. Creating a User Fault Subroutine To use the user fault subroutine 1 Create a POU Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 289 Appendix D User Interrupts 2 In the User Interrupt Configuration window configure this POU as a User Fault routine Add User Fault Routine Lol DODDO Properties Interrupt Type User Fault Routine v General Memory To E Communication Ports fo Serial Port USB Port Date and Time Interrupts Startup Faults Modbus Mapping Embedded 1 0 Plug In Modules lt Empty gt lt Empty gt UFR ID UFR click an existing UFR Description UFR Program v UntitledLD OK Cancel Apply User Interrupt Instructions Instruction Used To Page STIS Selectable Use the STIS Selectable Timed Interrupt Start 290 Timed Start instruction to the start the STI timer from the control program rather than starting automatically UID User Interrupt Use the User Interrupt Disable UID and the User 292 Disable Interrupt Enable UIE instructions to create zones in which user interrupts cannot occur UIE User Interrupt 293 Enable UIF User Interrupt Use the UIF instruction to remove selected pending 294 Flush interrupts from the system UIC User Interrupt Use this function to clear Interrupt Lost bit for the 295 Clear selected User Interrupt s STIS Selectable Timed Start STI
21. Home Marker INPUT ie configured as any embedded input from input These I O can be configured through the axis configuration feature in Connected Components Workbench Any outputs assigned for motion should not be controlled in the user program See Motion Axis Configuration in Connected Components Workbench on page 145 IMPORTANT Ifan output is configured for motion then that output can no longer be controlled or monitored by the user program and cannot be forced For example when a PTO Pulse output is generating pulses the corresponding logical variable IO_EM_DO_ xx will not toggle its value and will not display the pulses in the Variable Monitor but the physical LED will give an indication If an input is configured for motion then forcing the input only affects the user program logic and not motion For example if the input Drive Ready is false then the user cannot force Drive Ready to true by forcing the corresponding logical variable O_EM_DI_xx to be true Motion Wiring Input Output Description Motion Signals Input Output Description Uniqueness PTO pulse OUTPUT PTO pulse from the embedded fast Not Shared output to be connected to Drive PTO input PTO direction OUTPUT PTO pulse direction indication to be Not Shared connected to Drive Direction input Servo Drive On OUTPUT The control signal used to Can be shared activate deactivate Servo Drive with more than This signal becomes Activ
22. If the error persists contact your local Rockwell Automation technical support representative For contact information see http support rockwellautomation com MySupport asp OxF28z z indicates the slot number of the expansion I O If z 0 then the slot number cannot be identified Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Expansion 1 0 baudrate error Perform the following e Cycle power to the Micro800 controller or e Replace the slot number z module If the error persists contact your local Rockwell Automation technical support representative For contact information see http support rockwellautomation com MySupport asp 311 Appendix F Troubleshooting List of Error Codes for Micro800 controllers Error Code OxF29z z indicates the slot number of the expansion 1 0 If z 0 then the slot number cannot be identified Description A module fault is detected on your expansion 1 0 module Recommended Action Perform the following e Cycle power the Micro800 controller or e Replace the slot number z module If the error persists contact your local Rockwell Automation technical support representative For contact information see http support rockwellautomation com MySupport asp OxF2Az z indicates the slot number of the expansion I O If z 0 then the slot number cannot be identified Expansion I O power failure Perform the fol
23. Perform the following e Power off the controller e Attach the expansion 1 0 terminator on the last expansion 1 0 module on the system e Power on the controller OxF230 The maximum number of expansion I O Perform the following modules has been exceeded e Power off the controller e Check that the number of expansion 1 0 modules is not more than four e Power on the controller OxF250 There is a non recoverable error and the Perform the following expansion I O module s could not be detected e Cycle power to your Micro800 controller If the error persists contact your local Rockwell Automation technical support representative For contact information see http support rockwellautomation com MySupport asp OxF26z An expansion I O master fault is Perform the following z indicates the slot number of the expansion I O If z 0 then the slot number cannot be identified detected on the system e Cycle power to your Micro800 controller If the error persists contact your local Rockwell Automation technical support representative For contact information see http support rockwellautomation com MySupport asp OxF27z z indicates the slot number of the expansion I O If z 0 then the slot number cannot be identified A non recoverable communication fault has occurred on the expansion 1 0 module Perform the following e Cycle power to the Micro800 controller or e Replace the slot number z module
24. 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz 209 Appendix A Specifications Certifications Certification Value when product is marked c UL us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E322657 UL Listed for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations certified for U S and Canada See UL File E334470 CE European Union 2004 108 EC EMC Directive compliant with EN 61326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B European Union 2006 95 EC LVD compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 11 C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions 1 See the Product Certification link at http www rockwellautomation com products certification for Declaration of Conformity Certificates and other certification details Micro830 24 Point Controllers General Specifications 2080 LC 30 24QWB 2080 LC30 240VB 2080 LC30 240BB Attribute 2080 LC30 240WB 2080 LC30 240VB 2080 LC30 240BB Number of 1 0 24 14 inputs 10 outputs Dimensions 90 x 150 x 80 mm HxWxD 3 54 x 5 91 x 3 15 in Shipping weight approx 0 423 kg 0 933 Ib Wire size 0 2 2 5 mm 24 12 AWG solid copper wire or 0 2 2 5 mm 24 12 AWG stranded copper wi
25. Analog Expansion 1 0 Features Expansion I O Support Chapter 6 The 2085 IA8 2085 IM8 2085 IQ16 and 2085 1Q32T modules update the controller with new data whenever an input point transitions from On to Off and Off to On On to Off and Off to On filter times can be adjusted through the Connected Components Workbench software These filters improve noise immunity within a signal A larger filter value affects the length of delay times for signals from these modules You can select from a series of operational ranges for each channel The range designates the minimum and maximum signals that are detectable by the module Discrete Output Output modules may be used to drive a variety of output devices Typical output devices compatible with the outputs include e motor starters e solenoids e indicators Follow these guidelines when designing a system e Make sure that the outputs can supply the necessary surge and continuous current for proper operation See specifications for Expansion I O on page 240 for more information e Make sure that the surge and continuous current are not exceeded Damage to the module could result When sizing output loads check the documentation supplied with the output device for the surge and continuous current needed to operate the device The Micro800 standard digital outputs are capable of directly driving the Micro800 standard digital inputs TIP User configurable options are not available
26. Data format Left justified 16 bit 2s complement Conversion type SAR Update rate lt 2 ms per enabled channel without 50 Hz 60 Hz rejection lt 8 ms for all channel 8 ms with 50 Hz 60 Hz rejection Step response time up to 63 2 point Moving Average Filter 4 point Moving Average Filter 8 point Moving Average Filter 50 60 Hz Rejection Filter 4 16 ms for 1 8 enabled channels 6 24 ms for 1 8 enabled channels 12 60 ms for 1 8 enabled channels 600 ms for 1 8 enabled channels Input current terminal user 4 20 mA default configurable 0 20 mA Input voltage terminal user 10V configurable 0 10V Input impedance Voltage terminal gt 1 MQ Current terminal lt 100 Q Absolute accuracy 0 10 Full Scale 25 C Accuracy drift with temp Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Voltage terminal 0 00428 Full Scale C Current terminal 0 00407 Full Scale C 245 AppendixA Specifications Input Specifications 2085 IF4 and 2085 1F8 Attribute 2085 1F4 2085 IF8 Calibration required Factory calibrated No customer calibration supported Overload max 30V continuous or 32 mA continuous one channel at a time Channel diagnostics Over and under range or open circuit condition by bit reporting Output Specifications 2085 OF4 Attribute 2085 0F4 Number of outpu
27. Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations rtified for U S and Canada See UL File 334470 CE European Union 2004 108 EC EMC Directive compliant with EN 61326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B 6 6 6 European Union 2006 95 EC LVD compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 11 C Tick Australian AS N Radiocommunications Act compliant with ZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions 1 See the Product Certification link at http www rockwellautomation com products certification for Declaration of Conformity Certificates and other certification details Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 213 Appendix A Specifications Micro830 48 Point Controllers General Specifications 2080 LC 30 48AWB 2080 LC30 480WB 2080 LC30 480VB 2080 LC30 480BB Attribute 2080 LC30 48AWB 2080 LC30 480WB 2080 LC30 480VB 2080 LC30 480BB Number of 0 48 28 inputs 20 outputs Dimensions 90 x 230 x 80 mm HxWxD 3 54 x 9 06 x 3 15 in Shipping weight approx 0 725 kg 1 60 Ib Wire size 0 2 2 5 mm2 24 12 AWG solid copper wire or 0 2 2 5 mm 24 12 AWG stranded copper wire rated 90 C 194 F insulation max Wiring category 2 on signal ports 2 on power ports Wire ty
28. For MoveVelocity Stop and Halt function blocks TargetPos is 0 except when the TargetPos set by previous position function blocks is not cleared 140 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO Chapter 9 Data Elements for Axis_Ref Element Data Type Description name CommandPos REAL On a moving axis this is the current position the controller float commands the axis to go to TargetVel REAL The maximum target velocity issued to the axis by a move function float block The value of TargetVel is same as the velocity setting in current function block or smaller depending on other parameters in the same function block This element is a signed value indicating direction information See PTO Pulse Accuracy on page 156 for more information CommandVel REAL During motion this element refers to the velocity the controller float commands the axis to use This element is a signed value indicating direction information 0 See Real Data Resolution on page 153 for more information on REAL data conversion and rounding IMPORTANT Once an axis is flagged with error and the error ID is not zero the user needs to reset the axis using MC_Reset before issuing any other movement function block IMPORTANT The update for axis status is performed at the end of one program scan cycle and the update is aligned with the upd
29. Indicates the controller is attempting to drive the analog output above its normal operating range or above the channel s High Clamp level However the module continues to convert analog output data to a maximum full range value if clamp levels are not set for the channel PU Power Up Indicates an unexpected MCU reset has occurred in RUN mode All channel error bits Ex and fault bits Sx are also set The module stays connected with no configuration after the reset PU and channel fault bits are cleared when a good configuration is downloaded Sx Channel Fault Indicates there is an error associated with the channel x Ux Under Range Flag Indicates the controller is attempting to drive the analog output below its normal operating range or below the channel s Low Clamp level if clamp limits are set for the channel Specialty 1 0 Data Mapping 2085 IRT4 I O Data Mapping Analog input values can be read from Global Variables_IO_Xx_AI_yy where x represents the expansion slot number 1 4 and yy represents the channel number 00 03 Analog input status can be read from Global Variables IO_Xx_ST_yy where x represents the expansion slot number 1 4 and yy represents the status word number 00 02 Individual bits within a status word can be read by appending a zz to the Global Variable name where zz is the bit number 00 15 2085 IRT4 Status Data Mapping
30. Local Variables UntitledLD System Variables Micro830 I O Micro830 Defined uy Name Logical Value Physical Value Lock Data Type Dimension Alias sii e gt at ae y st of ae _10_EM_DO_00 4 4 BOOL 10_EM_DO_01 BOOL 10_EM_DO_02 BOOL 10_EM_DO_03 BOOL 10_EM_DO_04 BOOL T 1O_EM_DO_05 BOOL E O E a I 10_EM_DI_01 BOOL 10_EM_DI_02 BOOL 7 _10_EM_DI_03 BOOL _1O_EM_DI_04 BOOL _10_EM_DI_05 BOOL I0_EM_DI_06 BOOL il ee In many cases the front of the controller is not visible to the operator and Connected Components Workbench is not online with the controller If you want the force status to be visible to the operator then the User Program must read the force status using the SYS_INFO function block and then display the force status on something that the operator can see such as the human machine interface HMI or stack light The following is an example program in Structured Text 1 Read System Information including Force Enable bit 2 SYS_INFO 1 TRUE 3 4 Turn on Warning Light if Forces are Enabled 5 If SYS_INFO_1 sts ForcesInstall TRUE THEN 6 _I O EM DO 05 TRUE 7 ELSE a _IO EM DO 05 FALSE 9 END_IF If the front of the controller is visible and not blocked by the cabinet enclosure Micro830 and Micro850 controllers have a Force LED indicator 1 0 Forces After a Power Cycle After a controller is power cycled all I O f
31. Memory Communication Ports A Serial Port Parameters UntitledLD USB Port Auto Start Fase v Date and Time Interrupts Startup Faults Modbus Mapping Embedded 1 0 Plug In Modules lt Empty gt lt Empty gt Set Point fi ms OK Cancel Apply Help The Selectable Timed Interrupt STI provides a mechanism to solve time critical control requirements The STI is a trigger mechanism that allows you to scan or solve control program logic that is time sensitive Example of where you would use the STI are e PID type applications where a calculation must be performed at a specific time interval e A block of logic that needs to be scanned mote often How an STI is used is typically driven by the demands requirements of the application It operates using the following sequence 1 The user selects a time interval 2 When a valid interval is set and the STI is properly configured the controller monitors the STI value 3 When the time period has elapsed the controller s normal operation is interrupted 4 The controller then scans the logic in the STI POU 5 When the STI POU is completed the controller returns to where it was prior to the interrupt and continues normal operation This section covers the configuration and status management of the STI function Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 297 Appendix D 298 User Interrupts STI Function Configuration
32. September 2012 Appendix C Quickstarts This chapter covers some common tasks and quickstart instructions that are aimed to make you familiar with the in Connected Component Workbench The following quickstarts are included Topic Page Flash Upgrade Your Micro800 Firmware 255 Establish Communications Between RSLinx and a Micro830 Micro850 260 Controller through USB Configure Controller Password 267 Use the High Speed Counter 270 Forcing I Os 283 This quick start will show you how to flash update the firmware in a Micro800 controller using ControlFLASH ControlFLASH is installed or updated with the latest Micro800 firmware when Connected Components Workbench software is installed on your computer A ATTENTION All Ethernet settings are reverted to factory default after a ControlFlash firmware upgrade For users who need to use the same static IP address as previously set for example use the Memory Module to store project settings prior to a flash upgrade so that you can have the option to restore your original Ethernet settings On Micro850 controllers users can use flash upgrade their controllers through the Ethernet port in addition to the USB 1 Through USB Verify successful RSLinx Classic communications with your Micro800 controller by USB using RSWho Micro810 12 pt controller uses the 12PtM810_xxxxx driver and the Micro830 Micro850 uses the AB_VBP x driver Workstation ROCK WELL D
33. ma Y Function Blocks J Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Use the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Chapter 10 The following section describes HSC data structures HSC APP Data Structure Define a HSC App Data configuration data data type HSCAPP when programming a HSC During HSC counting the data should not be changed except if the configuration needs to be reloaded To reload HSC configuration change the HSC APP Data then call HSC function block with command 0x03 set reload Otherwise the change to HSC App Data during HSC counting will be ignored owen an tla abut ott f T oE SCALER_1 SCALER ReadWrite HSC HSC A Readwrite HSC_cmd_0 USINT ReadWrite E HScApp0 PisEnable BOOL ReadWrite HSCApp_0 HscID UINT ReadWrite H HSCApp_0 HscMode UINT ReadWrite HSCApp_0 Accumulator DINT Readwrite HSCApp_0 HPSetting DINT Readwrite HSCApp_0 LPSetting DINT Readwrite HSCApp_0 OFSetting DINT Readwrite E HSCApp_0 UFSetting DINT Readwrite HSCApp_0 OutputMask UDINT ReadWwrite H HSCApp_0 HPOutput UDINT ReadWwrite GR Hsc pp_o LPoutput UDINT ReadWwrite TIP HSC1 HSC3 and HSC5 support mode 0 2 4 6 and 8 only and HSCO HSC2 and HSC4 support all counting modes PLS Enable HSCAPP PLSEnable Description Data Format PLSEnable bit User Program Access read write This bit enables and disables the HSC Programmable Limit Switch
34. that is when the MC_Home function block is issued Scenario 1 Moving part at right positive side of Lower Limit switch before homing starts The homing motion sequence for this scenario is as follows 1 Moving part moves to its left side in negative direction Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 163 Chapter 9 164 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO When Lower Limit switch is detected the moving part decelerates to stop or stops immediately according to Limit Switch Hard Stop configuration Moving part moves back in positive direction in creep velocity to detect Lower Limit switch On Off edge Once Lower Limit switch On Off edge is detected start to detect first Ref Pulse signal Once the first Ref Pulse signal comes record the position as the mechanical home position and decelerate to stop Move to the configured home position The mechanical home position recorded during moving back sequence plus the home offset configured for the axis through the Connected Components Workbench software Scenario 2 Moving part on Lower Limit switch before homing starts The homing motion sequence for this scenario is as follows 1 Moving part moves to its right side in Positive direction in creep velocity to detect Lower Limit switch On Off edge Once Lower Limit switch On Off edge is detected start to detect first Ref Pulse s
35. 0 0 cece eee eee 275 Assign Variables to the Function Block 0 000 e000 278 Run the High Speed Counter sais sfetdewawcocen gon cecdined 279 Use the Programmable Limit Switch PLS Function 281 Fr ine WO oe asec a A EEA OR AEE eae ERARA 283 Checking if Forces locks are Enabled oc0v1geyenadencious hicees 283 I O Forces After a Power Gycless ys cdvocivceeata eidwaee reac 284 Appendix D Information About Using Interrupts 3 s0 00s eererseeeeonenes 285 What is an Interrupt kismet ial CUR ait eee adhd 285 When Can the Controller Operation be Interrupted 286 Priority of User Interrupts 2 202 en inci se ceeen ee nuevas anett 287 User Interrupt Configuration i550 ss siissseereverseedeceees 289 User Fault Routine doc ogee She eee hae eeee ae 289 User Interrupt Instimctionsss 0vagasecencnnesasat des are peste 290 STIS Selectable Timed Start ccccccececeececncece 290 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM001D EN E September 2012 xiii Table of Contents System Loading Troubleshooting Non isolated Thermocouple and RTD Plug in Modules xiv UID User Interrupt Disable 2 5cn hha wnuiteiueeaateaasds 292 UIE User Interrupt Enable ovens cece eat uaeteitpiewersrceane 293 UIF User Interrupt Flush nneenseneeueeneeneeeee ese 294 UIC User Interrupt Clear vcs dows aricetotenuaveteusts 295 Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function 296 Selectable Time Interr
36. 1 2 3 4 See Convert Analog Value to Data Format Value on page 73 The resolution is 0 001V or 0 001 mA per count For example 9999 here means 9 999V or 9 999 mA or 9999 x 0 001 The resolution is 0 01 per count For example 9999 here means 99 99 or 9999 x 0 01 See Convert Analog Value to Data Format Value on page 73 The full range value of a 0 20 mA is 0 21 mA b 4 to 20 mA is 3 2 21 mA c 10 10V is 10 5 10 5V d 0 10V is 0 5 10 5V Valid Range of the 2085 OF4 Data Formats Data Format Type Range 0 20mA 4 20 mA 10 10V 0 10V 4 Raw Proportional 32768 32767 Data Engineering Units 2 0 21000 3200 21000 10500 10500 0 10500 Percent Range 0 10500 500 10625 Not supported 0 10500 1 See Convert Analog Value to Data Format Value on page 73 2 The resolution is 0 001V or 0 001 mA per count For example 9999 here means 9 999V or 9 999 mA or 9999 x 0 001 The resolution is 0 01 per count For example 9999 here means 99 99 or 9999 x 0 01 See Convert Analog Value to Data Format Value on page 73 The full range value of a 0 20 mA is 0 21 mA b 4 20 mA is 3 2 21 mA c 10 10V is 10 5 10 5V d 0 10V is 0 10 5V Convert Analog Value to Data Format Value The formula for converting an analog value x to a data format value y or conversely deriving data format value y to analo
37. 1 10 in 3 54 in 87 mm 3 42 in Micro850 Controller 45309 Mounting dimensions do not include mounting feet or DIN rail latches DIN Rail Mounting The module can be mounted using the following DIN rails 35 x 7 5 mm x 1 mm EN 50 022 35 x7 5 TIP For environments with greater vibration and shock concerns use the panel mounting method instead of DIN rail mounting ATTENTION This product is grounded through the DIN rail to chassis A ground Use zinc plated yellow chromate steel DIN rail to assure proper grounding The use of other DIN rail materials for example aluminum or plastic that can corrode oxidize or are poor conductors can result in improper or intermittent grounding Secure DIN rail to mounting surface approximately every 200 mm 7 8 in and use end anchors appropriately Before mounting the module on a DIN rail use a flat blade screwdriver in the DIN rail latch and pry it downwards until it is in the unlatched position 1 Hook the top of the DIN rail mounting area of the module onto the DIN rail and then press the bottom until the module snaps onto the DIN rail 2 Push the DIN rail latch back into the latched position Use DIN rail end anchors Allen Bradley part number 1492 EAJ35 or 1492 EAHJ35 for vibration or shock environments Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 59 Chapter 6 60 Expansion 1 0 Support To remove your module from the DIN rail pr
38. 10 z resistive load Number of operations X104 DC 30V T 5 LE K AC 250V cos 0 4 3 TERE 0 5 1 0 2 0 3 0 45629 Switching capacity A Micro850 Controllers The following tables provide specifications ratings and certifications for the 24 point and 48 point Micro850 controllers 218 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Micro850 24 Point Controllers Specifications Appendix A General Specifications 2080 LC 50 24AWB 2080 LC50 240WB 2080 LC50 240VB 2080 LC50 240BB Attribute 2080 LC50 24AWB 2080 LC50 240WB 2080 LC50 240VB 2080 LC50 240BB Number of 0 24 14 inputs 10 outputs Dimensions 90 x 158 x 80 mm HxWxD 3 54 x 6 22 x 3 15 in Shipping weight approx 0 423 kg 0 933 Ib Wire size 0 2 2 5 mm 24 12 AWG solid copper wire or 0 2 2 5 mm 24 12 AWG stranded copper wire rated 90 C 194 F insulation max Wiring category 2 on signal ports 2 on power ports 2 on communication ports Wire type Use Copper Conductors only Terminal screw torque 0 4 0 5 Nm 3 5 4 4 Ib in using a 0 6 x 3 5 mm flat blade screwdriver Note Use a handheld screwdriver to hold down the screws at the side Input circuit type 24V DC sink source standard and high speed Output circuit type Relay 24V DC sink standard and high speed 24V D
39. 32768 32767 See Convert Analog Value to Data Format Value on page 78 for the conversion method Percent Range The input data is presented as a percentage of the normal operating range For example 0 100 mV equals 0 100 or 300 1800 C equals 0 100 for thermocouple type B sensor See Convert Analog Value to Data Format Value on page 78 for the conversion method Valid Range of the Data Formats for 2085 IRT4 The following table shows the valid range of the Data Format versus the Data Type Range for channels 0 3 Valid Range of the 2085 IRT4 Data Formats Data Format Sensor Type Temperature Sensor Type Sensor Type 10 Thermocouples 8 RTDs 0 100 mV 0 500 ohms Raw Proportional Data 32768 32767 Engineering Units x 1 Temperature Value C F 0 10000 0 5000 Engineering Units x 10 Temperature Value C F 0 1000 0 500 Percent Range 0 10000 1 See Convert Analog Value to Data Format Value on page 78 2 The resolution is 0 01 per count For example 9999 here means 99 99 or 9999 x 0 01 See Convert Analog Value to Data Format Value on page 78 for the conversion method 3 The resolution is 0 1 C F per count For example 999 here means 99 9 C F or 999 x 0 1 C F The range depends on the selected sensor type 4 The resolution is 1 C F per count For example 999 here means 999 C F or 999 x 1 C F The range depen
40. CIP Serial Driver Parameters Parameter Options Default Baud rate Toggles between the communication rate of 1200 2400 38400 4800 9600 19200 and 38400 Parity Specifies the parity setting for the serial port Parity None provides additional message packet error detection Select Even Odd or None Station Address The station address for the serial port on the DF1 1 master The only valid address is 1 DF1 Mode DF1 Full Duplex read only Configured as full duplex by default Control Line No Handshake read only Configured as no handshake by default Duplicate Packet Detects and eliminates duplicate responses to a Enabled Detection message Duplicate packets may be sent under noisy communication conditions when the sender s retries are not set to 0 Toggles between Enabled and Disabled Error Detection Toggles between CRC and BCC CRC Embedded To use embedded responses choose Enabled After One Responses Unconditionally If you want the controller to use Received embedded responses only when it detects embedded responses from another device choose After One Received If you are communicating with another Allen Bradley device choose Enabled Unconditionally Embedded responses increase network traffic efficiency NAK Retries The number of times the controller will resend a 3 message packet because the processor received a NAK response to the previous message packet transmission
41. Chapter8 Program Execution in Micro800 Memory Allocation Guidelines and Limitations for Advanced Users 114 Two system variables are also available on revision 2 x System Variables for Scan and Powerup on Firmware Release 2 x Variable Type Description _SYSVA_FIRST_SCAN BOOL First scan bit Can be used to initialize or reset variables immediately after every transition from Program to Run mode Note True only on first scan After that it is false SYSVA_POWER_UP_BIT BOOL Powerup bit Can be used to initialize or reset variables immediately after download from Connected Components Workbench or immediately after being loaded from memory backup module for example 2080 MEMBAK RTC 2080 LCD Note True only on the first scan after a powerup or running a new ladder for the first time Depending on base size available memory on Micro800 controllers are shown in the table below Memory Allocation for Micro800 Controllers Attribute 10 16 point 24 and 48 points Program steps 4K 10K Data bytes 8 KB 20 KB 1 Estimated Program and Data size are typical program steps and variables are created dynamically 1 Program Step 12 data bytes These specifications for instruction and data size are typical numbers When a project is created for Micro800 memory is dynamically allocated as either program or data memory at build time This means that program size can exceed the published specificatio
42. Do not remove the Removable Terminal Block RTB until power is removed Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 11 Chapter2 About Your Controller Safety Considerations 12 Environment and Enclosure A This equipment is intended for use in a Pollution Degree 2 industrial environment in overvoltage Category Il applications as defined in IEC 60664 1 at altitudes up to 2000 m 6562 ft without derating This equipment is considered Group 1 Class A industrial equipment according to IEC CISPR 11 Without appropriate precautions there may be difficulties with electromagnetic compatibility in residential and other environments due to conducted and radiated disturbances This equipment is supplied as open type equipment It must be mounted within an enclosure that is suitably designed for those specific environmental conditions that will be present and appropriately designed to prevent personal injury resulting from accessibility to live parts The enclosure must have suitable flame retardant properties to prevent or minimize the spread of flame complying with a flame spread rating of 5VA V2 V1 VO or equivalent if non metallic The interior of the enclosure must be accessible only by the use of a tool Subsequent sections of this publication may contain additional information regarding specific enclosure type ratings that are required to comply with certain product safety certifications In addition t
43. External Reset and Hold mode Ab Quadrature X4 Counter A Type input B Type input Not Used 8 mode 5a Quadrature X4 Counter with A Type input B Type input Z Type Reset Hold 9 External Reset and Hold Micro830 Micro850 48 point controller HSC Input Wiring Mapping Modes of Operation Input 0 HSCO Input 1 HSCO Input 2 HSCO Input 3 HSCO Mode Value in User Input 2 HSC1 Input 3 HSC1 Input 6 HSC2 Input 7 HSC2 Program Input 4 HSC2 Input 5 HSC2 Input 10 HSC4 Input 11 HSC4 Input 6 HSC3 Input 7 HSC3 Input 8 HSC4 Input 9 HSC4 Input 10 HSC5 Input 11 HSC5 Counter with Internal Direction Count Up Not Used 0 mode 1a Counter with Internal Count Up Not Used Reset Hold 1 Direction External Reset and Hold mode 1b Counter with External Count Up Down Direction ot Used 2 Direction mode 2a Counter with External Count Up Down Direction Reset Hold 3 Direction Reset and Hold mode 2b Two Input Counter mode 3a Count Up Count Down ot Used 4 Two Input Counter with Count Up Count Down Reset Hold 5 External Reset and Hold mode 3b Quadrature Counter mode 4a A Type input B Type input Not Used 6 Quadrature Counter with A Type input B Type input Z Type Reset Hold 7 External Reset and Hold mode 4b Quadrature X4 Counter A Type input B Type input Not Used 8 mode 5a Quadrature X4 Counter with A Type input B Type input Z Type Reset
44. Fungian Blocks d IMPORTANT The PLS Function only operates in tandem with the HSC of a Micro830 controller To use the PLS function an HSC must first be configured PLS Data structure The Programmable Limit Switch function is an additional set of operating modes for the High Speed Counter When operating in these modes the preset and output data values are updated using user supplied data each time one of the presets is reached These modes are programmed by providing a PLS data block that contains the data sets to be used PLS data structure is a flexible array with each element defined as follows Element Order Data Type Element Description Word 0 1 DINT High preset setting Word 2 3 DINT Low preset setting Word 4 5 UDINT High preset Output data Word 6 7 UDINT Low preset Output data The total number of elements for one PLS data cannot be larger than 255 When PLS is not enabled PLS data are still required to be defined but can be not initialized oe gtt ot oe SCALER_1 SCALER Read Write HSC_1 HSC 7 ReadWrite HS5C_and_bs USINT Readwrite HSCApp_0 HSCAPP o ReadWrite apen O o rr PLSData_O PLS gt pia Readwrite Eeo PS Readvinte Pisbete_ oft HstHe DINT ReadWrite om Pisbata di iHerLe DIT Reade gt Plsbata CC HstHPGUIPUE DOMT Reade Pisbata 1 HstLPourput DINT R adwinte gt Eo aopa PIS
45. HSCAPPHSCMode on page 172 The Error Detected flag is a status bit that can be used in the control program to detect if an error is present in the HSC sub system The most common type of error that this bit represents is a configuration error When this bit is set 1 you should look at the specific error code in parameter HSCSTS ErrorCode This bit is maintained by the controller and is set when there is an HSC error This bit can be cleared by the user if necessary Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Use the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Chapter 10 Count Up HSCSTS CountUpFlag Description Data Format HSCModes JUser Program Access HSCSTS CountUpFlag bit 0 9 read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode HSCAPPHSCMode on page 172 The Count Up bit is used with all of the HSCs modes 0 9 If the HSCSTS CountEnable bit is set the Count Up bit is set 1 If the HSCSTS CountEnable is cleared the Count Up bit is cleared 0 Count Down HSCSTS CountDownFlag Description Data Format HSC Modes User Program Access SCSTS CountDownFlag bit 2 9 read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode HSCAPPHSCMode on page 172 The Count Down bit is used with the bidirectional counters modes 2 9 If the HSCSTS CountEnable bit is set the Count Down bit is set 1 If the HSCSTS CountEnable bit
46. Limits Hard Limits When hard limit is reached apply Emergency Stop Profile gt 7 Lower Hard Limit 7 Upper Hard Limit Active Level Low z Active Level Low X Switch Input 10_EM_DLOO Switch Input 10 EM DLO1 Soft Limits When soft limit is reached Emergency Stop Profile will be applied Lower Soft Limit 00 mm F Upper Soft Limit ATTENTION To learn more about the different types of Limits see Limits on page 136 Limits Parameters Parameter Value Hard Limits Defines upper and lower hard limits for the axis When hard limits is reached apply Configure whether to perform a forced PTO hardware stop immediately turn off pulse output or whether to decelerate leave pulse output on and use deceleration values as defined on the Emergency Stop profile Set as any of the following e Forced PTO Hardware Stop e Emergency Stop Profile Lower Hard Limit Click checkbox to enable a lower hard limit Active Level for Lower Hard Limit High or Low Upper Hard Limit Click checkbox to enable Active Level for Upper Hard Limit High or Low Soft Limits Defines upper and lower soft limits values Lower Soft Limit Lower soft limit should be less than upper soft limit 7 1 Click checkbox to enable an lower upper soft limit Upper Soft Limit 2 Specify a value in mm To convert from user units to pulse Travel per revolution Pulse per revolution Valu
47. Range C F Rate in Hz Accuracy C Min Max 1 0 C 3 0 C PT100 385 200 660 150 590 lt 150 238 3 wire others 328 1220 238 1094 gt 590 1094 4 17 6 25 10 16 7 19 6 P P 33 50 1 0 PT200 385 200 630 150 570 lt 150 238 328 1166 238 1058 gt 5700058 62 123 242 470 3 0 PT500 385 200 630 150 580 lt 150 238 2 and 3 wire Cu10 328 1166 238 1076 gt 580 1076 4 17 6 25 10 16 7 i 7 1 0 lt 3 0 PT1000 385 200 630 150 570 lt 150 238 gt 328 1166 _ 238 1058 gt 570 1058 19 39 50 62 103 242 PT100 392 200 660 150 590 lt 150 238 328 1220 238 1094 gt 590 1094 2 wire others PT200392 200 oa 150 5 eA Ge 328 1166 238 1058 gt 570 1058 e030 PT500 392 200 630 150 580 lt 150 238 328 1166 238 1076 gt 580 1076 PT1000 392 50 500 20 450 lt 20 4 58 932 4 842 gt 450 842 Cu10 427 100 260 lt 70 94 148 500 gt 220 428 Ni120 672 80 260 50 220 lt 50 58 112 500 58 428 gt 220 428 NiFe604518 200 200 170 170 lt 170 274 328 392 274 338 gt 170 338 1 For Cu10 427 accuracy range is within gt 1 0 lt 3 0 for 70 220 C 94 428 F Above this temperature range it is gt 3 0 C as shown in the table To configure RTD type and update rate in Connected
48. September 2012 223 Appendix A Input Specifications Attribute Specifications 2080 LC50 48AWB 120V AC Input 2080 LC50 48Q0WB 2080 LC50 480VB 2080 LC50 480BB High Speed DC Input Inputs 0 11 Standard DC Input Inputs 12 and higher IEC input compatibility Type 3 Inrush current max 250 mA 120V AC Input frequency max 63 Hz Output Specifications Attribute 2080 LC50 48AWB 2080 LC50 480WB Relay Output 2080 LC50 480VB 2080 LC50 480BB Hi Speed Output Outputs 0 3 Standard Output Outputs 4 and higher Number of outputs 20 4 16 Output voltage min 5V DC 5V AC 10 8V DC 10V DC Output voltage max 125V DC 265V AC 26 4V DC 26 4V DC Load current min 10 mA Load current 2 0A 100 mA high speed operation 1 0 A 30 C continuous max 1 0A 30 C 0 3 A 65 C standard 0 3 A 65 C standard operation operation Surge current per point See Relay Contacts Ratings on page 216 4 0 A for 10 ms every 1 s 30 C every 2s 65 och Current per common max 5A Turn on time Turn off time max 10 ms 2 5 us 1 Applies for general purpose operation only Does not apply for high speed operation 224 0 1 ms 1 ms Isolated AC Inputs 2080 LC50 480WB 2080 LC50 480VB 2080 LC50 480BB Inputs 0 3 Attribute Value On state voltage nom 12 24V AC 50 60 Hz Off state voltage min 4V AC 50 60Hz Operating
49. Terminal screw 0 5 0 6 Nm orque max 4 4 5 3 Ib in 2 Bus current draw max 5V DC 120 mA 5V DC 160 mA 24V DC 50 mA 24V DC 100 mA Load current max refer to Relay contact 0 35 power factor below Power dissipation 2 72 W 5 14W otal Relay contact 0 35 power factor Max Amperes Amperes Volt Amperes Volts Make Break Continuous Make Break 120VAC 15A 15A 2 0A 1800VA 180VA 240VAC 7 5A 0 75A 24V DC 1 0A 1 0A 28V A 125VDC 0 22A Minimum load per 10 mA per point point Off state leakage max 1 5 mA Status indicators 8 yellow indicators 16 yellow indicators Isolation voltage 240V continuous Reinforced Insulation Type channel to system Type tested 3250V DC for 60 s Pilot duty rating C300 R150 Enclosure type rating Meets IP20 North American temp T4 code 1 Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 2 RTB hold down screws should be tightened by hand They should not be tightened using a power tool Analog Expansion 1 0 2085 IF4 2085 IF8 2085 OF4 Analog Input and Output Modules Attribute 2085 1F4 2085 0F4 2085 IF8 Number of 1 0 4 8 Dimensions HxWxD 28 x 90 x 87 mm 44 5 x 90 x 87 mm 1 1 x 3 54 x 3 42 in 1 75 x 3 54 x 3 42 in Shipping weight 140 g 4 93 oz 220 g 7 76 02 approx Bus current
50. To comply with UL restrictions this equipment must be powered from a source compliant with the following Class 2 or Limited Voltage Current When assembled align the female connector over the module s male header using the keying slot as a guide Firmly lock them together with the upper and lower retaining arms Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Chapter6 Expansion 1 0 Support Option 1 Wire the Connector with Available 40 pin Connector m 2085 1032T module AA Keyed female connector H I p Included with the module Contact pins provided with E Fal female connector can EST accept 22 26 AWG wires Bayh OP O000000 gt A C0O0000000 Keyed male gt onnea C User terminal connector Panel buttons sensors 44924 Assemble the Wire Contacts 1 Strip the wire insulation to expose 4 mm 5 32 in of wire Crimp pins can accept 22 26 AWG wire into the module could cause damage Once wiring is complete be sure the module is free of all metal fragments before removing the protective debris strip Failure to remove the strip before operating can cause overheating i ATTENTION Be careful when stripping wires Wire fragments that fall 2 Insert the wire into the crimp pin as far as the wire stop 4mm eeni Stripped wire Wire stop Wire barrel 44916 3 Crimp t
51. To convert from parameter value from pulse to user units Travel per revolution Value in user unit Value in pulse x Pulse per revolution TIP A red border on an input field indicates that an invalid value has been entered Scroll over the field to see tooltip message that will let you know the valid value range for the parameter Supply the valid value 4 Set Homing parameters based on the description below Click Homing axisl Homing Wi i Homing Direction Negative M Homing Velocity 250 mm sec Homing Acceleration 250 mm sec ANNE Homing Deceleration 250 mm sec Homing Jeric 0 0 mm sec A Start Home C Home Marker B Home Switch D Stop Home Creep Velocity 50 mm sec Home Offset 00 mm Home Switch Input E Home Marker Input Input 10_EM_D1 02 Input 10_EM_DLO8 Active Level High gt Active Level High Homing Parameters Parameter Value range Homing Direction Positive clockwise or negative counterclockwise Homing Velocity Range 1 100 000 pulse sec Default 5 000 0 pulse sec 25 0 mm sec NOTE Homing Velocity should not be greater than the maximum velocity Homing Acceleration Range 1 10 000 000 pulse sec Default 5000 0 pulse sec 25 0 mm sec NOTE Homing Acceleration should not be greater than Maximum Acceleration Homing Deceleration Range 1 10 000 000 pulse sec Default 5000 0 pulse sec 25 0 mm sec NOTE Homing Deceleration should not be gr
52. best use of these tools For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit http www rockwellautomation com support Installation Assistance If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manual You can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running United States or Canada 1 440 646 3434 Outside United States or Use the Worldwide Locator at http www rockwellautomation com support americas phone_en html or contact Canada your local Rockwell Automation representative New Product Satisfaction Return Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number call the phone number above to obtain one to your distributor to complete the return process Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure Documentation Feedback Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any sug
53. gt lt Empty e Right click the plug in slot in the Controller Properties tree and choose would like to add 2080 IF2 2080 IF4 2080 OF2 2080 RTD2 2080 SERIALISOL 2080 TC2 The device configuration window should show the added plug in modules Micro830 General Properties Channels Memory E Communication Ports Channel 0 Serial Port USB Port RTD Type 200 Pt 385 v pasand Time Data Update Rate 33 2 Hz v Interrupts Startup Fauks f Modbus Mapping Embedded 1 0 RTD Type 100 Pt 385 v Plug In Modules eng Data Update Rate 16 7 Hz v 2080 TC2 lt Empty gt 3 Click the 2080 RTD or 2080 TC2 plug in module to set up the configuration properties Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Non isolated Thermocouple and RTD Plug in Modules Appendix G a For 2080 TC2 specify Thermocouple Type and Update Rate for Channels 0 and 1 The default sensor type for TC is Type K and the default update rate is 16 7 Hz Properties General hrad Memory Ees 2080 TC2 E Communication Ports Channel 0 Serial Port ean USB Port Thermocouple Type TypeK M Data ana Tine Data Update Rate 16 7 Hz v Interrupts m Startup Faults Cea Modbus Mapping Embedded 1 0 Thermocouple Type TypekK l Plug In Modules Pastas Rae Cr 2080 TC2 lata Update Rate 16 7 Hz 2080 TC2 lt Empty gt To determine available Thermocouple Types corresponding
54. lt 120 mA 24V Backplane 3 3 VDC 38 mA power Output current 2A 5 30V DC resistive 0 5 A 48V DC 0 22 A 125V DC 2A 125V AC 2 A 240V AC Output current 1 0 A steady state 5 28V DC inductive 0 93 A steady state 30V DC 0 5 A steady state 48V DC 0 22 A steady state 125V DC 2 0 A steady state 15 A make 125V AC PF cos 9 0 4 2 0 A steady state 7 5 A make 240V AC PF cos 6 0 4 Output power 250 VA for 125V AC resistive loads resistive max 480 VA for 240V AC resistive loads 60 VA for 30V DC resistive loads 24 VA for 48V DC resistive loads 27 5 VA for 125V DC resistive loads Relay contact 0 35 power factor Maximum Amperes Amperes Volt Amperes Volts Continuous Make Break Make Break 120V AC 15A 15A 20A 1800 VA 180 VA 240V AC 75A 0 75 A 24V DC 1 0A 28 VA 125V DC 0 22 A Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Specifications Appendix A General Specifications 2080 OW4l Digital Relay Output Plug in Module Attribute Value Pilot duty rating C300 R150 Minimum load 10 mA per point Initial contact 30 MQ resistance of relay max Output delay 10 ms ON or OFF time max Environmental Specifications 2080 OW4I Attribute Temperature operating Value IEC60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock
55. max 1 5mA On state current min 5 0 mA 16 8V DC 1 8 mA 10V DC On state current nom 8 8 mA 24V DC 8 5 mA 24V DC On state current max 12 0 mA 30V DC Nominal impedance 3 kQ 3 74 kQ IEC input compatibility Type 3 AC input filter setting 8 ms for all embedded inputs In Connected Components Workbench go to the Embedded 0 configuration window to re configure the filter setting for each input group Isolated AC Inputs 2080 LC30 100WB 2080 LC30 120VB Inputs 0 3 Attribute Value On state voltage nom 12 24V AC 50 60 Hz Off state voltage min 4V AC 50 60Hz Operating frequency nom 50 60 Hz Outputs Attribute 2080 LC30 100WB 2080 LC30 100VB Relay Output Hi Speed Output Standard Output Outputs 0 1 Outputs 2 3 Output voltage min 5V DC 5V AC 10 8V DC 10V DC Output voltage max 125V DC 265V AC 26 4V DC 26 4V DC Load current min 10 mA 10 mA Load current max 2 0 A 100 mA high speed operation 1 0 A 30 C 1 0 A 30 C 0 3 A 65 C standard operation 0 3 A 65 C standard operation Surge current per point 204 Refer to Relay Contacts Ratings on page 205 4 0 A every 1 s 30 C every 2s 65 C 1 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Specifications Appendix A Outputs Attribute 2080 LC30 100WB 2080 LC30 100VB Relay Output Hi Speed Output Standard Output Outputs 0 1 Outputs 2
56. single ended 2 2080 0F2 Analog normal operating ranges Voltage 10V DC Current 0 20 mA Resolution max Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 12 bits unipolar 233 Appendix A 234 2080 OF2 Output Specifications Attribute 2080 OF2 Output count range 0 65535 D A Conversion Rate all 2 5ms channels max Step Response to 63 5ms Current Load In voltage output 10 mA max Resistive load on current output 0 500 Q includes wire resistance Load range on voltage output gt 1k Q 10V DC Max inductive load 0 01 mH current outputs Max capacitive load 0 1 pF voltage outputs Overall Accuracy Voltage Terminal 1 full scale 25 C Current Terminal 1 full scale 25 C Non linearity in percent full 0 1 scale Repeatabili y 3 in percent full 0 1 scale Output error over full temperature range 20 65 C 4 149 F Voltage 1 5 Current 2 0 Open and short circuit protection Yes Output overvoltage protection Yes Input group to bus isolation No isolation Channel to channel isolation Non isolation Temperature operating EC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold EC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat EC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 20 65 C 4 149 F Temperature non operating EC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Non
57. temperature data to actual temperature degree RTD Sensor Types and Ranges Each channel provides open circuit all wires short circuit excitation and return wires only and over and under range detection and indication The 2080 RTD2 module supports 11 types of RTD sensors Pt100 385 PT1000 385 PT500 392 Ni120 672 PT200 385 PT100 392 PT1000 392 NiFe604 518 PT500 385 PT200 392 Cu10 427 It supports 2 and 3 wire type of RTD sensor wiring RTD Compatibility An RTD consists of a temperature sensing element connected by two three or four wires that provide resistance input to the module The following table lists the RTD types that you can use with the module including their temperature range accuracy and ADC update rate Overrange and Underrange Conditions If the channel temperature input is below the minimum value of its normal temperature range for the represented sensor the module reports an underrange error through the Connected Components Workbench global variables If the channel temperature input is above the maximum value of its normal temperature range for the represented sensor an over range error is flagged Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 319 Appendix G Non isolated Thermocouple and RTD Plug in Modules RTD Sensor Types and Temperature Ranges RTD Type Temperature Accuracy C F ADC Update
58. temperature ranges accuracy and available update rates refer to Thermocouple Sensor Types and Temperature Ranges on page 318 b For 2080 RTD2 specify RTD Type and Update Rate The default sensor type for RTD is 100 Pt 385 and the default update rate is 16 7 Hz General Properties Channels Memory Communication Ports Channel 0 Serial Port hors E USB Port RTD Type 100Pt3865 w Dae eng Tie Data Update Rate 16 7 Hz v Interrupts Aih Startup Faults Channel Modbus Mapping R Embedded 1 0 RTD Type 100 Pt 385 v Plug In Modules Data Update Rate 16 7 Hz v T 2080 IF2 lt Empt 2080 IF4 2080 OF2 2080 TC2 2080 RTD2 2080 TRIMPOT6 To determine available RTD Types corresponding temperature ranges accuracy and available update rates refer to RTD Sensor Types and Temperature Ranges on page 320 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 329 Appendix G Non isolated Thermocouple and RTD Plug in Modules Recommended Cable Specifications 330 When the module is in RUN mode and sensors are connected to the plug in the global variable fields_IO_Px_AI_00 IO_Px_AI_01 show temperature data as per measured value Logical alue Physical alue Data Type Dimension Alias Initial Value Attrib gt ott gt ot ott oft ft ot _10_EM_DI_04 BOOL Read _10_EM_DI_05 BOOL Read _10_EM_
59. when there is a CRC error on the data received It gets cleared when the next good data is received DE Data Error These bits are set 1 when the enabled input channels are not getting any reading for the current sampling The respective returned Input Data value remains the same as the previous sample GF General Fault This bit is set 1 when any of these faults occur RAM test failure ROM test failure EEPROM failure and reserved bits All channel fault bits S are set too HA High Alarm These bits are set 1 when the input channel exceeds a Overrange preset high limit defined by the configuration selected UL is set HHA High High Alarm These bits are set 1 when the input channel exceeds a Overrange preset high high limit defined by the configuration selected UL is set LA Low Alarm These bits are set 1 when the input channel goes below underrange the configured low alarm limit LLA Low Low Alarm These bits are set 1 when the input channel goes below underrange the configured low low alarm limit PU Power Up 1 This bit is set after a power on It is cleared when good configuration data is accepted by the module 2 It is set when an unexpected MCU reset occurs in RUN mode All channel fault bits S are set too The module stays connected with no configuration after the reset PU and channel fault bits S are cleared when a good configuration is accepted S Channel fault These bits are set 1 if the
60. 06 1 08 OWOOOOOOOOO 1 00 1 02 coM1 1 05 1 07 1 09 I Wl 1 DC24 CM0 0 01 CM1 0 03 0 04 DC24 0 00 CM0 0 02 CM1 0 05 Output Terminal Block 45029 2080 LC30 24QWB 2080 LC50 24AWB 2080 LC50 24Q WB Input Terminal Block coma 1 01 1 03 1 05 1 07 l 1 08 1 10 1 12 i OMOOOOOOOOOOOOO 1 00 1 02 1 04 1 06 comMi 1 09 1 11 1 13 I I If IT I 1 DC24 CM0 CM1 CM2 0 03 0 05 0 06 0 08 DC24 0 00 0 01 0 02 0 04 CM3 0 07 0 09 45019 Output Terminal Block 2080 LC30 24QVB 2080 LC30 24QBB 2080 LC50 240VB 2080 LC50 240BB Input Terminal Block COMO 1 01 I 1 I 1 DC24 CM0 0 01 CM1 0 03 0 05 0 07 0 09 DC24 0 00 CM0 0 02 0 04 0 06 0 08 CM1 45020 Output Terminal Block Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 35 Chapter4 Wire Your Controller Controller 1 0 Wiring 36 2080 LC30 48AWB 2080 LC30 48QWB 2080 LC50 48AWB 2080 LC50 48QWB Input Terminal Block OMOOOOOOOOOOOOW TERMINAL BLOCK 1 A QDHOOODOHOHOOOODS TERMINAL BLOCK 3 i 1r 1r 1r 1r 1r 1r 1r 1 0024 cMo CM1 CM2 CM3 CM4 CM5 CM6 DC24 0 00 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 TERMINAL BLOCK 2 jj 1r IT 1 CM7 0 08 0 10 CM8 0 13 0 15 0 16 0 18 0 07 0 09 0 11 0 12 0 14 CM9 0 17 0 19 TERMINAL BLOCK 4 45039 Output Terminal Block TIP 2080 LC30 48AWB has no high speed inputs 2080 LC30
61. 1 44 W 2 0 10 88 W Example 2 Derive Total Power for a 48 point Micro850 controller with 3 plug ins and 2085 IQ16 and 2085 IF4 expansion I O modules attached Total Power 11 W 3 1 44 W 0 85 W 1 7 W 17 87 W Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 303 Appendix E 304 System Loading Calculate External AC Power Supply Loading for your Micro830 Controller To calculate External AC Power Supply Loading e Get total sensor current loading For this example assume it is 250 mA e Calculate Total Power Loading by Sensor using this formula 24V 250 mA 6 W e Derive External AC Power Supply Loading using this formula AC Power Supply Loading Total Power calculated for a Micro800 system with Plug in Total power loading by Sensor As an example a 48 point Micro850 controller with2 plug ins and 2085 IQ16 and 2085 IF4 expansion I O and 250mA sensor current 6W sensor power will have the following Total Loading for AC Power Supply Total loading for AC power supply 17 87W 6W 23 87 W ATTENTION Maximum loading to AC Power Supply is limited to 38 4 W with maximum surrounding ambient temperature limited to 65 C Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Appendix F Troubleshooting
62. 108 power supply inrush power considerations 15 preventing excessive heat 16 Priority of User Interrupts 289 process alarms 75 program execution 111 programmable limit switch PLS 167 193 Pulse Train Output PTO 117 configurable input output 119 fixed input output signals 119 PTO direction 119 120 PTO pulse 119 120 0 quadrature encoder 178 quickstarts 257 raw proportional data format 77 relative move versus absolute move general rules 128 Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP 105 RJ 45 ethernet port 7 43 RS 232 485 serial port 43 RTD wiring type 90 S safety circuits 14 safety considerations 12 disconnecting main power 13 hazardous location 13 master control relay circuit periodic tests 14 periodic tests of master control relay circuit 14 power distribution 14 safety circuits 14 Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function 298 299 serial communications status 310 serial port configure 47 servo drive on 119 120 servo drive ready 120 121 shutdown 47 specifications Analog Plug In Modules 235 Event Input Interrupt Support 239 HSC Support 239 Micro800 Programmable Controller External AC Power Supply 228 icro830 10 Point Controllers 205 icro830 16 Point Controllers 208 icro830 24 Point Controllers 212 icro830 48 Point Controllers 216 icro830 Relay Charts 220 status data 98 status indicator 2 ethernet 8 fault status 310 input status 309 module status 8 310 network status 8 310 output status 310 power s
63. 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 20 65 C 4 149 F Temperature surrounding 65 C 149 F air max Temperature non IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold operating IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock 40 85 C 40 185 F Relative humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat 5 95 non condensing Vibration IEC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500 Hz Shock operating IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock 25g Shock nonoperating IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock DIN mount 25 g PANEL mount 45 g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD immunity IEC 61000 4 2 6 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges Radiated RF immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 80 2000 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 1890 MHz 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 2000 2700 MHz EFT B immunity IEC 61000 4 4 2 kV 5 kHz on power ports 2 kV 5 kHz on signal ports Surge transient immunity IEC 61000 4 5 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on power ports 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF immunity Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 IEC 61000 4 6
64. 2080 LC30 10QVB 2080 LC30 16AWEB 2080 LC30 16QWB 2080 LC30 16QVB 100 3 94 80 3 15 O 90 3 54 45032 Measurements in millimeters inches Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 21 Chapter3 Install Your Controller Micro830 24 Point Controllers 2080 LC30 240QWB 2080 LC30 24QVB 2080 LC30 240BB 150 5 91 80 3 15 O 45018 Measurements in millimeters inches Micro830 48 Point Controllers 2080 LC30 48AWB 2080 LC30 48Q0 WB 2080 LC30 48QVB 2080 LC30 480BB 210 8 27 80 3 15 paes W ee D a DODI 90 3 54 w o oo FO OF CO SS joo g dee B 5 m a T Measurements in millimeters inches 030 Micro850 24 Point Controllers 2080 LC50 24AWB 2080 LC50 240BB 2080 LC50 24QVB 2080 LC50 24QWB 80 3 15 158 6 22 oe Measurements in millimeters inches ae 22 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Install Your Controller Chapter 3 Micro850 48 Point Controllers 2080 LC50 48AWB 2080 LC50 48QWB 2080 LC50 480BB 2080 LC50 48QVB 803 15 238 9 37 90 3 54 45916 Measurements in millimeters inches Maintain spacing from objects such as enclosure walls wireways and adjacent equipment Allow 50 8 mm 2 in of space on all sides for adequate ventilation If optional accessories modules are attached to the controller such as the power supply 2080 PS120 240VAC or expansion I O module
65. 48QVB 2080 LC30 480BB 2080 LC50 48QVB 2080 LC50 48QBB Input Terminal Block l 1r 1r como 1 01 1 03 1 05 1 06 1 08 1 10 com2 1 00 1 02 1 04 COMI 1 07 1 09 1 11 1 12 TERMINAL BLOCK 1 DOOOOOHDOHOHOOOO TERMINAL BLOCK 3 i 1r 1r 1 DC24 CM0 0 01 0 03 CM1 0 05 0 07 0 09 DC24 0 00 0 02 CM0 0 04 0 06 0 08 CM1 TERMINAL BLOCK 2 ome 0 11 0 13 0 15 TT soma 0 17 0 19 ne 0 10 0 12 0 14 CM2 0 16 0 18 CM3 NC TERMINAL BLOCK 4 45040 Output Terminal Block This section contains some relevant information about minimizing electrical noise and also includes some wiring examples Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Wire Your Controller Chapter 4 Minimize Electrical Noise Because of the variety of applications and environments where controllers are installed and operating it is impossible to ensure that all environmental noise will be removed by input filters To help reduce the effects of environmental noise install the Micro800 system in a properly rated for example NEMA enclosure Make sure that the Micro800 system is properly grounded A system may malfunction due to a change in the operating environment after a period of time We recommend periodically checking system operation particularly when new machinery or other noise sources are installed near the Micro800 system Analog Channel Wiring Guidelines Consider the following w
66. 5 Linx Gateways Ethernet 12PEM810_30001 DF1 fea 01 Micro810 2 AB_VBP 1 1789 417 4 Virtual Chassis gt a Browsing node 1 found meeseee 0 LC10 12 5 Ifyou see the following dialog leave the Slot Number at 0 and click OK Slot Number You must specify a Slot Number corresponding to the selected device based on Backplane Slot Number jo Cancel This screen is available only for Micro810 controllers Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 257 Appendix Quickstarts 6 Click Next to continue and verify the revision Click Finish Firmware Revision Control Control 258 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Quickstarts Appendix C The next screen shows the download progress Progress Catalog Number 2080 LC10 120 WB Serial Number FFFFFFFF Current Revision 1 2 New Revision 1 4 Transmitting update 2 of 6 block 317 of 2253 _ 5FS SCStCS lt If you see the following error message instead check to see if the controller is faulted or in Run mode If so clear the fault or switch to Program mode click OK and try again xi Failed to update firmware Either the target device does not support Flash updates using this programming tool or the target hardware revision is not compatible with the selected version of firmware re 8 When the flash update is compl
67. 61000 4 5 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on power ports 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports 1 kV line earth CM on communication ports Conducted RF immunity IEC 61000 4 6 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz Isolated AC Inputs 2080 LC50 24QWB 2080 LC50 240VB 2080 LC50 240BB Inputs 0 3 Attribute Value On state voltage nom 12 24V AC 50 60 Hz Off state voltage min 4V AC 50 60Hz Operating frequency nom 50 60 Hz Micro850 48 Point Controllers General Specifications 2080 LC 50 48AWB 2080 LC50 480WB 2080 LC50 480VB 2080 LC50 480BB Attribute 2080 LC50 48AWB 2080 LC50 480WB 2080 LC50 480VB 2080 LC50 480BB Number of 0 48 28 inputs 20 outputs Dimensions 90 x 238 x 80 mm HxWxD 3 54 x 9 37 x 3 15 in Shipping weight approx 0 725 kg 1 60 Ib Wire size 0 2 25mm2 24 12 AWG solid copper wire or 0 2 2 5 mm2 24 12 AWG stranded copper wire rated 90 C 194 F insulation max Wiring category 2 on signal ports 2 on power ports 2 on communication ports Wire type Use Copper Conductors only Terminal screw torque 0 4 0 5 Nm 3 5 4 4 Ib in using a 0 6 x 3 5 mm flat blade screwdriver Input circuit type 120V AC 24V sink source standard and high speed 222 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Specifications Appendix
68. 8 yellow Terminal base screw torque 0 22 0 25 Nm 1 95 2 21 Ib in using a 2 5 mm 0 10 in flat blade screwdriver Enclosure type rating None open style Isolation voltage For input modules 50V continuous Basic Insulation Type Inputs to Backplane Type tested for 60 s 720 V DC Inputs to Backplane For combination or output modules 50V continuous Basic Insulation Type Inputs Outputs I Os to Backplane Type tested for 60 s at 720 V DC I Os to Backplane oO Wire size 0 2 2 5 mm 24 12 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated 90 C 194 F or greater insulation max Wire category 2 on signal ports 2 on power ports North American temp code T4 Environmental Specifications 2080 0B4 2080 0V4 2080 1040B4 2080 1040 V4 Attribute Temperature operating Value IEC60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 20 65 C 4 149 F Temperature surrounding air max 65 C 149 F Temperature non operating 228 IEC60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 40 85 C 40 185 F Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Specifications Appendix A Environmental Specifications 2080 0B4 2080 O0V4 2080
69. 84 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Expansion I O Support Chapter 6 Configuration Parameters for 2085 IF4 and 2085 IF8 Configuration Property Enable Channel What to do Select or deselect the checkbox The box is selected by default Description Enable or disable a channel through this checkbox By default each channel is enabled Minimum Maximum Input Range Choose values e 0 20 MA e 4 20 mA default e 10 10 V e 0 10V rom a range of Defines the input mode for the channel as either voltage or current with current as default mode Data format Select from the following options e Raw Proportional Data e Engineering Units default e Percent Range See Data formats on page 72 for detailed information Input filter Choose from the following values 50 60Hz Rejection v No Filter 2 Point Moving Average 4 Point Moving Average 8 Point Moving Average 50 60Hz Rejection See Input Filter on page 74 for detailed information High High Alarm High Alarm Low Alarm Low Low Alarm Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Check the checkbox to enable an alarm By default High High and Low Low Alarms are disabled and High and Low alarms are enabled Process level alarms alert you when the module has exceeded configured high high high low and low low limits for e
70. A compilation error occurs if this is exceeded Alternatively you can assign a program to an available interrupt and have it executed only when the interrupt is triggered A program assigned to the User Fault Routine runs once just prior to the controller going into Fault mode In addition to the User Fault Routine Micro830 850 controllers support e four Selectable Timed Interrupts STI STIs execute assigned programs once every set point interval 0 65535 ms e eight Event Input Interrupts EII Els execute assigned programs once every time the selected input rises or falls configurable e two to six High Speed Counter HSC interrupts HSCs execute assigned programs based on the counter s accumulated count The number of HSCs depend on the number of controller embedded inputs Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 111 Chapter 8 112 Program Execution in Micro800 The Global System Variables associated with cycles scans are e SYSVA_CYCLECNT Cycle counter e SYSVA_TCYCURRENT Current cycle time e SYSVA_TCYMAXIMUM Maximum cycle time since last start Execution Rules This section illustrates the execution of a program The execution follows eight main steps within a loop The loop duration is a cycle time for a program Scan input variables Consume bound variables Execute POUs Produce bound variables Update output variables Save retained value
71. COM A 000000 PinA4 COM PinB4 COM Front 40511 Pin A5 Not used Pin B5 Not used Pin A6 Not used Pin B6 Not used 2080 1040B4 2080 1040V4 Back View into terminal block Pin Al 1 02 Pin B1 1 00 B O00000 Pin A2 1 03 Pin B2 1 01 Pin A3 COM Pin B3 COM A 000000 Pin A4 24V DC Pin B4 24V DC Front 40511 Pin A5 0 02 Pin B5 0 00 Pin A6 0 03 Pin B6 0 01 2080 0B4 2080 0V4 Back View into terminal block Pin A1 Not used PinB1 Not used B 000000 Pin A2 Not used Pin B2 Not used Pin A3 24V DC Pin B3 24V DC A OO0000 Pin A4 24V DC Pin B4 24V DC Front 40511 Pin A5 0 02 Pin BS 0 00 Pin AB 0 03 PinB6 0 01 Micro800 AC DC Relay Output Module The 2080 OW4I is a 4 channel relay output and provides dry contact relay closure outputs for switching a variety of AC and DC voltages to field loads Relay output modules provide a suitable interface to noncritical output devices These non critical devices typically include status alarms or other field devices that are not used for primary safety shutdown purposes 104 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Micro800 Plug In Modules and Accessories Chapter 7 Wire the Module Back View into terminal block Pin A1 COM3 PinB1 COMO Pin A2 0 3 PinB2 0 0 B VOOOO Pin A3 Not used Pin B3 COM1 A O Q OOO Pin A4 Not used Pin B4 0 1 Front 40511 Pin A5 Not used Pin B5 COM2 Pin A6 Not used Pin B6 0 2 Micro800 Non i
72. Click button to restore Restores default device properties defaults 88 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Expansion I O Support Chapter 6 2085 IRT4 2085 IRT4 Channel 0 Enable Channel Sensor Type Thermocouple K w Filter Update 120 y ms Time Units joc v Filter Frequency 40 Hz 3 T 3db 50 60Hz Noise Both vj Rejection Open Circuit Upscale w Response Data Format Engineering Units x1 h Restore Defaults For the RTD and Thermocouple expansion I O 2085 IRT4 you can configure sensor type data format temperature units and other properties on each of the four individual channels Configuration Parameters for 2085 IRT4 Configuration Property Description Enable channel Click the box to enable This parameter enables the particular channel for operation Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 89 Chapter6 Expansion 1 0 Support Configuration Parameters for 2085 IRT4 Configuration Property Sensor Type What to do Select from the following sensors e 100Q Platinum 385 e 200 Platinum 385 e 100QPlatinum 3916 e 200Q Platinum 3916 e 100Q Nickel 618 e 200Q Nickel 618 e 120Q Nickel 672 1009 Copper 427 e 0 500 Ohm e 0 100 mV e Thermocouple B hermocouple C hermocouple E hermocouple J hermocouple K hermocouple TXK XK L hermocouple N T T T T T T Thermocouple R T e Thermocouple S
73. Components Workbench software refer to the section Configure the Plug ins in Connected Components Workbench on page 326 Connected Components The following bit words describe the information read from the Thermocouple Workbench Global and RTD plug in modules in the Connected Components Workbench Global p Variables Variables Data Maps Mapping Table Word Offset 00 00 example _I0_P1_AI_00 01 example _IO_P1_Al_01 Channel 1 Temperature Data Channel 0 Temperature Data 320 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Non isolated Thermocouple and RTD Plug in Modules Appendix G Mapping Table Word Offset Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 02 example _IO_P1_Al_02 Channel 0 Information UKT UKR Reserved Reserved OR UR 0C DI CC Reserved 03 example _IO_P1_Al_03 Channel 1 Information UKT UKR Reserved Reserved OR UR 0C DI CC Reserved 04 example _IO_P1_Al_04 System Information Reserved SOR SUR COC CE Reserved Bit Definitions Bit Name Description Channel Temperature Data The temperature count mapped from temperature Celsius degree with one decimal Please check the section Temperature Conversion Data to Degree Celsius C on page 321 for the mapping formula UKT Unknown Type Bit set to report an unknown sensor ype error in configuration UKR Unknown Rat
74. Connected Components Workbench refer to the next sections TIP Configuration changes must be compiled and downloaded to the controller to take effect Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 145 Chapter9 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO TIP Values for the different motion axis parameters are validated based ona set of relationships and pre determined absolute range See Motion Axis Parameter Validation on page 156 for a description of the relationships between parameters Add New Axis IMPORTANT Motion Engine Execution Time m Motion Motion Engine Execution Time 2 ms Maximum Number of Axes 2 When an axis is added to the configuration the Motion Engine Execution Time can be configured from 1 10 ms default 1 ms This global parameter applies to all motion axis configurations 1 On the Device Configuration tree right click lt New Axis gt Click Add Motion lt New Ax Plug In Modul Add rb s 2 Provide an axis name Click Enter TIP Name must begin with a letter or underscore character followed by a letter or single underscore characters TIP You can also press F2 to edit axis name 3 Expand the newly created Axis to see the following configuration categories e General e Motor and Load e Limits e Dynamics e Homing Motion General Motor and Load Limits Dynamics Homing 146 Rockwell Automation Publicat
75. Connected Components Workbench temperature data count but the actual temperature C or the voltage going into the plug in module TIP We recommend the use of the conversion formula above to calculate for actual temperature instead of using scalar function When scalar function block is used in a program the input must be correctly given according to the data count range based on different sensor types Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Wire the 2080 TC2 Module 2 41 max Non isolated Thermocouple and RTD Plug in Modules Appendix G Follow the pinout wiring diagrams that comes with your plug in module package 12 Pin Female Terminal Block Back View into terminal block B O00000 Pin 7 CHO Pin B1 CH1 A OOOOGO wn Pin A2 CHO Pin B2 CH1 Front Pin A3 CJC Pin B3 CJC Pin A4 No connection Pin B4 No connection Note A refers to Channel 0 and B Pin A5 No connection Pin B5 No connection refers to Channel 1 Pin A6 No connection Pin B6 No connection Type of CJC Sensor The CJC sensor is a non polarized passive negative temperature co efficient thermistor EPCOS B57869S0502F 140 It is readily available in the market with most third party suppliers vendors CJC Channel Error The CJC channel on 2080 TC2 has a worst case error of 1 2 C 25 C This error does not include the manufacturer specified sensor error 0 2 C 25 C Wire the CJC
76. Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E322657 UL Listed for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations certified for U S and Canada See UL File E334470 CE European Union 2004 108 EC EMC Directive compliant with EN 61326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B European Union 2006 95 EC LVD compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 11 C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions KC Korean Registration of Broadcasting and Communications Equipment compliant with Article 58 2 of Radio Waves Act Clause 3 1 See the Product Certification link at http www rockwellautomation com products certification for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details 232 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Specifications Appendix A Analog Plug In Modules 2080 1F2 2080 IF4 Input Specifications Attribute ended Number of inputs single 2080 1F2 2080 IF4 Analog normal operating ranges Voltage 0 10V DC Current 0 20 mA Resolution max 12 bits unipolar with software selected option for 50 Hz 60 Hz 250 Hz 500 Hz Data range 0 65535 Input impedance Volt
77. Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Using the Quadrature Encoder The Quadrature Encoder is used for determining direction of rotation and position for rotating such as a lathe The Bidirectional Counter counts the rotation of the Quadrature Encoder The figure below shows a quadrature encoder connected to inputs 0 1 and 2 The count direction is determined by the phase angle between A and B If A leads B the counter increments If B leads A the counter decrements The counter can be reset using the Z input The Z outputs from the encoders typically provide one pulse per revolution A e Input 0 Quadrature Encoder e Input 1 B Forward Rotation Reverse Rotation ry A A A Y L B 1 2 3 2 1 Count HSC Mode 6 Quadrature Counter phased inputs A and B HSC Mode 6 Examples Input Terminals Embedded Input 0 Embedded Input 1 Embedded Input 2 Embedded Input 3 CE Bit Comments Function Count A Count B Not Used Not Used Example qm T off 0 on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count Example 212 y off 0 on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count Example3 off 0 Hold accumulator value Example 4 on 1 Hold accumulator value Example 5 on 1 Hold accumulator value Example 6 off 0 Hold accumulator value
78. ENQ Retries The number of enquiries ENQs that you want the 3 controller to send after an ACK timeout occurs Transmit Retries Specifies the number of times a message is retried after 3 the first attempt before being declared undeliverable Enter a value from 0 127 RTS Off Delay Specifies the delay time between when the last serial 0 character is sent to the modem and when RTS will be deactivated Gives modem extra time to transmit the last character of a packet The valid range is 0 255 and can be set in increments of 5 ms RTS Send Delay Specifies the time delay between setting RTS until 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 checking for the CTS response For use with modems that are not ready to respond with CTS immediately upon receipt of RTS The valid range is 0 255 and can be set in increments of 5 ms 49 Chapter5 Communication Connections Configure Modbus RTU 1 Open your Connected Components Workbench project On the device configuration tree go to the Controller properties Click Serial Port B Controller General Memory Serial Port USB Port Ethernet Internet Protocol Port Settings Port Diagnostics Date and Time Interrupts Startup Faults Modbus Mapping Embedded 1 0 5 Plug In Modules lt Empty gt lt Empty gt lt Empty gt B Expansion Modules lt Empty gt lt Empty gt lt Empty gt lt Empty gt m 2 Select Modbus RTU o
79. Ethernet communication channel allows your Micro850 controller to be connected to a local area network for various devices providing 10 Mbps 100 Mbps transfer rate Micro850 controllers support the following Ethernet protocols e EtherNet IP Server e Modbus TCP Server e DHCP Client Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 43 Chapter 5 44 Communication Connections Modbus RTU Modbus is a half duplex master slave communications protocol The Modbus network master reads and writes bits and registers Modbus protocol allows a single master to communicate with a maximum of 247 slave devices Micro800 controllers support Modbus RTU Master and Modbus RTU Slave protocol For more information on configuring your Micro800 controller for Modbus protocol refer to the Connected Components Workbench Online Help For more information about the Modbus protocol refer to the Modbus Protocol Specifications available from http www modbus org See Modbus Mapping for Micro800 on page 249 for information on Modbus mapping To configure the Serial port as Modbus RTU see Configure Modbus RTU on page 50 Modbus TCP Server The Modbus TCP Server communication protocol uses the same Modbus mapping features as Modbus RTU but instead of the Serial port it is supported over Ethernet Modbus TCP Server takes on Modbus Slave features on Ethernet The Micro850 controller supports up to 16 simultaneous Modbus TCP Serve
80. Hold 9 External Reset and Hold Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 239 AppendixA Specifications Expansion 1 0 240 The following tables provide specifications for digital and analog expansion I O modules Discrete Expansion 1 0 2085 1016 and 2085 1032T DC Sink Source Input Modules Attribute Number of inputs 2085 1016 16 sink source 2085 1032T 32 sink source Dimensions HxWxD 44 5 x 90 x 87 mm 1 75 x 3 54 x 3 42 in Shipping weight 220 g 7 76 oz approx Bus current draw max 170 mA 5V DC 190 mA 5V DC Wire size 0 25 2 5 mm 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated 75 C 167 F or greater 1 2 mm 3 64 in insulation max Wiring category 2 on signal ports Terminal screw torque 0 5 0 6 Nm max 4 4 5 3 Ib in Input circuit type 24V AC DC sink source Power dissipation total 4 5 W 7W Power supply 24V DC Status indicators 16 yellow indicators 32 yellow indicators Isolation voltage 50V continuous Reinforced Insulation Type channel to system Type tested 720V DC for 60 s Enclosure type rating Meets IP20 North American temp code T4 Operating voltage range 10 30V DC Class 2 21 6 26 4V AC Class 2 See Derating Curve for 2085 1016 and Derating Curve for 2085 10327 on page 241 Off state
81. Hold accumulator value Blank cells don t care tt rising edge Je falling edge HSC Mode 1 Examples TIP Inputs 0 11 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used HSC Mode 1 Up Counter with External Reset and Hold Input Terminals Embedded Input 0 Embedded Input 1 Embedded Input 2 Embedded Input 3 CE Bit Comments Function Count Not Used Reset Hold Example 1 II on U Jof off on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 1 0 0 Example 2 on lof on Hold accumulator value 1 0 1 Example3 on IU lof off 0 Hold accumulator value 1 0 Example 4 on IU loff on lof Hold accumulator value 1 0 1 0 Example 5 T Clear accumulator 0 Blank cells don t care f rising edge falling edge TIP Inputs 0 11 are available for use as inputs to other functions HSC Mode 2 Counter with External Direction regardless of the HSC being used HSC Mode 2 Examples Input Terminals Embedded Input 0 Embedded Input 1 Embedded Input 2 Embedded Input 3 CE Bit Comments Function Count Direction Not Used Not Used Example 1 T off on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 0 Example 2 T on on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 1 Example3 off 0 Hold accumulator value Rockwell Automation Pu
82. IEC 61000 4 5 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on power ports 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF immunity Certifications Certification whe product is marked c UL us IEC 61000 4 6 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz Value UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E322657 UL Listed for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations certified for U S and Canada See UL File E334470 CE European Union 2004 108 EC EMC Directive compliant with EN 61326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B European Union 2006 95 EC LVD compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 11 C Tick 1 See the Product Certification Declaration of Conformity Ce Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions ink at http Awww rockwellautomation com products certification for rtificates and other certification details 217 AppendixA Specifications Micro830 and Micro850 Relay Charts Relay life 100 50 30 20 AC 125V lt resistive load DC 30V resistive Idad AC 250V
83. Isolation Transformers cncacseri ets eg ta Gee etee 15 Power Supply Inrush cs csa0 cae swatintenensamicwniua deere baw ats 15 Loss of Power Sources wa ci teen abel bubs Mia ee eee lel 15 Input States on Power Dowty j 3siisions cahebieee cadena 16 Other Types of Line Conditions 2c o tes exceeds nnevedananes 16 Preventing Excessive Heat accsancssiuada ct eee ed caer eats 16 Master Control Relay fever oe crettrtesetcanieletavcees cave 16 Using Emergency Stop Switches 0 0 c eee scene cee eeees 17 Schematic Using IEC Symbols eed eur aronetveee tana eens 19 Schematic Using ANSI CSA Symbols nissen 20 Chapter 3 Controller Mounting Dimensions 00 00 ce seen ee eee e es 21 Mounting DIMENSION ioc eit ria ua aay es Beech 21 DIN Rail Mounting id koe gitoes etna ade ee seencran es 23 Pane Mounting serrr ienien mate ane ase Aton Ss 24 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM001D EN E September 2012 vii Table of Contents Wire Your Controller Communication Connections Expansion I 0 Support viii Panel Mounting Dimensions s9 00 anced span boreitwee eoeaases 24 System Assembly ca ou cela uk a eae A te e 26 Chapter 4 Wiring Requirements and Recommendation 0000005 29 Use Surge SUppressOrs derse Goin iwaneh nt ites meena eater lacs 30 Recommended Surge Suppressors 000 cece eee ee eee eee 32 Grounding the Controller sah ay8 ad nanrsenagin aca ements arerstoa 33 Wiring Di
84. L N R S T RTD type 100 Q Pt 0 00385 Euro 200 Q Pt 0 00385 Euro 00 Q Pt 0 003916 U S 200 Q Pt 0 003916 U S 100 Q Nickel 618 200 Q Nickel 618 20 Q Nickel 672 10 Q Copper 427 mV range 0 100 mV Ohm input 0 500 Q Resolution 16 bits Channel update time typical 12 500 ms per enabled channel Input impedance gt 10MQ Accuracy 0 5 3 0 C accuracy for Thermocouple inputs 0 2 0 6 C accuracy for RTD inputs Power dissipation total 2W Enclosure type rating Meets IP20 Status indicators 1 green health indicator Isolation voltage 50V continuous Reinforced Insulation Type channel to system Type tested 720V DC for 60 s North American temp code T4 1 Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publica 2 RTB hold down screws should be ti ion 1770 4 1 ghtened by hand They should not be tightened using a power tool Environment Specifications Environment Specifications for Micro850 Expansion 1 0 Modules Attribute Temperature operating Value IEC60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 20 65 C 4 149 F Temperature nonoperating IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Unpack
85. Micro830 Defined Words o ock DataType Dimension Alias g ee g A R _10_EM_D0_00 BOOL 10_EM_D0_01 BOOL _l0_EM_DO_02 BOOL _I0_EM_DO_03 BOOL _l0_EM_DO_04 BOOL _l0_EM_DO_05 BOOL _l0_EM_DO_06 BOOL _ 0_EM_DO_07 BOOL _l0_EM_DO_08 BOOL _l0_EM_DO_09 BOOL _ 0_EM_DI_00 BOOL _l0_EM_DI_01 BOOL _I0_EM_DI_02 BOOL _l0_EM_DI_03 BOOL _ 0_EM_DI_04 BOOL A Oo emo o m meoo _l0_EM_DI_06 BOOL _l0_EM_DI_07 BOOL _ 0_EM_DI_08 BOOL _l0_EM_DI_09 BOOL _l0_EM_DI_10 BOOL _l0_EM_DIL11 BOOL _l0_EM_DI_12 BOOL _l0_EM_DI_13 BOOL q EG Ea Ca KU EG POPC rG EG T Ea Ea Ea a a EA E EG EG KO CA 4 Click the Local Variables tab to see any real time changes being made to the variables Expand the MyAppData and MyInfo variable list by clicking the sign 5 Turn On the encoder to see the counter count up down For example if the encoder is attached toa motor shaft then turn on the motor to trigger the HSC count The counter value will be displayed on MyInfo Accumulator MyStatus variable should display a Logical Value of 1 which means that the HSC is running TIP See HSC Function Block Status Codes on page 190 for the complete list of status codes For example if the MyStatus value is 04 a configuration error exists and the controller will You need to check your parameters in this case 280 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Quickstarts Appendix C S Yariable Monitoring Global Variables Micro
86. PLS function When the PLS function is enabled the setting in HSCAPP HpSetting e HSCAPP LpSetting e HSCAPP HPOutput e HSCAPP LPOutput are superseded by corresponding data values from PLS data See Programmable Limit Switch PLS Function on page 191 for more information 171 Chapter 10 Use the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch HSCID HSCAPP HSCID Description Data Format User Program Access HSCID Word UINT read write The following table lists the definition for HSCID HSCID Definition Bits Description 15 13 SC Module Type x00 Embedded x01 Expansion not yet implemented x02 Plug in module 12 8 Module Slot ID 0x00 Embedded x01 0x1F Expansion not yet implemented 0x01 0x05 Plug in module 120 Module internal HSC ID x00 0x0F Embedded x00 0x07 Expansion not yet implemented x00 0x07 Plug in module For Embedded HSC valid HSCID value is only 0 5 HSC Mode HSCAPP HSCMode Description Data Format User Program Access HSC Mode word UINT read write The HSCMode variable sets the High Speed Counter to one of 10 types of operation This integer value is configured through the programming device and is accessible in the control program HSC Operating Modes Mode Type Number 0 Up Counter The accumulator is immediately cleared 0 when it reaches the high preset A low preset cannot be defined i
87. ReadWrite HS5C_PLS 2 HscHP DINT 500 ReadWrite HS5C_PLS 2 HscLP N E ReadWwrite Readwrite HSC_PLS 2 HscLPOutPut UDINT o ReadWrite Eo crsa PLS ss ReadWrite HSC_PLS 3 HscHP DINT 750 ReadWwrite HSC_PLS 3 HscLP DINT 2 ReadWwrite HSC_PLS 3 HscHPOutPut UDINT 15 Readwrite HSC_PLS 3 HscLPOutPut UDINT o ReadWrite E sora PLS n Readwrite HSC_PLS 4 HscHP DINT 1000 Readwrite HSC_PLS 4 HscLP DINT 2 ReadWrite HSC PLs 4 HscHpoutPut UDINT 31 Readwrite E HSc_PLs 4 HsctPoutPut UDINT o Readwrite Once the values above for all 4 PLS data elements have been entered the PLS is configured Assume that HSCAPP OutputMask 31 HSC mechanism controls Embedded Output 0 4 only and HSCAPP HSCMode 0 PLS Operation for This Example When the ladder logic first runs HSCSTS Accumulator 1 therefore all the outputs are turned off The value of HSCSTS HP 250 When HSCSTS Accumulator 250 the HSC_PLS 1 HscHP Output is sent through the HSCAPP OutputMask and energizes the outputs 0 and 1 This will repeat as the HSCSTS Accumulator reaches 500 750 and 1000 The controller energizes outputs 0 2 0 3 and 0 4 respectively Once completed the cycle resets and repeats from HSCSTS HP 250 HSC Interru pts An interrupt is an event that causes the controller to suspend the task it is currently performing perform a different task and then return to the suspended task at the point where it suspended Micro800 supports up to
88. ReadWrrite F E Psota daH ONT RaadWrits r Pisdaa OZ HLE DN 3 ReadWhrite z Pisbata qA HstHPOuiPut UDINT 7 Readwirite i E PtSbeta fa hsitPouPu UOINT j Reade gt E eoo o Pis Raadwrite 4 Pisbaba 3 HsteP DAT ReadWrite Plsbata OS HstLP DNT i Readwirite tsb OfStee PoulPut LOINT Read Plsdate 3 HscLPOutut UDINT PLS Operation When the PLS function is enabled and the controller is in the run mode the HSC counts incoming pulses When the count reaches the first preset HSCHP or HSCLP defined in the PLS data the output source data HSCHP Output or HSCLPOutput is written through the HSC mask HSCAPP OutputMask Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Use the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Chapter 10 At that point the next presets HSCHP and HSCLP defined in the PLS data become active When the HSC counts to that new preset the new output data is written through the HSC mask This process continues until the last element within the PLS data block is loaded At that point the active element within the PLS data block is reset to zero This behavior is referred to as circular operation TIP The HSCHPOutput is only written when HSCHP is reached The HSCLPOutput is written when HSCLP is reached TIP Output High Data is only operational when the counter is counting up Output Low Data is only operational when the counter is counting down Ifinvalid data is loaded du
89. S a cae eels 1 Micro830 Controllers seine wets aid sedan arate a ecoteed indus arate et 2 Micro850 Controllers wissotea ves Se ae ee a ees 4 Programming Cables syacki cecvayorewamiutensetciatutye tageles 6 Embedded Serial Port Cables 0 ccc ecu ce cc eceeeeeeeece 7 Embedded Ethernet Support edtusdes phen ates ooe ites daveateranse 7 Chapter 2 Programming Software for Micro800 Controllers 005 9 Obtain Connected Components Workbench 006 9 Use Connected Components Workbench 2 eee eee 9 Agency Certifications sssr usererererrererrersrrrrererrrrres 9 Compliance to European Union Directives susse cee scene eee 9 EME Directive ccdccwa an nesa Had shane oo bacebae Sabie 10 Low Voltage Directive co caiv iva ctarisisdsovedeideveasgioeases 10 Installation Considerations Jaws s95ox5 clas cid senah dosh des eer eenere 10 Environment and Enclosure cccccececescecnceececs 12 Preventing Electrostatic Discharges ecdvswte euamrercalwowesctck 12 Safety Considerations iy iehdych Aen ee ees ea eens as oe 12 North American Hazardous Location Approval 13 Disconnecting Main Power suunssssssnnsrrr rererere 13 Safety Cireuitsan mi n aa E PEENE E EEEREN 14 Power Distribution 55 tacsnag no ale in emeteaa tain ee lee R ts 14 Periodic Tests of Master Control Relay Circuit 14 Power Considerations oeie scaled were stern uae dolaauew es er hcis 14
90. September 2012 Use the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Chapter 1 Chapter 10 High Speed Counter Overview oc segs so cna ee eae cee ied 89 165 Programmable Limit Switch Overview icaswaenesaectinusnewedvaners 165 What is High Speed Counter lt i xsciviie id clsiwteion ee teanet bites 166 Features and Operation cian ca cama uate Eai aes Cun e 166 HSC Inputs and Wiring Mapping 2 a ces oven ccseeuliey ce Seswee ose 167 High Speed Counter HSC Data Structures 0002005 171 HSC APP Data Structutg inna E tel e awe meey aun 171 PLS Enable HSCAPP PLSEnable sti et ee ee 171 HSCID HSCAPP HSCID cocci dakesmonnba veewnde ct cauka ed 172 HSC Mode HSCAPP HSCMode cccccceecnceeees 172 Accumulator HSCAPP Accumulator 0 00ce eee 178 High Preset ISCAP PIP Setting Worn lex oneticcnnauetionsts 178 Low Preset HSCAPP LPSetting 2 c sis ccseee ie cueei sess 179 Overflow Setting HSCAPP OFSetting 0006 179 Underflow Setting HSCAPP UFSetting 00006 179 Output Mask Bits HSCAPP OutputMask 006 180 High Preset Output HSCAPP HPOutput 02 181 Low Preset Output HSCAPP LPOutput 4 181 HSC STS HSC Status Data Structure 4 iataens de cvewdeecaas 182 Counting Enabled HSCSTS CountEnable 182 Error Detected HSCSTS ErrorDetected 0 00 e cans 182 Count Up HSCSTS CountUpFlag lt 5 veissassc
91. Thermistor on the 2080 TC2 Module B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 eee p R l A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN Connect the thermocouples to 2 Once fitted bend the black bead channel 0 and 1 respectively Then connect and screw the thermistor to terminals A3 and B3 of the thermistor such that it makes contact with the A2 screw securely The position for the thermistor as illustrated helps to compensate for thermoelectric voltages developed at screw junction equally for thermocouples connected to channels 0 and 1 If the bead is not in proper contact with the screw there will be deviation in readings due to inadequate isothermal compensation E September 2012 323 Appendix G Non isolated Thermocouple and RTD Plug in Modules Wire the Thermocouple Module and Thermocouple Sensor in the Field Connect the thermocouple sensors directly to the module terminals Direct sensor wiring Shielded sheathed thermocouple sensor 9 2080 T 2 Process temperature measurement 45790 ATTENTION Direct wiring is the preferred method of wiring for thermocouples A 12 Pin Female Terminal Block Wire the RTD Module Back OOOOO Front Note A refers to Channel 0 and B refers 40511 View into terminal block Pin A4 No connection Pin A5 No connection Pin A6 No conn
92. UDFB5 Structured Text ST is much more efficient and easier to use than Ladder Logic when used for equations if you are used to using the RSLogix500 CPT Compute instruction ST combined with UDFB is a great alternative Asan example for an Astronomical Clock Calculation Structured Text uses 40 less Instructions Display_Output LD Memory Usage Code 3148 steps Memory Usage Data 3456 bytes Display_Output ST Memory Usage Code 1824 steps Memory Usage Data 3456 bytes e You may encounter an Insufficient Reserved Memory error while downloading and compiling a program over a certain size One workaround is to use arrays especially if there are many variables Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 115 Chapter8 Program Execution in Micro800 Notes 116 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Chapter 9 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO Certain Micro830 and Micro850 controllers see table below support motion control through high speed pulse train outputs PTO PTO functionality refers to the ability of a controller to accurately generate a specific number of pulses at a specified frequency These pulses are sent to a motion device such as a servo drive which in turn controls the number of rotations position of a servo motor Each PTO is exactly mapped to one axis to allow for control of simple positioning in stepper motors and serv
93. UM002D EN E September 2012 141 Chapter9 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO For the above exceptions it is still possible for the user application to issue a successful movement function block to the axis after the axis state changes MC_Engine_Diag Data Type The MC_Engine_Diag data type contains diagnostic information on the embedded motion engine It can be monitored in debug mode through the Connected Components Workbench software when the motion engine is active or through the user application as part of user logic It can also be monitored remotely through various communication channels One MC_Engine_Diag instance is created automatically in the Connected Components Workbench software when the user adds the first motion axis in the motion configuration This instance is shared by all user configured motion axes Data Elements for MC_Engine_Diag Element name Data Type MCEngState UINT16 CurrScantimel UINT16 MaxScantime UINT16 CurrEnginelnterval UINT16 MaxEnginelnterval UINT16 ExtraData UINT16 1 The time unit for this element is microsecond This diagnostic information can be used to optimize motion configuration and user application logic adjustment MCEngstate States State name State Description MCEng_lIdle 0x01 MC engine exists at least one axis defined but the engine is idle as there is no axis is moving The Engine diagnostic data is not being upd
94. ae pete 323 Wire the CJC Thermistor on the 2080 TC2 Module 323 Wire the Thermocouple Module and Thermocouple Sensor inthe Field aeset a N evant te a a a era 324 Wirethe RTD M dule siit dsctascee era ota cig theese ue 324 Wire che RTD SensOitsy nada ewer ca r AE E a 324 Wire the RTD Module and RTD Sensor in the Field 325 Configure the Plug ins in Connected Components Workbench 326 Recommended Cable Specifications cee cee eee ee eee eee 330 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM001D EN E September 2012 Chapter 1 Appendix H IPID Function Block How to AutoTune 0 cee cece eee n cence eneeenaes 333 PID Application Example lt dhasg toad oid b see Seinben Aiceartiarahcatecelawd dacieis 334 PID Code Sample iiss iccencernnen ie he vieren Labi 335 Index Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM001D EN E September 2012 XV Table of Contents xvi Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM001D EN E September 2012 Chapter 1 Hardware Overview This chapter provides an overview of the Micro830 and Micro850 hardware features It has the following topics Topic Page Hardware Features 1 Micro830 Controllers 2 Micro850 Controllers 4 Programming Cables 6 Embedded Serial Port Cables 7 Embedded Ethernet Support 7 Hardware Features Micro830 and Micro850 controllers are an economical brick style controllers with embedded inputs and outputs Depending on the controller t
95. axis configuration parameters ATTENTION See Motion Axis Configuration in Connected Components PTO Pulse Accuracy Micro800 motion feature is pulse based and the value of distance and velocity are designed in such a way that all PTO related values are integers at the hardware level when converting to PTO pulse For example if the user configures Motor Pulses per Revolution as 1 000 and Travel per Revolution as 10 cm and the user wants to drive velocity at 4 504 cm sec The target velocity is 4 504 cm sec that is 450 4 pulse sec In this case the actual commanded velocity will be 4 5 cm sec that is 450 pulse sec and the 0 4 pulse sec is rounded off Motor Revolution Modifying Motor Revolution parameters may cause Axis runaway Pulses per Revolution 1000 0 Travel per Revolution 10 0 cm This rounding scheme also applies to other input parameters such as Position Distance Acceleration Deceleration and Jerk For instance with above motor revolution configuration setting Jerk as 4 504 cm sec is the same as setting Jerk as 4 501 cm sec as both are rounded off to 4 5 cm sec This rounding applies to both axis configuration input in the Connected Components Workbench software and function block input Motion Axis Parameter Validation Besides falling within the pre determined absolute range motion axis parameters are validated based on relationships with other parameters These relationships or rule
96. axis of a specified distance relative to the actual position at the time of the execution Standstill Discrete Motion Continuous Motion _MoveVelocity This function block commands a never ending axis move at a specified velocity Standstill Discrete Motion Continuous Motion Home This function block commands the axis to perform the search home sequence The Position input is used to set the absolute position when reference signal is detected and configured Home offset is reached This function block completes at StandStill if the homing sequence is successful Standstill MC_ Stop This function block commands an axis stop and transfers the axis to the state Stopping It aborts any ongoing function block execution While the axis is in state Stopping no other function block can perform any motion on the same axis After the axis has reached velocity zero the Done output is set to TRUE immediately The axis remains in the state Stopping as long as Execute is still TRUE or velocity zero is not yet reached As soon as Done is SET and Execute is FALSE the axis goes to state StandStill Standstill Discrete Motion Continuous Motion Homing MC_ Halt This function block commands an axis to a controlled motion stop The axis is moved to the state DiscreteMotion until the velocity is zero With the Done output set the state is transferred to StandSt
97. bit INT control read write The HSCAPP OFSetting defines the upper count limit for the counter If the counter s accumulated value increments past the value specified in this variable an overflow interrupt is generated When the overflow interrupt is generated the HSC sub system rolls the accumulator over to the underflow value and the counter continues counting from the underflow value counts are not lost in this transition The user can specify any value for the overflow position provided it is greater than the underflow value and falls between 2 147 483 648 and 2 147 483 647 TIP Data loaded into the overflow variable must be greater than or equal to the data resident in the high preset HSCAPPHPSetting or an HSC error is generated Underflow Setting HSCAPP UFSetting Description Data Format User Program Access HSCAPP UFSetting long word 32 bit INT read write The HSCAPP UFSetting defines the lower count limit for the counter If the counter s accumulated value decrements past the value specified in this variable an underflow interrupt is generated When the underflow interrupt is generated the HSC sub system resets the accumulated value to the overflow value and the counter then begins counting from the overflow value counts are not lost in this transition The user can specify any value for the underflow position provided it is less than the overflow value and falls between
98. connect the Micro830 and Micro850 programmable controller to your serial modem using an Allen Bradley null modem serial cable Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Communication Connections Chapter 5 1761 CBL PM02 to the controller s embedded serial port together with a 9 pin null modem adapter a null modem with a null modem adapter is equivalent to a modem cable The recommended protocol for this configuration is CIP Serial Construct Your Own Modem Cable If you construct your own modem cable the maximum cable length is 15 24 m 50 ft with a 25 pin or 9 pin connector Refer to the following typical pinout for constructing a straight through cable DTE Device Micro830 850 DCE Device Channel 0 Modem etc 8 Pin 25 Pin 9 Pin 7 TXD gt TXD 2 3 4 RXD Ie RXD 3 2 2 GND lt gt GND 7 5 1 B DCD 8 1 8 A DTR 20 4 5 DCD DSR 6 6 6 CTS ie CTS 5 8 3 RTS gt RTS 4 7 Configure Serial Port You can configure the Serial Port driver as CIP Serial Modbus RTU ASCII or Shutdown through the Device Configuration tree in Connected Components Workbench Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 47 Chapter 5 Communication Connections 48 Configure CIP Serial Driver 1 Open your Connected Components Workbench project On the device B Controlle
99. disabled not timing and a value greater than 0 is entered into the set point the STI starts timing to the new set point and STI0 Enable is set 1 e If the STI is currently timing and the set point is changed the new setting takes effect immediately restarting from zero The STI continues to time until it reaches the new set point Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 291 Appendix D User Interrupts UID User Interrupt Disable UID Enable UID name or Pin ID IROType or ENO Pin ID 45639 The UID instruction is used to disable selected user interrupts The table below shows the types of interrupts with their corresponding disable bits Types of Interrupts Disabled by the UID Instruction Interrupt Type Element Decimal Corresponding Value Bit Plug In Module UPM4 8388608 bit 23 Plug In Module UPM3 4194304 bit 22 Plug In Module UPM2 2097152 bit 21 Plug In Module UPM1 1048576 bit 20 Plug In Module UPMO 524288 bit 19 STI Selectable Timed Interrupt STI3 262144 bit 18 STI Selectable Timed Interrupt STI2 131072 bit 17 STI Selectable Timed Interrupt STI 65536 bit 16 STI Selectable Timed Interrupt STIO 32768 bit 15 EIl Event Input Interrupt Event 7 16384 bit 14 EIl Event Input Interrupt Event 6 8192 bit 13 Ell Event Input Interrupt Event 5 4096 bit 12 EIl Event Input
100. draw max 5V DC 100 mA 5V DC 160 mA 5V DC 110 mA 24V DC 50 mA 24V DC 120 mA 24V DC 50 mA Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Specifications Appendix A 2085 1F4 2085 IF8 2085 OF4 Analog Input and Output Modules Attribute 2085 IF4 2085 IF8 Wire size 0 25 2 5 mm 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated 75 C 167 F or greater 1 2 mm 3 64 in insulation max Wiring category 2 on signal ports Wire type Shielded Terminal screw torque 0 5 0 6 Nm 4 4 5 3 Ib in 2 Power dissipation total 1 7 W 3 7 W 1 75 W Enclosure type rating Meets IP20 Status indicators 1 green health indicator 1 green health indicator 1 green health indicator 8 red error indicators Isolation voltage 50V continuous Reinforced Insulation Type channel to system and channel to channel Type tested 720V DC for 60 s North American temp code T4 1 Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 2 RTB hold down screws should be tightened by hand They should not be tightened using a power tool Input Specifications 2085 IF4 and 2085 IF8 Attribute Number of inputs 2085 1F4 2085 IF8 4 8 Resolution 14 bits 13 bits plus sign bit Voltage 1 28 mV cnt unipolar 1 28 mV cnt bipolar Current 1 28 uA cnt
101. execute because the The axis is not operational due to motion profile motion profile defined in the function block cannot be achieved Correct the profile in the function block Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 defined in a function block cannot be achieved Reset the state of the axis using the MC_Reset function block Correct the profile in the function block 143 Chapter 9 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO Motion Function Block and Axis status Error ID Error ID Error ID MACRO Error description for Function Block Error description for Axis Status 09 MC_FB_ERR_VELOCITY The function block cannot execute because the The axis is not operational The motion profile motion profile requested in the function block requested in the function block cannot be achieved cannot be achieved due to current axis velocity because of current axis velocity Some examples Some examples e The function block requests the axis to reverse The function block requests the axis to reverse the direction while the axis is moving the direction while the axis is moving e The required motion profile cannot be achieved The required motion profile cannot be achieved due to current velocity too low or too high due to current velocity too low or too high Check the motion profile setting in the function Reset the state of the axis using the MC_Re
102. falling edge of Execute does not stop or even influence the execution of the actual function block Even if Execute is reset before the function block completes the corresponding outputs are set for at least one cycle If an instance of a function block receives a new Execute command before it completes as a series of commands on the same instance the new Execute command is ignored and the previously issued instruction continues with execution With Enable The outputs Valid and Error indicate whether a read function block executes successfully They are mutually exclusive only one of them can be true on one function block for MC_ReadBool MC_ReadParameter MC_ReadStatus The Valid Enabled Busy Error and ErrorlD outputs are reset with the falling edge of Enable as soon as possible Axis output 126 When used in Function Block Diagram you can connect the axis output parameter to the Axis input parameter of another motion function block for convenience for example MC_POWER to MC_HOME When used in a Ladder Diagram you cannot assign a variable to the Axis output parameter of another motion function block because it is read only Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO Chapter 9 General Rules for the Motion Function Block Parameter General Rules Behavior of Done Output The output Done is set when the commanded action has completed
103. in Connected Components Workbench for discrete output modules IMPORTANT On controller minor and major fault all output channels are de energized Analog expansion I O modules are interface modules that convert analog signals to digital values for inputs and convert digital values to analog signals for outputs Controllers can then use these signals for control purposes Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 n Chapter6 Expansion 1 0 Support Analog Input and Output Input Output Types and Ranges The 2085 IF4 and 2085 IF8 modules support four and eight input channels respectively while the 2085 OF4 supports four output channels Each of the channels can be configured as current or voltage input output with current mode as default configuration Input Output Type Range for 2085 IF4 2085 IF8 and 2085 OF4 Module Input Output Type Range 2085 IF4 0 20mA 4 20 mA default 2085 IF8 10 10 V 2085 0F4 i To use an input or output as a current or voltage device you must e wire the input output connector for the correct input output type see Input Output Wiring on page 61 e configure the input output as current or voltage through Connected Components Workbench see Configure Your Expansion I O Module on page 79 Data formats This parameter configures each channel to present analog data in any of the following formats e Raw Proportional Data The value presented to
104. input data is not reliable The previous input data is sent to the controller instead Diagnostic status bits are for internal use only GF General Fault Indicates a fault has occurred including RAM test failure ROM test failure EEPROM failure and reserved bits All channel fault bits Sx are also set OCx Open Circuit Flag Indicates that an open circuit condition exists on the channel x Ox Over Range Flag Indicates the controller is attempting to drive the analog output above its normal operating range or above the channel s High Clamp level However the module continues to convert analog output data to a maximum full range value if clamp levels are not set for the channel PU Power Up Indicates an unexpected MCU reset has occurred in RUN mode All channel error bits Ex and fault bits Sx are also set The module stays connected with no configuration after the reset PU and channel fault bits are cleared when a good configuration is downloaded Rx RTD compensation Indicates that the RTD compensation of channel x is not working This is effective for RTD and ohm type only Sx Channel Fault Indicates there is an error associated with the channel x Tx Thermocouple Indicates that the thermocouple compensation of channel x is compensation not working This is effective for thermocouple type only Ux Underrange Indicates that the input of channel x is at the minimum end of Calibration of Analog Modules Specifications i
105. is clear the Count Down bit is cleared 0 Mode Done HSCSTS Mode1Done Description Data Format HSC Modes User Program Access HSCSTS Mode1Done bit Oor1 read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode HSCAPRHSCMode on page 172 The Mode Done status flag is set 1 by the HSC sub system when the HSC is configured for Mode 0 or Mode 1 behavior and the accumulator counts up to the High Preset Overflow HSCSTS OVF Description Data Format HSC Modes JUser Program Access HSCSTS OVF bi 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode HSCAPPRHSCMode on page 172 t 0 9 read write The HSCSTS OVE status flag is set 1 by the HSC sub system whenever the accumulated value HSCSTS Accumulator has counted through the overflow variable HSCAPP OFSetting This bit is transitional and is set by the HSC sub system It is up to the control program to utilize track if necessary and clear 0 the overflow condition Overflow conditions do not generate a controller fault Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 183 Chapter 10 184 Use the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Underflow HSCSTS UNF Description Data Format HSC Modes User Program Access HSCSTS UNF bit 0 9 read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode HSCAPPHSCMode on page 172 The Underflow status flag is set 1 by the HSC sub
106. issued to stop counting Setting the Enable input parameter to False does not stop counting while in running mode HscCmd 3 reloads the following parameter values HighPreset LowPreset OverFlow UnderFlow HighPreset Output and LowPreset Output The parameter values shown in the Variable Monitor may not match the values in the Hardware Command 3 must be executed to load the values from the variables to the hardware without stopping the HSC If the HSC Enable is True HscCmd 3 will continuously load the parameters Trigger HscCmd 3 only once 189 Chapter 10 Use the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch HscCmd 4 reset sets the Acc value to the HSC AppData Accumalator value The HscCmd 4 does not stop HSC counting If HSC is counting when the HscCmd 4 is issued some counting may be lost To reset the Acc value and then continue the counting trigger the HscCmd 4 only once If the command is enabled continuously it may cause errors HSC AppData Accumalator value is updated automatically by the HSC mechanism with the same value as the HSC Sts Accumulator To set one specific value to HSC Acc while counting write the value to HSC AppData Accumalator immediately before HscCmd 4 is issued HSC Commands HSC Command Description 0x00 Reserved 0x01 HSC RUN e Start HSC if HSC in Idle mode and Rung is Enabled e Update HSC Status Info only if HSC already in RUN mode and Rung is Enabled e Updat
107. ka 1 MC_MoveAbsolute N a vs MC_Stop MC_MoveRelative 3 y MC_MoveVelocity r ErrorStop e MC_Stop 5 res MC_Reset and MC_Power Status FALSE MC_Reset ra Done i e StandsStill Note 3 Disabled Note 5 1 In the ErrorStop and Stopping states all function blocks except MC_Reset can be called although they will not be executed MC_Reset generates a transition to the Standstill state If an error occurs while the state machine is in the Stopping state a transition to the ErrorStop state is generated NOTES 2 Power Enable TRUE and there is an error in the Axis 3 Power Enable TRUE and there is no error in the Axis 4 MC_Stop Done AND NOT MC_Stop Execute 5 When MC_Power is called with Enable False the axis goes to the Disabled state for every state including ErrorStop 6 If an error occurs while the state machine is in Stopping state a transition to the ErrorStop state is generated 134 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO Chapter 9 Axis States The axis state can be determined from one of the following predefined states Axis state can be monitored through the Axis Monitor feature of the Connected Components Workbench software when in debug mode Motion States State value State Name 0x00 Disabled 0x01 Standstill 0x02 Discrete Motion 0x03 Continuous Motion
108. last expansion I O module in the system Hardware Features Micro850 expansion I O modules come as a single width 87 x 28 x 90 mm HxWxD or double width 87 x 46 x 90 mm HxWxD form factor See specifications for Expansion I O on page 240 to learn about your module s dimensions Single width Expansion 1 0 2085 OW8 shown 45307 Front view Right top view 56 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Expansion I O Support Chapter 6 Double width Expansion 1 0 2085 OW16 shown f a iS S a 3 S E 3 4 45297 Front view Right top view Module Description Description Description 1 Mounting screw hole mounting foot 6 Bus connector male female 2 Removable Terminal Block RTB 7 Latch hooks 3 RTB hold down screws 8 1 0 status LED 4 Cable grip 9 DIN rail mounting latch 5 Module interconnect latch 1 The removable terminal block has slots for mechanical keying to prevent inadvertently making the wrong wire connections to your module Expansion 1 0 modules are shipped with keys 2085 1032T Hardware Features
109. limit is detected motion is stopped immediately that is PTO pulse is stopped immediately by the hardware Alternatively if hard stop on hard limit switch is configured as OFF motion will be stopped using Emergency Stop parameters 136 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO Chapter 9 When any hard limit switch is enabled the input variable connecting to this physical input can still be used in User Application When a hard limit switch is enabled it will be used automatically for MC_Home function block if the switch is in the Homing direction configured in the Connected Components Workbench software Mode MC_HOME_ ABS SWITCH or MC_HOME_ REF WITH_ABS See Homing Function Block on page 157 Soft Limits Soft limits refer to data values that are managed by the motion controller Unlike hardware limits which detect the presence of the physical load at specific points in the allowable motion of the load soft limits are based on the stepper commands and the motor and load parameters Soft limits are displayed in user defined units The user can enable individual soft limits For non enabled soft limits whether upper or lower an infinite value is assumed Soft Limits are activated only when the corresponding axis is homed Users can enable or disable soft limits and configure an upper and lower limit setting through the Connected Components Workbenc
110. locked access to the user application will be allowed provided the controller is not busy with another session If the controller is locked access to the user application will fail Users will need to upgrade to revision 2 of the Connected Components Workbench software Connected Components Workbench revision 2 with Micro800 controller firmware revision 1 Connected Components Workbench revision 2 is capable of discovering and connecting to Micro800 controllers with firmware revision earlier than revision 2 that is not supporting the Controller Password feature However the Controller Password feature will not be available to these controllers The user will not be able see interfaces associated with the Controller Password feature in the Connected Components Workbench session Users are advised to upgrade the firmware See Flash Upgrade Your Micro800 Firmware on page 255 for instructions The following workflows are supported on compatible Micro800 controllers firmware revision 2 and Connected Components Workbench software revision 2 Upload from a Password Protected Controller Launch the Connected Components Workbench software On the Device Toolbox expand Catalog by clicking the sign 1 2 3 Select the target controller 4 Select Upload 5 When requested provide the controller password Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Controller Security Chapter 11 Debug a Pas
111. mm 22 14 AWG solid copper wire or 0 32 1 3 mm 22 16 AWG stranded copper wire rated 90 C 194 F insulation max Terminal screw torque 0 5 0 6 Nm 4 4 5 3 Ib in using a Phillips head or 2 5 mm 0 10in flat blade screwdriver Wiring category 2 on power ports Insulation stripping length 7 mm 0 28 in North American temp code T4A 1 Any fluctuation in voltage source must be within 85V 264V Do not connect the adapter to a power source that has fluctuations outside of this range 2 Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 227 AppendixA Specifications Micro800 Plug In Modules Micro800 digital and analog plug in modules specifications are listed below Digital Plug Ins Output Specifications 2080 0B4 2080 0V4 2080 1040B4 2080 I1040V4 Attribute Power supply voltage Value 10 8V DC min 30V DC max On state voltage 10V DC min 24V DC nom 30V DC max On state current 5 0 mA 10V DC min 0 5 A max steady state 2 A surge 2 s min General Specifications 2080 0B4 2080 0V4 2080 1040B4 2080 1040V4 Attribute Mounting torque Value 0 2 Nm 1 48 Ib in Status indicators For input or output modules 4 yellow For combination modules
112. monitored remotely through various communication channels Data Elements for Axis_Ref Element Data Type Description name Axis_ D UINT8 The logic axis ID automatically assigned by the Connected Components Workbench software This parameter cannot be edited or viewed by user ErrorFlag UINT8 Indicates whether an error is present in the axis AxisHomed UINT8 Indicates whether homing operation is successfully executed for the axis or not When the user tries to redo homing for an axis with AxisHomed already set homing performed successfully and the result is not successful the AxisHomed status will be cleared ConsVelFlag UINT8 Indicates whether the axis is in constant velocity movement or not Stationary axis is not considered to be in constant velocity AccFlag UINT8 Indicates whether the axis is in an accelerating movement or not DecFlag UINT8 Indicates whether the axis is in a decelerating movement or not AxisState UINT8 Indicates the current state of the axis For more information see Axis States on page 135 ErrorlD UINT16 Indicates the cause for axis error when error is indicated by ErrorFlag This error usually results from motion function block execution failure See Motion Function Block and Axis status Error ID on page 143 ExtraData UINT16 Reserved TargetPos REAL Indicates the final target position of the axis for MoveAbsolute and float MoveRelative function blocks
113. mounting and wiring the Micro800 Non isolated RTD Plug in Module Micro800 Non isolated Thermocouple Plug in Module Wiring Diagrams 2080 WDO006 nformation on mounting and wiring the Micro800 Non isolated Thermocouple Plug in Module Micro800 Memory Backup and High Accuracy RTC Plug In Module Wiring Diagrams 2080 WD007 ormation on mounting and wiring the icro800 Memory Backup and High Accuracy TC Plug In Module I Micro800 6 Channel Trimpot Analog Input Plug In Module Wiring Diagrams 2080 WD008 nformation on mounting and wiring the Micro800 6 Channel Trimpot Analog Input Plug In Module Micro800 Digital Relay Output Plug in Module Wiring Diagrams 2080 WD010 Information on mounting and wiring the Micro800 Digital Relay Output Plug in Module Micro800 Digital Input Output and Combination Plug in Modules Wiring Diagrams 2080 WD011 Information on mounting and wiring the Micro800 Digital Input Output and Combination Plug in Modules Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system Product Certifications website http ab com Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002C EN E March 2012 Resource Application Consideratio
114. now outputs O0 and O1 can be turned On Off We have set the HP Output to a decimal value of 1 which when converted to binary is equal to 0001 This means that when a High Preset is reached output O0 will turn on and stay on until the HSC is reset or the counter counts back down to a Low Preset The LPOutput works same way as the HP Output except an output will be turned on when a Low Preset is reached Assign Variables to the Function Block 1 Go back to the ladder diagram and assign the variables you have just configured to the corresponding elements of the HSC function block The HSC function block should appear as shown in the screenshot To assign a variable to a particular element in your function block double click the empty variable block On the Variable selector that appears choose the variable you have just created For example for the input element HSC AppDaata select the variable MyAppData Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Quickstarts Appendix C 2 Next click the Micro830 controller under the Project Organizer pane to bring up the Micro830 Controller Properties pane Under Controller Properties click Embedded I O Set the input filters to a correct value depending on the characteristics of your encoder Controller Embedded 1 0 Controller General Memory Input Filters Input Latch and EII Edge Serial Port Date and Tine pie a ek tated tach Interrupts 0 S
115. on page 191 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 165 Chapter 10 Use the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch What is High Speed Counter 166 High Speed Counter is used to detect and store narrow fast pulses and its specialized instructions to initiate other control operations based on counts reaching preset values These control operations include the automatic and immediate execution of the high speed counter interrupt routine and the immediate update of outputs based on a source and mask pattern you set The HSC functions are different than most other controller instructions Their operation is performed by custom circuitry that runs in parallel with the main system processor This is necessary because of the high performance requirements of these functions Features and Operation The HSC is extremely versatile you can select or configure the master HSC for any one of ten 10 modes and the sub HSC for any one of five 5 modes of operation See HSC Mode HSCAPP HSCMode on page 172 for more information Some of the enhanced capabilities of the High Speed Counters are e 100 kHz operation e High speed direct control of outputs e 32 bit signed integer data count range of 2 147 483 647 e Programmable High and Low presets and Overflow and Underflow setpoints e Automatic Interrupt processing based on accumulated count e Run time editable parameters from the user control p
116. page 53 CIP Symbolic Addressing Users may access any global variables through CIP Symbolic addressing except for system and reserved variables Supported Data Types in CIP Symbolic Data Type Description BOOL Logical Boolean with values TRUE and FALSE SINT Signed 8 bit integer value INT Signed 16 bit integer value DINT Signed 32 bit integer value LINT Signed 64 bit integer value USINT Unsigned 8 bit integer value UINT Unsigned 16 bit integer value UDINT Unsigned 32 bit integer value ULINT Unsigned 64 bit integer value REAL 32 bit floating point value LREAL2 64 bit floating point value STRING character string 1 byte per character SHORT_STRINGI2 character string 1 byte per character 1 byte length indicator 1 Logix MSG instruction can read write SINT INT DINT LINT and REAL datatypes using CIP Data Table Read and CIP Data Table Write message types BOOL USINT UINT UDINT ULINT LREAL STRING and SHORT_STRING datatypes are not accessible with the Logix MSG instruction 2 Not supported in PanelView Component ASCII ASCII provides connection to other ASCII devices such as bar code readers weigh scales serial printers and other intelligent devices You can use ASCII by configuring the embedded or any plug in serial RS 232 port for the ASCII driver Refer to the Connected Components Workbench Online Help for more information To configure the
117. preset reached High preset reached e Overflow condition count up through the overflow value Underflow condition count down through the underflow value The HSC EX bit can be used in the control program as conditional logic to detect ifan HSC interrupt is executing The HSC sub system will clear 0 the EX bit when the controller completes its processing of the HSC subroutine User Interrupt Pending HSCO PE Description Data Format HSC Modes User Program Access HSCO PE bit 0 9 read only 1 For Mode descriptions see Count Down HSCSTS CountDownFlag on page 183 The PE User Interrupt Pending is a status flag that represents an interrupt is pending This status bit can be monitored or used for logic purposes in the control program if you need to determine when a subroutine cannot be executed immediately This bit is maintained by the controller and is set and cleared automatically User Interrupt Lost HSCO LS Description Data Format HSC Modes User Program Access HSCO LS bit 0 9 read write 1 For Mode descriptions see Count Down HSCSTS CountDownFlag on page 183 The LS User Interrupt Lost is a status flag that represents an interrupt has been lost The controller can process 1 active and maintain up to 1 pending user interrupt conditions before it sets the lost bit This bit is set by the controller It is up to the control program to utilize track
118. quickstart includes the following sections Create the HSC Project and Variables on page 272 Assign Values to the HSC Variables on page 275 Assign Variables to the Function Block on page 278 Run the High Speed Counter on page 279 Use the Programmable Limit Switch PLS Function on page 281 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 271 Appendix Quickstarts 272 Create the HSC Project and Variables 1 Start Connected Components Workbench and open a new project From the Device Toolbox go to Catalog Controllers Double click your controller or drag and drop it onto the Project Organizer windows Device Toolbox v Discover Catalog qt 2080 LC10 12QWB qit 2080 LC30 10QVB qt 2080 LC30 10QWB qrt 2080 LC30 164WB qrt 2080 LC30 16QVB qt 2080 LC30 16QWB qt 2080 LC30 24QBB Ti 2080 LC30 24QVB Ww 2080 LC30 24QWB qrt 2080 LC30 484WB qt 2080 LC30 48QBB Te qrt 2080 LC30 48QWB 2 Under Project Organizer right click Programs Click Add New LD Ladder Diagram to add a new ladder logic program Project Organizer SEWER amp Name Project20 a Programs E YPCP untitled i Local Variables P E New ST Structured Text O New LD Ladder Diagram 2 New FBD Function Block Diagram X User Defined Function Blocks 1 The HSC is supported on all Micro830 and Micro850 controllers except on 2080 LCxx xxAWB types Rockwe
119. same steps and values as the previous project Set the values for the following variables as follows e HSCAPP PlsEnable variable should be set to TRUE Seta value only for UFSetting and OF Setting OutputMask is optional depending if an output is to be set or not Your new values should follow the example below UntitledLD1 VAR_ Name 1 gt MyAppData HSCAPP e MyAppData PisEnable BOOL TRUE MyAppData HscIO UNT 0 MyAppData HscMode INT o 7 MyAppData Accumulator DINT MyAppData HPSetting DINT MyAppData LPSetting DINT MyAppData OFSetting DINT 80 MyAppData UFSetting DINT SO MyAppData OutputMask UDINT 285 MyAppData HPOutput UDINT MyAppData LPOutput UDINE HSISES oo PLS gt 1 4 4 MyPLS t HscHP DINT 0 MyPLstt HsclP INT O o 0 MyPLS 1 HscHPOutPut UDINT MyPLS 1 HscLPOutPut UDINT 1B MyPLs 2 HscH MINT 20 MyPLS 2 HscP PINT 20 ReadWrite In this example the PLS variable is given a dimension of 1 4 This means that the HSC can have four pairs of High and Low Presets Once again your High Presets should be set lower than the OFSetting and the Low Preset should be greater than the UFSetting The HscHPOutPut and HscLPOutPut values will determine which outputs will be turned on when a High Preset or Low Preset is reached 2 You can now build and download the program into the controller then debug and test it following the instructions for the last project 282 Rockwell Automation Publica
120. serial port for ASCII see Configure ASCII on page 51 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 45 Chapter5 Communication Connections CIP Communications Pass thru The Micro830 and Micro850 controllers support pass thru on any communications port that supports Common Industrial Protocol CIP The maximum number of supported hops is two A hop is defined to be an intermediate connection or communications link between two devices in Micro800 this is through EtherNet IP or CIP Serial or CIP USB Examples of Supported Architectures USB to EtherNet IP USB eI Micro850 controller1 EtherNet IP The user can download a program from the PC to controller1 over USB Also the program can be downloaded to controller2 and controller3 over USB to EtherNet IP Use Modems with Micro800 Controllers 46 EtherNet IP to CIP Serial EtherNet IP Micro850 controller1 CIP Serial Micro850 controller2 Micro850 controller3 Micro830 controller2 IMPORTANT Micro800 controllers do not support three hops for example from EtherNet IP CIP Serial EtherNet IP Serial modems can be used with the Micro830 and Micro850 controllers Making a DF1 Point to Point Connection You can
121. specified but the user can also initially enter an rpm value Start stop velocity should not be greater than maximum velocity Max Velocity 2 Range 1 10 000 000 pulse sec Default 100 000 0 pulse sec Max Acceleration Range 1 10 000 000 pulse sec Default 10 000 000 pulse sec 50 000 mm sec Max Deceleration Range 1 100 000 pulse sec Default 10 000 000 pulse sec2 50 000 mm sec Max Jerk Range 0 10 000 000 pulse sec Default 10 000 000 pulse sec 50 000 mm sec Emergency Stop Profile Defines stop type velocity deceleration and jerk values Stop Type Set as Deceleration Stop default or Immediate Stop Stop Velocity Range 1 100 000 pulse sec Default 1 000 0 pulse sec 5 0 mm sec 300 0 rpm Stop Deceleration Range 1 10 000 000 pulse sec Default 1 000 000 pulse sec 5 000 0 mm sec 300 0 rpm Stop Jerk Range 0 10 000 000 pulse sec Default 0 0 step sec3 0 0 mm sec The parameter is set as REAL float value in Connected Components Workbench To learn more about conversions and rounding of REAL values see Real Data Resolution on page 153 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 151 Chapter 9 152 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO 2 The formula for deriving rpm to user unit and vice versa v in user unit sec x 60 s v in rpm travel per revolution in user unit 3
122. status to set Data Structure on page 171 Mode1Done Input BOOL Mode 1A or 1B counting is done HPReached Input BOOL High Preset reached This bit can be reset to FALSE when HSC is not counting LPReached Input BOOL Low Preset reached This bit can be reset to FALSE when HSC is not counting OFOccurred Input BOOL Overflow occurred This bit can be reset to FALSE when necessary UFOccurred Input BOOL Underflow occurred This bit can be reset to FALSE when necessary Sts Output UINT HSC function block execution status Refer to HSC Function Block Status Codes on age 190 for HSC status code description except p 0x02 and 0x04 Programmable Limit Switch The Programmable Limit Switch function allows you to configure the PLS Function High Speed Counter to operate as a PLS programmable limit switch or rotary cam switch When PLS operation is enabled HSCAPP PLSEnable True the HSC High Speed Counter uses PLS data for limit cam positions Each limit cam position has corresponding data parameters that are used to set or clear physical outputs on the controller s base unit The PLS data block is illustrated below Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 191 Chapter 10 192 Use the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch tT Micc630 3 Ea Programs ie a O ontrei ai Local Yeriables E H Untzio ai Local Variables 1 i Global Variables l DetaTypes x i
123. status word can be read by appending a zz to the Global Variable name where zz is the bit number 00 15 2085 OF4 Status Data Mapping Word Bit Position 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Status 0 Channel 0 Data Value Status 1 Channel 1Data Value Status 2 Channel 2 Data Value Status 3 Channel 3 Data Value Status 4 PU GF CRC Reserved Reserved E3 E2 E1 E0 3 S2 S1 SO Status 5 Reserved U3 03 Reserved U2 02 Reserved U1 01 Reserved UO 00 Status 6 Reserved Field Descriptions for 2085 OF4 Status Word Field Description CRC CRC error Indicates there is a CRC error on data receive All channel fault bits Sx are also set The error is cleared when the next good data is received Ex Error Indicates there is an DAC hardware error broken wire or high load resistance associated with the channel x an error code may be displayed on the respective input word 0 3 and the corresponding channel is locked disabled until user clears the error by writing the CEx bit in output data GF General Fault Indicates a fault has occurred including RAM test failure ROM test failure EEPROM failure and reserved bits All channel fault bits Sx are also set 98 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Expansion I O Support Chapter 6 Field Descriptions for 2085 OF4 Status Word Field Ox Description Over Range Flag
124. table Pin Definition RS 485 Example RS 232 Example 1 RS 485 B not used 2 GND GND GND 3 RS 232 RTS not used RTS 4 RS 232 RxD not used RxD 5 RS 232 DCD not used DCD 6 RS 232 CTS not used CTS 7 RS 232 TxD not used TxD 8 RS 485 A not used 42 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Overview Supported Communication Protocols Chapter 5 Communication Connections This chapter describes how to communicate with your control system and configure communication settings The method you use and cabling required to connect your controller depends on what type of system you are employing This chapter also describes how the controller establishes communication with the appropriate network Topics include Topic Page Supported Communication Protocols 43 Use Modems with Micro800 Controllers 46 Configure Serial Port 47 Configure Ethernet Settings 53 The Micro830 and Micro850 controllers have the following embedded communication channels e anon isolated RS 232 485 combo port e anon isolated USB programming port In addition the Micro850 controller has an RJ 45 Ethernet port Micro830 Micro850 controllers support the following communication protocols through the embedded RS 232 485 serial port as well as any installed serial port plug in modules e Modbus RTU Master and Slave e CIP Serial Server RS 232 only e ASCII RS 232 only In addition the embedded
125. the commanded position This signal has to be Active after the moving part reaches the commanded position for MoveAbsolute and MoveRelative function blocks For MoveAbsolute and MoveRelative function blocks when In_Position is enabled the controller will report an error EP_IMC_MECHAN_ERR if the signal is not active within five seconds when the last PTO pulse sent out Not Shared Home Marker Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 INPUT This signal is the zero pulse signal from the motor encoder This signal can be used for fine homing sequence to improve the homing accuracy Not Shared 121 Chapter9 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO Sample Motion Wiring Configuration on 2080 LC30 xx0VB 2080 LC50 xxO0VB Encoder Signal Cable CLK CLK IR DIR Pin 3 Enable ST Motor Power Cable 2080 LC30 xxQVB 2080 LC50 xxQVB Kinetix3 46056 Notes 1 Drive Enable Pin 3 and Reset Drive Pin 7 will be operating as sourcing inputs when Pin1 2 connected to Oof the Power Supply 2 To help you configure Kinetix3 drive parameters so the drive can communicate and be controlled by a Micro830 Micro850 controller see publication CC QS025 122 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO Chapter 9 Sample Motion Wiring Configuration on 2080 LC30 xx0BB
126. this release Error Handling 128 All blocks have two outputs which deal with errors that can occur during execution These outputs are defined as follows e Error Rising edge of Error informs that an error occurred during the execution of the function block where the function block cannot successfully complete e ErrorlD Error number Types of errors e Function block logic such as parameters out of range state machine violation attempted e hard limits or soft limits reached e Drive failure Drive Ready is false For more information about function block error see Motion Function Block and Axis status Error ID on page 143 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO Chapter 9 Simultaneous Execution of Two Movement Function Blocks Busy Output True The general rule is that when a movement function block is busy then a function block with the same instance for example MC_MoveRelative2 cannot be executed again until the function block status is not busy TIP MC_MoveRelative MC_MoveAbsolute will be busy until final position is reached MC_MoveVelocity MC_Halt and MC_Stop will be busy until final velocity is reached Velocity Execute Time Busy1 46054 When a movement function block is busy a function block with a different instance for example MC_MoveRelativel and MC_MoveAbsolute1 on the same axi
127. to Aux and Network Inputs to Outputs Type tested for 60 s 720V DC 1 0 to Aux and Network Inputs to Outputs North American temp code T4 1 Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Input Specifications Attribute Number of Inputs 2080 LC50 48AWB 120V AC Input 28 High Speed DC Input Inputs 0 11 12 2080 LC50 480WB 2080 LC50 480VB 2080 LC50 480BB Standard DC Input Inputs 12 and higher 16 Input group to backplane isolation Verified by the following dielectric tests 1950V AC for 2 s 150V working voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Verified by the following dielectric tests 720V DC for 2 s 50V DC working voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Voltage category 110V AC 24V DC sink source Operating voltage range 132V 60Hz AC max 16 8 26 4V DC 65 C 149 F 10 26 4V DC 65 C 149 F 16 8 30 0V DC 30 C 86 F 10 30 0V DC 30 C 86 F Off state voltage max 20V AC 5V DC Off state current max 1 5mA 1 5mA On state current min 5 mA 79V AC 5 0 mA 16 8V DC 1 8 mA 10V DC On state current nom 12 mA 120V AC 7 6 mA 24V DC 6 15 mA 24V DC On state current max 16 mA 132V AC 12 0 mA 30V DC Nominal impedance 12 kQ 50 Hz 3kQ 3 74 kQ 10 kQ 60 Hz Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E
128. value that has been assigned Drive Enable Output Servo On Output Enable flag Check the option box to enable Output The list of available digital output variables that can be assigned as servo drive output Active Level Set as High default or Low In position Input Check the option box to enable in position input monitoring Input List of digital input variables for in position input monitoring Select an input Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 147 Chapter9 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO General Parameters Parameter Description and Values Active Level Set as High default or Low Drive ready input Servo Ready Input Enable flag Check the option box to enable the input Input The list of digital input variables Select an input Active Level Set as High default or Low Touch probe input Configure whether an input for touch probe is used Check the option box to enable touch probe input Input List of digital input variables Select an input Active Level Set the active level for touch probe input as High default or Low PTO Channel Naming Names of embedded PTO channels have the prefix EM embedded and each available PTO channel is enumerated starting from 0 For example a controller that supports three axes will have the following PTO channels available e EM_0 e EM 1 e EM 2 Motor and Load Edit
129. 0 mm 0 39 in Wiring category 2 on signal ports Wire type Copper Terminal screw torque max 0 5 0 6 Nm 4 4 5 3 Ib in 2 Input output circuit type 120V AC input 240V AC input 120V 240V AC output Power supply 120V AC 240V AC 120V 240V AC Power dissipation total 2 36 W 2 34 W 5 19 W Enclosure type rating Meets IP20 Status indicators 8 yellow indicators Isolation voltage 150V continuous 240V continuous Reinforced Insulation Type Reinforced channel to system Insulation Type Type tested 3250V DC for 60 s channel to system Type tested 1950V DC for 60 s North American temp code T4 1 Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 2 RTB hold down screws should be tightened by hand They should not be tightened using a power tool 242 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Input Specifications 2005 IA8 and 2085 IM8 Specifications Appendix A Attribute 2085 IA8 2085 IM8 Number of Inputs 8 Voltage category 120V AC 240V AC Operating voltage range 74 120V AC 159 240V AC Off state voltage max 20V AC 40V AC Off state current max 2 5mA On state current min 5 0 mA 74V AC 4 0 mA 159V AC On state current max 12 5 mA 120V AC 7 0 mA 240V AC Input impedance max 22 2 kQ Inrush current max 450 mA Input filter time lt 20ms
130. 00 Memory Backup and High Accuracy RTC Plug In Moduleres tf og cus ie chat ideas near aAa 107 Micro800 6 Channel Trimpot Analog Input Plug In Module 108 ACCESSO ei 25 ste tre See SG aed DEAS Cire Sis Be a EE OE RREA 108 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM001D EN E September 2012 ix Table of Contents Program Execution in Micro800 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO External AC Power Supply vcicsendatenias ndietiedeantenan ds 108 Specifications oie cnn dis bette ead E AEE o A A A 109 Chapter 8 Overview of Program Execution sc inesceees Knee ee vadiae tng 111 Execution Ruleshicdd sues ts iow dawhd ta E Leen a a 112 Controller Load and Performance Considerations 4 113 Periodic Execution of Programs sepia cin tag iawieriue yd wlae doraeacers 113 Power Up and First Scans sic oe otete ote cue Rueda ee Yel 113 Memory Allocation eerie a ea seswi ons Ghen ress cas awe 114 Guidelines and Limitations for Advanced Users 0000 00 114 Chapter 9 Use the Micro800 Motion Control Feature 00005 118 Input and Output Signals civisepasscencnnsmias ce dadnees pe rnd 119 Motion Control Function Blocks 00 cece eee eee eee ees 123 General Rules for the Motion Control Function Blocks 125 Motion Axis and Parameters ined siaedieis baa Gaeaes 133 Motion Axis State Diagram 2s ia s eacnins apucaege vate eae noice 134 AXIS States 2c tous eet toe bat lol ince se he Ao
131. 000 4000 20000 10000 10000 0 10000 Percent Range 0 10000 0 10000 Not supported 0 10000 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 75 Chapter6 Expansion 1 0 Support 76 Specialty Module 2085 IRT4 Temperature Input Module The 2085 IRT4 module lets you configure a sensor type for each of four input channels that linearizes analog signal into a temperature value Sensor Type The following Thermocouple and RTD sensor types are supported by the 2085 IRT4 expansion I O module Supported Thermocouple Types and mV Range Sensor Range Range B 300 1800 C 572 3272 F C 0 2315 C 32 4199 F E 270 1000 C 454 1832 F J 210 1200 C 346 2192 F K 270 13872 C 454 2502 F TXK XK L 200 800 C 328 1472 F N 270 1300 C 454 2372 F R 50 1768 C 58 3214 F S 50 1768 C 58 3214 F ili 270 400 C 454 752 F mV 0 100 mV Supported RTD Types and Ohms Range Sensor Range Range 00 QPt 0 00385 Euro 200 8 70 C 328 1598 F 200 2Pt 0 00385 Euro 200 4 00 C 328 752 F 00 QPt a 0 003916 U S 200 6 30 C 328 1166 F 200 QPt 0 003916 U S 200 4 00 C 328 752 F 00 QNickel 618 60 250 C 76 482 F 200 Q Nickel 618 60 200 C 76 392 F 20 QNicke
132. 002D EN E September 2012 Micro800 Plug In Modules and Accessories Serial Port to Modem Cable Pinout Chapter 7 When connecting Micro800 to a modem using an RS 232 cable the maximum that the cable length may be extended is 15 24 m 50 ft DTE Device Micro800 RS232 Isolated Serial Port Plug in Module 8 Pin B3 TXD B2 RXD A2 GND Al B B4 Al B1 DCD A4 CTS A3 RTS A Micro800 Memory Backup and High Accuracy RTC Plug In Module ATTENTION Do not connect to pins A1 and B4 for RS 232 connections This connection will cause damage to the RS 232 485 DCE Device Modem and so on 25 Pin 9 Pin ha i TXD 2 3 RXD 3 2 gt GND 7 5 DCD 8 1 DTR 20 4 DSR 6 6 CTS 5 8 M a RTS 4 7 communication port This plug in 2080 MEMBAK RTC allows you to make a backup copy of the project in your controller and adds precision real time clock function without needing to calibrate or update periodically It can also be used to clone update Micro830 Micro850 application code However it cannot be used as additional Run Time Program or Data Storage This plug in is physically keyed so that it can only be installed in the leftmost slot slot 1 of your Micro830 Micro850 controller Removal and Insertion Under Power is supported Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 107 Chapter7 Micro800 Plug In Mod
133. 0x04 Homing 0x06 Stopping 0x07 Stop Error Axis State Update On motion execution although the motion profile is controlled by Motion Engine as a background task which is independent from POU scan axis state update is still dependent on when the relevant motion function block is called by the POU scan For example on a moving axis on a Ladder POU state of a rung true an MC_MoveRelative function block in the rung is scanned and the axis starts to move Before MC_MoveRelative completes the state of the rung becomes False and MC_MoveRelative is no longer scanned In this case the state of this axis cannot switch from Discrete Motion to StandStill even after the axis fully stops and the velocity comes to 0 Always_on e HS Variable Monitoring Global Variables Micro850 Local Variables N A Sys Logical Yalud e _MOTION_DIAG C AxisO ErorFlag ry Axis0_AxisHomed Axis0 ConstVel Axis0 AccelFlag LJ AxisO DecelFlag ry Axis0_AxisState AsisO ErronlD AxisO ExtraData Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 135 Chapter9 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO Limits The Limits parameter sets a boundary point for the axis and works in conjunction with the Stop parameter to define a boundary condition for the axis on the type of stop to apply when certain configured limits are reached There are three types of motion position limits e Hard Lim
134. 1 Count input A leads count input B 2 Count input B leads count input A Blank cells don t care ie rising edge Uefa ling edge TIP 176 Inputs 0 11 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Use the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Chapter 10 HSC Mode 7 Quadrature Counter phased inputs A and B With External Reset and Hold HSC Mode 7 Examples Input Embedded Input 0 Embedded Input 1 Embedded Input 2 Embedded Input3 CE Bit Comments Terminals Function Count A Count B Z reset Hold Example wm T off 0 off 0 on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count Example 212 y off 0 off 0 off 0 on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count Example3 U Toff 0 off 0 on 1 Reset accumulator to zero Example 4 on 1 Hold accumulator value Example 5 on 1 Hold accumulator value Example 6 off 0 on 1 Hold accumulator value Example 7 off 0 off 0 Hold accumulator value 1 Count input A leads count input B 2 Count input B leads count input A Blank cells don t care fi rising edge falling edge TIP Inputs 0 11 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used HSC Mode 8 Quadrature X4 Counter HSC Mode 8 Examples Embedded Input 1 HSC0 Em
135. 10 point Controllers Micro830 Programmable Controllers Installation Information on mounting and wiring the Instructions 2080 IN003 Micro830 16 point Controllers Micro830 Programmable Controllers Installation Information on mounting and wiring the Instructions 2080 IN004 Micro830 24 point Controllers Micro830 Programmable Controllers Installation Information on mounting and wiring the Instructions 2080 IN005 Micro830 48 point Controllers Micro850 Programmable Controllers Installation Information on mounting and wiring the Instructions 2080 IN007 Micro850 24 point Controllers Micro850 Programmable Controllers Installation Information on mounting and wiring the Instructions 2080 IN008 Micro850 48 point Controllers Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002C EN E March 2012 iii Preface Resource Micro800 16 point and 32 point 12 24V Sink Source Input Modules Installation Instructions 2085 IN001 Description Information on mounting and wiring the expansion O modules 2085 1016 2085 10327 Micro800 Bus Terminator Module Installation Instruction 2085 IN002 Information on mounting and wiring the expansion O bus terminator 2085 ECR Micro800 16 Point Sink and 16 Point Source 12 24V DC Output Modules Installation Instructions 2085 IN003 Information on mounting and wiring the expansion I O modules 208
136. 1040B4 2080 1040V4 Attribute Relative humidity Value IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat 5 95 noncondensing Vibration IEC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2 g 10 500 Hz Shock operating IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock 25g Shock non operating IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock 25g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD Immunity IEC 61000 4 2 4 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges Radiated RF immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10 V M with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 80 2000 MHz 10 V M with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz 10 V M with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 1890 MHz 10 V M with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 2000 2700 MHz EFT B immunity 2 kV 5 kHz on signal ports Surge transient immunity 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF immunity 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz Certifications 2080 0B4 2080 0V4 2080 1040B4 2080 I1040V4 Certification when product is marked c UL us Value UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E322657 UL Listed for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations certified for U S and Canada See UL File E334470 CE European Union 2004 108 EC EMC Directive compliant with EN 61326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity
137. 135 VARIES sect as a EIE E LAs whe Sad neues BEV RS EEEN 136 Motion S00 pesrirang Mota aan aa E Aa 138 Motion Directions i isessnc pieren ni a an eeageed bees 139 Axis Elements and Data Ly pes e e ue icbeeata en ededdan 140 Axis Error Scenarios oa cinsaiggd 2525 3a awe daa sis Mee Raw eee 141 MG Engine Diag Data Types atkencancanicorrsanceren take 142 Function Block and Axis Status Error Codes 00 cece eens 142 Major Fault Handling dics tacuatpheher i ia dndes Vetere eas 145 Motion Axis Configuration in Connected Components Workbench 145 Add New ARS ys asadaediee hat eieiiocd a a enue eras 146 Edit Axis Conhsurations jiescScnas asda sassy sea eveonmasenes 147 Axis Start Stop Velocity 16s 4cney aor cinneeea de dadayae ee poses 153 Real Data Resolution 245 0i2meses atran keri ageme teas 153 PEO Pulse AGenracy sevesintetu eed cide teehee eters te 156 Motion Axis Parameter Validation 0ccecuceceeees 156 Te Sta Axis mogna anen ea ea a wee Sateen aaa 157 Monitor AMAKI A a a ieee a a a a dh las aa ThA 157 Homing Function Block st cccses se xeds wweud Seed vanes wens Maa deed 157 Conditions for Successful Homing 0 0 eee eee 158 MC HOME ABS SWITCH sos 0 oon R 159 MC_HOME LIMIT SWITCH cccecceceecuceeceess 160 MC HOME REF WITH ABS eA a EE 161 MC HOME REF PULSE oooi coiro ra rriren 163 MC HOME DIRECT nuorien Clk a ib a e 164 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM001D EN E
138. 2 147 483 648 and 2 147 483 647 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 179 Chapter 10 Use the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch TIP Data loaded into the underflow variable must be less than or equal to the data resident in the low preset HSCAPP LPSetting or an HSC error is generated Output Mask Bits HSCAPP OutputMask Description Data Format User Program Access HSCAPP OutputMask word 32 bit binary read write The HSCAPP OutputMask defines which embedded outputs on the controller can be directly controlled by the high speed counter The HSC sub system has the ability to directly without control program interaction turn outputs ON or OFF based on the HSC accumulator reaching the High or Low presets The bit pattern stored in the HSCAPP OutputMask variable defines which outputs are controlled by the HSC and which outputs are not controlled by the HSC For example if the user wants to control outputs 0 1 3 using HSC then the user needs to assign HscAppData OutputMask 2 1011 OR using Decimal Value HscAppData OutputMask 11 The bit pattern of the HSCAPP OutputMask variable directly corresponds to the output bits on the controller Bits that are set 1 are enabled and can be turned on or off by the HSC sub system Bits that are clear 0 cannot be turned on or off by the HSC sub system The mask bit pattern can be configured only during initial setup T
139. 2080 LC50 xx0BB in 1 2 g Encoder Signal Cable in 12 CLK in 49 CLK in 14 DIR DIR nable ST Motor Power Cable Kinetix3 46047 2080 LC30 xxQBB 2080 LC50 xxQBB Notes 1 Drive Enable Pin 3 and Reset Drive Pin 7 will be operating as sinking inputs when Pin 1 2 connected to of the Power Supply 2 To help you configure Kinetix3 drive parameters so the drive can communicate and be controlled by a Micro830 Micro850 controller see publication CC QS025 Motion Control Function Motion control function blocks instruct an axis to a specified position distance B oc ks velocity and state Function Blocks are categorized as Movement driving motion and Administrative Administrative Function Blocks Function Block Name Function Block Name MC Power MC_ReadAxisError MC_Reset MC_ReadParameter MC_TouchProbe MC_ReadBoolParameter MC_AbortTrigger MC_WriteParameter MC_ReadStatus MC_WriteBoolParameter MC_SetPosition Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 123 Chapter 9 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO Movement Function Blocks Function Block Name MC_ MoveAbsolute Description This function block commands an axis to a specified absolute position Correct Axis State for issuing Function Block Standstill Discrete Motion Continuous Motion MC MoveRelative This function block commands an
140. 3 Current per common max 5A 2A 4A Current per controller max 1440V A 2A 4A Turn on time 10 ms 2 5 US 0 1 ms Turn off time max 1 ms 1 Applies for general purpose operation only Does not apply for high speed operation Relay Contacts Ratings Maximum Volts Amperes Amperes Volt Amperes Make 120V AC Continuous 1800V A 240V AC 75A 0 75 A 24V DC 1 0 A 1 0 A 28V A 125V DC 0 22 A Environmental Specifications Attribute Value Temperature operating IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 20 65 C 4 149 F Temperature surrounding air max 65 C 149 F Temperature non operating IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold EC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat EC 60068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock 40 85 C 40 185 F Relative humidity EC 60068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat 5 95 non condensing Vibration EC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2 g 10 500 Hz Shock operating EC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock 25g Shock non operating IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock DIN mount 25 g PANEL mount 45 g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD immunity IEC 61000 4 2 6 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges Rockwell Automa
141. 328 1706 gt 930 1706 J 210 346 1200 130 1100 lt 130 202 2192 202 2012 gt 1100 2012 K 270 454 1370 200 1300 lt 200 328 2498 328 2372 gt 1300 2372 N 270 454 1300 200 1200 lt 200 328 2372 328 2192 gt 1200 2192 R 50 58 1760 40 1640 lt 40 104 3200 104 2984 gt 1640 2984 S 50 58 1760 40 1640 lt 40 104 3200 104 2984 gt 1640 2984 T 270 454 400 220 340 lt 220 364 752 364 644 gt 340 644 To configure Thermocouple type and update rate in Connected Components Workbench software refer to the section Configure the Plug ins in Connected Components Workbench on page 326 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 RTD Module 2080 RTD2 Non isolated Thermocouple and RTD Plug in Modules Appendix G The 2080 RTD2 module supports RTD measurement applications that support up to two channels The module digitally converts analog data and transmits the converted data in its image table The module supports connections from any combination of up to eleven types of RTD sensors Each channel is individually configurable through the Connected Components Workbench software When configured for RTD inputs the module can convert the RTD readings into temperature data Refer to Temperature Conversion Data to Degree Celsius C on page 321 for converting
142. 492 Cables Catalog No Voltage Drop at 30 C Voltage Drop at 60 C Series C Cables DC and Dt Output Channel V DC and DC Output om Wires Wires Com Wires Channel Wires 1492 CABLE005H 127 mv 34 mv 144 mv 38 mv 1492 CABLE010H 173 mv 45 mv 196 mv 51 mv 1492 CABLE025H 334 mv 83 mv 388 mv 95 mv 1492 CABLE050H 574 mv 147 mv 686 mv 169 mv 1 Voltage drop at maximum rated current of 2 amps per conductor 2 Voltage drop at maximum rated current of 0 5 amps per output channel Micro850 discrete expansion I O modules are input output modules that provide On Off detection and actuation Module Information The Connected Components Workbench programming software makes it easy to configure the modules as most module features can be enabled or disabled through the device configuration portion of the software You can also use the software to check any expansion I O module in the system to retrieve e hardware revision information e vendor ID e module information Channel Status Indicator Information The discrete expansion I O modules have yellow status indicators for each input output point which indicates the On Off state of the point Discrete Input Discrete input modules interface to sensing devices and detect whether they are On or Off These modules convert AC or DC On Off signals from user devices to appropriate logic level for use within the processor Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012
143. 5 O0V16 2085 0B16 Micro800 8 Point and 16 Point AC DC Relay Output Modules Installation Instructions 2085 IN004 Information on mounting and wiring the expansion I O modules 2085 OWS 2085 OW16 Micro800 8 Point Input and 8 Point Output AC Modules Installation Instructions 2085 INO05 Information on mounting and wiring the expansion I O modules 2085 IA8 2085 IM8 2085 0A8 Micro800 4 channel and 8 channel Analog Voltage current Input and Output Modules Installation Instructions 2085 IN006 Information on mounting and wiring the expansion I O modules 2085 IF4 2085 IF8 2085 0F4 Micro800 4 channel Thermocouple RTD Input Module 2085 INO07 Information on mounting and wiring the expansion O module 2085 IRT4 Micro800 RS232 485 Isolated Serial Port Plug in Module Wiring Diagrams 2080 WD002 nformation on mounting and wiring the Micro800 RS232 485 Isolated Serial Port Plug in Module Micro800 Non isolated Unipolar Analog Input Plug in Module Wiring Diagrams 2080 WD003 Information on mounting and wiring the Micro800 Non isolated Unipolar Analog Input Plug in Module Micro800 Non isolated Unipolar Analog Output Plug in Module Wiring Diagrams 2080 WD004 Information on mounting and wiring the Micro800 Non isolated Unipolar Analog Output Plug in Module Micro800 Non isolated RTD Plug in Module Wiring Diagrams 2080 WD005 Information on
144. 50 60 Hz Off state voltage min AV AC 50 60Hz Operating frequency nom 50 60 Hz Outputs Attribute 2080 LC30 48AWB 2080 L30 480WB 2080 LC30 480VB 2080 LC30 480BB Relay Output Hi Speed Output Standard Output Outputs 0 3 Outputs 4 and higher Number of outputs 20 4 16 Output voltage min 5V DC 5V AC 10 8V DC 10V DC Output voltage max 125V DC 265V AC 26 4V DC 26 4V DC Load current min 10 mA Load current max 2 0 A 100 mA high speed operation 1 0 A 30 C 1 0 A 30 C 0 3 A 65 C standard 0 3 A 65 C standard operation operation Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 215 AppendixA Specifications Outputs Attribute Surge current per point 2080 LC30 48AWB 2080 L30 480WB 2080 LC30 480VB 2080 LC30 480BB Hi Speed Output Outputs 0 3 Standard Output Outputs 4 and higher Current per common max Turn on time Turn off time max 1 Applies for general purpose operation only Does not apply for high speed operation 216 120V AC 15A 1800V A Refer to Relay Contacts Ratings on page 216 4 0 A every 1 s 30 C every 2s 65 oc 2 5 us 0 1 ms 1 ms Relay Contacts Ratings Maximum Volts Amperes Amperes Volt Amperes Makes larak Continuous ake 240V AC 7 5A 0 75 A 24V DC 1 0A 1 0A 28V A 125V DC 0 22 A Environmental Specifications Attribute Value Temperature operati
145. 68 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock 40 85 C 40 185 F Relative humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Damp Hea 5 95 non condensing Altitude operating 2000 m IMPORTANT Battery life does not include controller ON time For example if the Controller is ON for 16 hours every day for 365 days if the module starts being used after 1 year of manufacturing battery life is 8 5 years 1 year initial time 2 5 years of Off time out of 7 5 years 2080 TRIMPOTE Specifications Attribute Value Data range 0 255 No of trimpot 6 Temperature operating IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 20 65 C 4 149 F Temperature nonoperating IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock 40 85 C 40 185 F Relative humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat 5 95 non condensing Altitude operating Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 2000 m 235 Specifications Thermocouple and RTD Plug in Modules 2080 TC2 and 2080 RTD2 General and Environmental Specifications Attribute 2080 RTD2 20
146. 75 12 250V DC 100 F D250 Diode Bulletin 509 Motor Starter Size 0 5 12 120V AC 599 K04 MOV 240 264V AC 599 KA04 32 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Recommended Surge Suppressors Wire Your Controller Chapter 4 Device Coil Voltage Suppressor Catalog Number Type Bulletin 509 Motor Starter Size 6 12 120V AC 199 FSMA1 2 RC 12 120V AC 199 GSMA1 3 MOV Bulletin 700 R RM Relay AC coil Not Required 24 48V DC 199 FSMA9 MOV 50 120V DC 199 FSMA10 130 250V DC 199 FSMA11 Bulletin 700 Type N P PK or PH Relay 6 150V AC DC 700 N24 RC 24 48V AC DC 199 FSMA9 MOV 50 120V AC DC 199 FSMA10 130 250V AC DC 199 FSMA11 6 300V DC 199 FSMZ 1 Diode Miscellaneous electromagnetic devices 6 150V AC DC 700 N24 RC limted to 35 sealed VA 1 becomes 100 CRFSV55 and so on 2 3 4 For use on the interposing relay For use on the contactor or starter Grounding the Controller Wiring Diagrams Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 A RC Type not to be used with Triac outputs Varistor is not recommended for use on the relay outputs Catalog numbers for screwless terminals include the string CR after 100 For example Cat No 100 FSC48 becomes Cat No 100 CRFSC48 Cat No 100 FSV55 WARNING All devices connected to the RS 232 485 communication port must be referenced to
147. 80 TC2 Mounting torque 0 2 Nm 1 48 Ib in Terminal screw torque 0 22 0 25 Nm 1 95 2 21 Ib in using a 2 5 mm 0 10 in flat blade screwdriver Wire size 0 14 1 5 mm 26 16 AWG solid copper wire or 0 14 1 0 mm 26 17 AWG stranded copper wire rated 90 C 194 F insulation max Input impedance gt 5MQ gt 300 KQ Common mode rejection ratio 100 dB 50 60Hz Normal mode rejection ratio 70 dB 50 60 Hz Resolution 14 bit CJC error 1 2 C 25 C 77 F See CJC Channel Error on page 323 Accuracy 1 0 C for TC and RTD 25 C 77 F Channels 2 non isolated RTD types supported 100 Q Platinum 385 200 Q Platinum 385 500 Q Platinum 385 1000 Platinum 385 100 Q Platinum 392 200 Q Platinum 392 500 Q Platinum 392 1000 Q Platinum 392 10 Q Copper 427 120 Q Nickel 672 604 Q Nickel lron 518 Thermocouple types supported J K N T E R S B Open circuit detection time 8 1212 ms 8 1515 ms Power consumption 3 3 V 40 mA Temperature surrounding air 65 C 149 F max Temperature operating IEC60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 20 65 C 4 149 F Temperature nonoperating IEC60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Therma
148. 804EF Ss Linx Gateways Ethernet 12PtMS10_30001 DF1 feaJ601 MicroS10 2080 LC10 1 AB_VBP 1 1789 417 4 Virtual Chassis M 16 Micro830 2080 LC30 16QWB f 255 AppendixC Quickstarts 2 Start ControlFLASH and click Next ControlFLASH Untitled OD TAs BAR 5 9 00 015 Welcome to ControlFLASH the firmware update tool ControlFLASH needs the following information from you before it can begin updating a device BUKIT 1 The Catalog Number of the target device 2 The Network Configuration parameters optional 3 The Network Path to the target device 4 The Firmware Revision for this update 3 Select the catalog number of the Micro800 controller that you are updating and click Next Catalog Number Enter the catalog number of the target device 2080LC1 0 120WB Eti Me 2080 LCio12awa 2080 LC10 12DWD 2080 LC10 12088 2080 LC10 120 WB 3080 L030 1 00VB 2080 LC30 100WB 2080 LC30 164WB 2080 LC30 160VB 2080 LC 30 160 WB 2080 LC 30 2408 2080 LC30 240VB 2080 LC30 240WB 2080 LC30 48AW B 2080 LC30 48088 256 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Quickstarts Appendix C 4 Select the controller in the browse window and click OK ControlFLASH Untitled Select the 2080 LC10 12QWB device to update and click OK IV Autobrowse F Workstation ROCK WELL D804EF
149. 830 Local Variables UntitledLD1 System Variables Micto830 120 Micro83 HSC_1 MyCommand MyA amp ppData MyAppData PlsEnable MyAppData HsclD MyAppData HscMode MyAppData Accumulator MyAppD ata HPS etting MyAppData LPSetting MyAppDats 0FSetting MyAppDats UFSetting MyAppD ata OutputMask MyAppDats HPOutput MyAppData LPOutput MyInfo CountEnable Mylnfo ErrorDetected MylInfo CountUpFlag Mylnfo CountD wnFlag Mylnfo Mode1 Done Mylnfo OVF Mylnfo UNF MyInfo CountDir Mylnfo HPReached Mylnfo LPReached Mylnfo OFCauselnter Mylnfo UFCauselnter Mylnfo HPCauselnter MylInfo LPCauselnter MylInfo PlsPosition MylInfo ErrorCode Mylnfo Accumulator Mylnfo HP Mylnfo LP Mylnfo HPOutput Mylnfo LPOutput MyStatus For this example once the Accumulator reaches a High Preset value of 40 output 0 turns on and the HPReached flag turns on Once the Accumulator reaches a Low Preset value of 40 output 1 turns on and the LPReached flag turns on as well Use the Programmable Limit Switch PLS Function The Programmable Limit Switch function allows you to configure the High Speed Counter to operate as a PLS programmable limit switch or rotary cam switch The PLS is used when you need more than one pair of high and low presets up to 255 pairs of high and low presets are supported by the PLS Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 281 Appendix Quickstarts 1 Start a new project following the
150. A General Specifications 2080 LC50 48AWB 2080 LC50 480WB 2080 LC50 480VB 2080 LC50 480BB Attribute 2080 LC50 48AWB 2080 LC50 480WB 2080 LC50 480VB 2080 LC50 480BB Output circuit type Relay 24V DC sink standard and 24V DC source standard high speed and high speed Power consumption 33 W Power supply voltage range 20 4 26 4V DC Class 2 1 0 rating Input 120V AC 16 mA Output 2 A 240V AC Input 24V 8 8 mA Output 2 A 240V AC 2 A Input 24V 8 8 mA Output 24V DC 1 A per point surrounding air 2 A 24V DC 24V DC temperature 30 C 24V DC 0 3 A per point surrounding air temperature 65 C Insulation stripping length 7 mm 0 28 in Enclosure type rating Meets IP20 Pilot duty rating C300 R150 Isolation voltage 250V continuous Reinforced Insulation Type Output to Aux and Network Inputs to Outputs Type tested for 60 s 3250V DC Output to Aux and Network Inputs to Outputs 150V continuous Reinforced Insulation Type Input to Aux and Network Type tested for 60 s 1950V DC Input to Aux and Network 250V continuous Reinforced Insulation Type Output to Aux and Network Inputs to Outputs Type tested for 60 s 3250V DC Output to Aux and Network Inputs to Outputs 50V continuous Reinforced Insulation Type Input to Aux and Network Type tested for 60 s 720V DC Inputs to Aux and Network 50V continuous Reinforced Insulation Type 1 0
151. B Type inpu Z Type Reset Hold 9 External Reset and Hold Micro830 Micro850 24 point controller HSC Input Wiring Mapping Modes of Operation Input 0 HSCO Input 1 HSCO Input 2 HSCO Input 3 HSCO Mode Value in User Input 2 HSC1 Input 3 HSC1 Input 6 HSC2 Input 7 HSC2 Program Input 4 HSC2 Input 5 HSC2 Input 6 HSC3 Input 7 HSC3 Counter with Internal Direction Count Up Not Used 0 mode 1a Counter with Internal Count Up Not Used Reset Hold 1 Direction External Reset and Hold mode 1b Counter with External Count Up Down Direction Not Used 2 Direction mode 2a Counter with External Count Up Down Direction Reset Hold 3 Direction Reset and Hold mode 2b 238 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Micro830 Micro850 24 point controller HSC Input Wiring Mapping Specifications Appendix A Modes of Operation Input 0 HSCO Input 1 HSCO Input 2 HSCO Input 3 HSCO Mode Value in User Input 2 HSC1 Input 3 HSC1 Input 6 HSC2 Input 7 HSC2 Program Input 4 HSC2 Input 5 HSC2 Input 6 HSC3 Input 7 HSC3 Two Input Counter mode 3a Count Up Count Down Not Used 4 Two Input Counter with Count Up Count Down Reset Hold 5 External Reset and Hold mode 3b Quadrature Counter mode 4a A Type input B Type input Not Used 6 Quadrature Counter with A Type input B Type input Z Type Reset Hold 7
152. C 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 20 65 C 4 149 F Temperature surrounding air max 65 C 149 F Temperature non operating IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock 40 85 C 40 185 F Relative humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat 5 95 non condensing Vibration IEC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2 g 10 500 Hz Shock operating IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock 25g Shock non operating IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock DIN mount 25 g PANEL mount 35 g Emissions Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A 221 AppendixA Specifications Environmental Specifications Attribute Value ESD immunity IEC 61000 4 2 6 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges Radiated RF immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 80 2000 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 1890 MHz 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 2000 2700 MHz EFT B immunity IEC 61000 4 4 2 kV 5 kHz on power ports 2 kV 5 kHz on signal ports 1 kV 5 kHz on communication ports Surge transient immunity IEC
153. C source standard and high speed Power consumption 28 W Power supply voltage range 20 4 26 4V DC Class 2 1 0 rating Input 120V AC 16 mA Output 2 A 240V AC 2A 24V DC Input 24V 8 8 mA Output 2 A 240V AC 2A 24V DC Input 24V 8 8 mA Output 24V DC Class 2 1 A per point Surrounding air temperature 30 C 24V DC Class 2 0 3 A per point Surrounding air temperature 65 C Isolation voltage 250V continuous Reinforced Insulation Type Output to Aux and Network Inputs to Outputs Type tested for 60s 3250V DC Output to Aux and Network Inputs to Outputs 150V continuous Reinforced Insulation Type Input to Aux and Network Type tested for 60 s 1950V DC Input to Aux and Network 250V continuous Reinforced Insulation Type Output to Aux and Network Inputs to Outputs Type tested for 60 s 3250V DC Output to Aux and Network Inputs to Outputs 50V continuous Reinforced Insulation Type Input to Aux and Network Type tested for 60 s 720V DC Inputs to Aux and Network 50V continuous Reinforced Insulation Type 1 0 to Aux and Network Inputs to Outputs Type tested for 60 s 720 V DC 1 0 to Aux and Network Inputs to Outputs Pilot duty rating C300 R150 Insulation stripping length 7 mm 0 28 in Enclosure type rating Meets IP20 North American temp code T4 1 Use this Conductor Category information for planning cond
154. Chars 0x0D 0x0A or user specified value Ox0D 0x0A Term Chars Ox0D 0x0A or user specified value 0x0D 0x0A Configure Ethernet Settings 1 Open your Connected Components Workbench project for example Micro850 On the device configuration tree go to Controller properties Click Ethernet Controller General Memory Serial Port USB Port Ethernet Internet Protocol Port Settings Port Diagnostics Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 53 Chapter5 Communication Connections 2 Under Ethernet click Internet Protocol Configure Internet Protocol IP settings Specify whether to obtain the IP address automatically using DHCP or manually configure IP address subnet mask and gateway address Ethernet Internet Protocol Internet Protocol IP Settings Obtain IP address automatically using DHCP Configure IP address and settings Sas Detect duplicate IP address Save Settings To Controller TIP The Ethernet port defaults to the following out of the box settings e DHCP dynamic IP address e Address Duplicate Detection On 3 Click the checkbox Detect duplicate IP address to enable detection of duplicate address 4 Under Ethernet click Port Settings Ethernet Port Settings Port State Set Port State Enabled MAC Address of Port Disabled v Auto Negotiate speed and duplexity Connection Speed if Mbps Connection Duplexity Save Settings
155. Class 2 1 0 rating Input 120V AC 16 mA Output 2 A 240V AC general use Input 24V DC 8 8 mA Output 2 A 240V AC general use Input 24V DC 8 8 mA Output 24V DC 1 A per point Surrounding air temperature 30 C 24V DC 0 3 A per point Surrounding air temperature 65 C Isolation voltage Inputs to Outputs Inputs to Outputs 250V continuous Reinforced Insulation Type Outputs to Aux and Network 2080 LC30 16AWB Type tested for 60 s 3250V DC 1 0 to Aux and Network 2080 LC30 16QWB Type tested for 60 s 720V DC Inputs to Aux and Network 3250V DC Outputs to Aux and Network Inputs to Outputs 50V continuous Reinforced Insulation Type 1 0 to Aux and Network Inputs to Outputs Type tested for 60s 720 V DC 1 0 to Aux and Network Inputs to Outputs Pilot duty rating C300 R150 Insulation stripping length 7 mm 0 28 in Enclosure type rating Meets IP20 North American temp code T4 1 Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Inputs Attribute Number of Inputs 120V AC Input 2080 LC30 16AWB only 10 High Speed DC Input 2080 LC30 160VB and 2080 LC30 160WB only Inputs 0 3 4 Standard DC Input 2080 LC30 160VB and 2080 LC30 16QWB only Inputs 4 9 6 Input group to backplane isolation Verified by the following
156. Count Up Not Used 0 mode 1a Counter with Internal Count Up Not Used Reset Hold 1 Direction External Reset and Hold mode 1b Counter with External Count Up Down Direction Not Used 2 Direction mode 2a Counter with External Count Up Down Direction Reset Hold 3 Direction Reset and Hold mode 2b Two Input Counter mode 3a Count Up Count Down Not Used 4 Two Input Counter with Count Up Count Down Reset Hold 5 External Reset and Hold mode 3b Quadrature Counter mode 4a A Type input B Type input Not Used 6 Quadrature Counter with A Type input B Type input Z Type Reset Hold 1 External Reset and Hold mode 4b Quadrature X4 Counter A Type input B Type input Not Used 8 mode 5a Quadrature X4 Counter with A Type input B Type input Z Type Reset Hold 9 External Reset and Hold Micro830 Micro850 48 point Controller HSC Input Wiring Mapping Modes of Operation Input 0 HSCO Input 1 HSCO Input 2 HSCO Input 3 HSCO Mode Value in User Input 2 HSC1 Input 3 HSC1 Input 6 HSC2 Input 7 HSC2 Program Input 4 HSC2 Input 5 HSC2 Input 10 HSC4 Input 11 HSC4 Input 6 HSC3 Input 7 HSC3 Input 8 HSC4 Input 9 HSC4 Input 10 HSC5 Input 11 HSC5 Counter with Internal Direction Count Up Not Used 0 mode 1a Counter with Internal Count Up Not Used Reset Hold 1 Direction External Reset and Hold mode 1b Counter with External Count Up Down Directi
157. DI_06 BOOL Read _1O_EM_DI_O7 BOOL Read _10_EM_DI_08 BOOL Read _10_EM_DI_09 BOOL Read _IO_EM_DI_10 BOOL Read JO EM_DI_11 BOOL Read _IO_EM_DI_12 BOOL Read _1O_EM_DI_13 BOOL Read JO_P1_Al_00 UINT Read JO_Pi_AI_01 UINT Read _IO_P1_AI_02 UINT Read _IO_P1_AI_03 UINT Read JO_P1_AI_04 UINT Read _10_P2_AI_00 UINT Read JO P2_AI 01 UINT Read JO P2_AI_02 UINT Read JO P2_AI 03 UINT Read 10_P2_AI_04 UINT Read The variable name string stands for the following 10_Px_Al_00 1 0 module Plug in Slot x Analog Input Word 00 For more information on bit word descriptions go to Connected Components Workbench Global Variables Data Maps on page 320 All cabling used for 2080 T C2 and 2080 RTD2 modules have to be shielded twisted cores with the shield wire shorted to chassis ground at controller end It is advisable to use 22 AWG wires to connect the sensors to the module Use sensors dipped in oil filled thermowells for stable and uniform readings Recommended cable type Alpha wire P N 5471C Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Appendix H IPID Function Block This function block diagram shows the arguments in the IPIDCONTROLLER function block IPIDCONTROLLER EN ENO Process Output SetPoint AbsoluteError FeedBack ATWarning Auto OutGains Initialize Gai
158. EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions KC Korean Registration of Broadcasting and Communications Equipment compliant with Article 58 2 of Radio Waves Act Clause 3 1 See the Product Certification link at http www rockwellautomation com products certification for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 229 Appendix A 230 General Specifications 2080 OW4lI Digital Relay Output Plug in Module Attribute Value Mounting torque 0 2 Nm 1 48 Ib in Status 4 yellow indicators Terminal base 0 19 Nm 1 7 Ib in screw torque using a 2 5 mm 0 10 in flat blade screwdriver max Wire size 0 05 1 31 mm2 30 16 AWG solid copper wire rated 90 C 194 F insulation max Enclosure type rating None open style Isolation voltage 240V continuous Reinforce Insulation Type between Output Channels and Output channels to Backplane Type tested for 60 s 1480 V AC Outputs to Outputs Outputs to Backplane Insulation stripping length 5mm Wiring category 2 on signal ports 2 on power ports Wire type Copper North American T4 temp code Inrush current lt 120 mA 3 3V
159. Function has the following related configuration parameters EII Program POU This is the name of the Program Organizational Unit POU which is executed immediately when this EII Interrupt occurs You can choose any pre programmed POU from the drop down list EIl Auto Start EII0 AS Sub Element Description Data Format User Program Access AS Auto Start binary bit read only AS Auto Start is a control bit that can be used in the control program The auto start bit is configured with the programming device and stored as part of the user program The auto start bit automatically sets the Event User Interrupt Enable bit when the controller enters any executing mode Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 User Interrupts Appendix D EIl Input Select EI 0 1S Sub Element Description Data Format User Program Access IS Input Select word INT read only The IS Input Select parameter is used to configure each EII to a specific input on the controller Valid inputs are 0 N where N is either 15 or the maximum input ID whichever is smaller This parameter is configured with the programming device and cannot be changed from the control program Ell Function Status Information EII Function status bits can be monitored either in the User Program or in Connected Components Workbench in Debug mode EIl User Interrupt Executing EII0 EX Sub Elem
160. I i Hh i ey i 2085 ECR serves as an end cap and terminates the end of the serial communication bus The end cap is connected to the last 1 0 module in the system Field Wiring Connections In solid state control systems grounding and wire routing helps limit the effects of noise due to electromagnetic interference EMI ATTENTION Do not wire more than 2 conductors on any single terminal Input 0 utp ut Wiring Basic wiring of devices to the expansion I O modules are shown below Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 61 Chapter6 Expansion 1 0 Support 2085 1A8 or 2085 IM8 L1 1 00 p 7 4 A I 01 2 er COM d 1 02 m oF 1 03 rT 120V AC 2085 IA8 com 240V AC 2085 IM8 1 04 24 1 05 f 4 t com 1 06 7 4 1 07 t COM y L2 45313 2085 1016 DC sinking DC sourcing A 1 00 1 08 r 1 01 r 1 09 7 COMO COM 1 02 274 l 10 2 4 1 03 4 I 11 re COMO COM1 RAV DE 1 04 2 74 I 12 r 1 05 re l 13 744 C0M0 COM1 1 06 2 4 I 14 p24 1 07 4 1 15 COMO _ COM1 y Terminal Block 1 Terminal Block 2 ciouna 15299 62 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012
161. Interrupt Event 4 2048 bit 11 HSC High Speed Counter HSC5 1024 bit 10 HSC High Speed Counter HSC4 512 bit 9 HSC High Speed Counter HSC3 256 bit 8 HSC High Speed Counter HSC2 128 bit 7 HSC High Speed Counter HSC1 64 bit 6 HSC High Speed Counter HSCO 32 bit 5 Ell Event Input Interrupt Event 3 16 bit 4 Ell Event Input Interrupt Event 2 8 bit 3 Ell Event Input Interrupt Event 1 4 bit 2 Ell Event Input Interrupt Event 0 2 bit 1 UFR User Fault Routine Interrupt UFR 1 bit 0 reserved To disable interrupt s 1 Select which interrupts you want to disable 2 Find the Decimal Value for the interrupt s you selected 292 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 User Interrupts Appendix D 3 Add the Decimal Values if you selected more than one type of interrupt 4 Enter the sum into the UID instruction For example to disable EII Event 1 and EI Event 3 EN Event 1 4 EI Event 3 4 16 20 enter this value UIE User Interrupt Enable UIE 16 Enable UIE name or Pin ID IROType or ENO Pin ID 45640 The UIE instruction is used to enable selected user interrupts The table below shows the types of interrupts with their corresponding enable bits Types of Interrupts Enabled by the UIE Instruction Interrupt Type Element Decimal Corresponding Value Bit Plug In Modul
162. Interrupt3 High Speed Counter Interrupt0 High Speed Counter Interrupt1 High Speed Counter Interrupt2 High Speed Counter Interrupt3 High Speed Counter Interrupt4 High Speed Counter InterruptS Event Interrupt4 Event Interrupt Event Interrupt6 Event Interrupt7 Selectable Timed InterruptO Selectable Timed Interrupt1 Selectable Timed Interrupt2 Selectable Timed Interrupt3 Plug In Module Interrupt0 1 2 3 4 lowest priority 288 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 User Interrupts Appendix D User Interrupt Configuration User interrupts can be configured and set as AutoStart from the Interrupts window General us Memory To add an interrupt right click an empty row and then click Add To delete an interrupt right click an existing Communication Ports tow and then click Delete Serial Port USB Port Date and Time Interrupts Startup Faults Modbus Mapping Embedded 1 0 Plug In Modules lt Empty gt lt Empty gt Configure User Fault Routine The user fault routine gives you the option of doing the cleanup before a controller shutdown when a specific user fault occurs The fault routine is executed when any user fault occurs The fault routine is not executed for non user faults The controller goes to Fault mode after a User Fault Routine is executed and the User Program execution stops
163. LC30 240BB Relay Output Hi Speed Output Standard Output Outputs 0 1 Outputs 2 and higher Number of outputs 10 2 8 Output voltage min 5V DC 5V AC 10 8V DC 10V DC Output voltage max 125V DC 265V AC 26 4V DC 26 4V DC Load current min 10 mA Load current max 2 0 A 100 mA high speed operation 30 C 1 0 A 30 C 0 3 A 65 C standard operation O0A 0 3 A 65 C standard operation Surge current per point Refer to Relay Contacts Ratings on page 212 4 0 A every 1 s 30 C every 2 s 65 o Current per common max 5A Turn on time 10 ms 2 5 us 0 1 ms Turn off time max 1 ms 1 Applies for general purpose operation only Does not apply for high speed operation Relay Contacts Ratings Maximum Volts Amperes Amperes Volt Amperes 212 120V AC Make 15A Continuous 1800V A 240V AC 7 5A 0 75 A 24V DC 1 0 A 1 0 A 28V A 125V DC 0 22 A Environmental Specifications Attribute Temperature operating Value 20 65 C 4 149 F IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock Temperature surrounding 65 C 149 F air max Temperature non operating IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Unpa 40 85 C 40 185 F ckaged Nonoperating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Non
164. M6 Ga GAH 0 04 M CR 0 12 CR pe ean 0 05 CR 0 13 cR CM3 CM7 0 06 0 14 4 ax a 0 07 L2 or DC or DC 45311 Terminal Block 1 Terminal Block 2 2085 1F4 c o A vi 0 I Sansone como Y Shielded cable Cl 1 Vi A IEA coM1 i Shielded cable c 2 A vi 2 Il sansa ee comz Y Shielded cable cl 3 v 3 A Voltage ya transmitter com3 4 Shielded cable 45320 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 65 Chapter 6 66 Expansion 1 0 Support 2085 IF8 yy Cl 0 al Current vi o eae como H Shielded cable Cl 1 __ VI 1 ij Voltage transmitter COM1 I Shielded cable yr Cl 2 in Current VI 2 transmitter g COM2 Shielded cable CI 3 oh z f a VI 3 Voltage transmitter coma ____ Shielded cable Terminal Block 1 2085 OF4 Terminal Block 2 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 coo f SO J vo 0 toad como m i Shielded cable c0 1 vo 1 A a a comi Y Shielded cable CO 2 vo 2 A gm
165. MACRO Major Fault description Value OxF100 EP_MC_CONFIG_GEN_ERR There is general configuration error detected in the motion configuration downloaded from Connected Components Workbench such as Num of Axis or Motion execution interval being configured out of range When this major fault is reported there could be no axis in ErrorStop state OxF110 EP_MC_RESOURCE_MISSING Motion configuration has mismatch issues with motion resource downloaded to the controller There are some motion resources missing When this major fault is reported there could be no axis in ErrorStop state OxF12x EP_MC_CONFIG_AXS_ERR Motion configuration for axis cannot be supported by this catalog or the configuration has some resource conflict with some other motion axis which has been configured earlier The possible reason could be maximum velocity max acceleration is configured out of supported range x the logic Axis ID 0 3 OxF15x EP_MC_ENGINE_ERR There is a motion engine logic error firmware logic issue or memory crash for one axis detected during motion engine cyclic operation One possible reason can be motion engine data memory crash This is motion engine operation error and should not happen in normal condition x the logic Axis ID 0 3 A maximum of three motion axes can be configured through the Connected Components Workbench software To add configure update delete and monitor an axis in
166. NT read write This parameter is the initial HSC Accumulator value that need to be set when starting the HSC This parameter is updated by the HSC sub system automatically when the HSC is in Counting mode reflecting the actual HSC accumulator value High Preset HSCAPP HPSetting Description Data Format User Program Access HSCAPP HPSetting long word 32 bit INT read write The HSCAPP HPSetting is the upper setpoint in counts that defines when the HSC sub system generates an interrupt The data loaded into the high preset must be less than or equal to the data resident in the overflow HSCAPP OFSetting parameter or an HSC error is generated 178 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Use the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Chapter 10 Low Preset HSCAPP LPSetting Description Data Format User Program Access HSCAPPLPSetting long word 32 bit INT read write The HSCAPP LPSetting is the lower setpoint in counts that defines when the HSC sub system generates an interrupt The data loaded into the low preset must be greater than or equal to the data resident in the underflow HSCAPP UFSetting parameter or an HSC error is generated If the underflow and low preset values are negative numbers the low preset must be a number with a smaller absolute value Overflow Setting HSCAPP OFSetting Description Data Format Type User Program Access HSCAPP OF Setting long word 32
167. Off to On On to Off IEC type compliance Type 3 Output Specifications 2085 0A8 Attribute 2085 0A8 Number of Inputs 8 Voltage category 120V 230V AC Operating voltage range 120 240V AC Output voltage min 85V AC Output voltage max 240V AC Off state current max 2 5mA On state current min 10 mA per output On state current max 0 5 A per output On state current per module max 4A Off state voltage drop max 1 5V AC 0 5 A 2 5V AC 10 mA Fusing Not protected A suitable rating fuse is recommended to protect outputs Output signal delay Off to On 9 3 ms for 60 Hz 11 ms for 50 Hz On to Off 9 3 ms for 60 Hz 11 ms for 50 Hz Surge current max 5A 2085 OW8 and 2085 OW16 Relay Output Module Attribute 2085 OW8 2085 OW16 Number of outputs 8 relay 16 relay Dimensions HxWxD 28 x 90 x 87 mm 44 5 x 90 x 87 mm 1 10 x 3 54 x 3 42 in 1 75 x 3 54 x 3 42 in Shipping weight 140 g 4 93 oz 220 g 7 76 oz approx Wire size 0 25 2 5 mm 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated 75 C 167 F or greater 1 2 mm 3 64 in insulation max Insulation strip length 10 mm 0 39 in Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 243 Appendix A 244 2085 OW8 and 2085 OW16 Relay Output Module Attribute 2085 OW8 2085 OW16 Wiring category 2 on signal ports Wire type Copper
168. P ODVA conformance tested to EtherNet IP specifications KC Korean Registration of Broadcasting and Communications Equipment compliant with Article 58 2 of Radio Waves Act Clause 3 1 See the Product Certification link at http www rockwellautomation com products certification for Declaration of Conformity Certificates and other certification details For the Micro850 relay chart see Micro830 and Micro850 Relay Charts on page 218 Micro800 Programmable Controller External AC Power Supply General Specifications Attribute Value Dimensions HxWxD 90 x 45 x 80 mm 3 55 x 1 78 x 3 15 in Shipping weight 0 34 kg 0 75 b Supply voltage rangel 100V 120V AC 1 A 200 240V AC 0 5 A Supply frequency 47 63 Hz Supply power 24V DC 1 6 A Inrush current max 24A 132V for 10 ms 40A 263V for 10 ms Power consumption Output power 38 4W 100V AC 38 4W 240V AC Power dissipation Input power 45 1W 100V AC 44 0W 240V AC Isolation voltage 250V continuous Primary to Secondary Reinforced Insulation Type Type tested for 60s 2300V AC primary to secondary and 1480V AC primary to earth ground Output ratings max 24V DC 1 6A 38 4W 226 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Specifications Appendix A General Specifications Attribute Value Enclosure type rating Meets IP20 Wire size 0 32 2 1
169. Point Moving Average e 4 Point Moving Average e 8 Point Moving Average Noise Rejection The input modules use a digital filter that provides noise rejection for the input signals The moving average filter reduces the high frequencies and random white noise while keeping an optimal step response See specifications for Analog Expansion I O on page 244 for minimum and maximum response times Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Expansion I O Support Chapter 6 Normal Mode Rejection is better than 40 dB while Common Mode Rejection is better than 60 dB 50 60 Hz with the 50 60 Hz rejection filters selected The modules perform well in the presence of common mode noise as long as the signals applied to the user plus and minus input terminals do not exceed the common mode voltage rating 10 V of the modules Improper earth ground may be a source of common mode noise Process Level Alarms Process level alarms alert you when the module has exceeded configured high and low limits for each channel for input modules it provides additional high high and low low alarms When the channel input or output goes below a low alarm or above a high alarm a bit is set in the status words All Alarm Status bits can be read individually or read through the Channel Status Byte For the output module 2085 OF4 it is possible to latch the alarm status bit when the latch configuration is enabled You can configure eac
170. Probe 123 MC_WriteBoolParameter 123 MC_WriteParameter 123 Memory Backup and High Accuracy RTC Plug In Module 107 Micro800 plug in features 103 Micro830 controllers inputs outputs types 6 Micro850 controllers inputs outputs types 6 Modbus mapping 251 Modbus RTU 43 44 47 configuration 50 Modbus TCP Server 43 44 module spacing 22 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 340 Index motion control 117 118 administrative function blocks 123 function blocks 118 123 general rules 125 wiring input output 120 motor starters bulletin 509 surge suppressors 32 mounting dimensions 21 network status 310 noise rejection 74 92 normal operation 310 North American Hazardous Location Approval 13 0 open circuit response 92 downscale 92 hold last state 92 upscale 78 92 output active general rules 128 output exclusivity 126 output status 310 overrange 322 323 overrange alarm trigger 88 P panel mounting 24 dimensions 24 percent range 77 PID code sample 339 PLS data structure 194 PLS example 195 PLS operation 194 plug ins modules 101 wiring 39 position distance input 125 power considerations input states on power down 16 isolation transformers 15 loss of power source 15 other line conditions 16 overview 14 power supply inrush 15 power distribution 14 power source loss of 15 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 power status 309 power supply
171. Quadrature X4 counter phased inputs A and B with external reset and hold Modes 1 3 5 7 and 9 will only work when an ID of 0 2 or 4 is set due to the fact that these modes use reset and hold Modes 0 2 4 6 and 8 will work on any ID Modes 6 9 will only work when an encoder is connected to the controller Use the HSC ID chart as a reference to wire the encoder to the controller MyAppData HPSetting MyAppData LPSetting MyA ppData OF Setting and MyAppData UF Setting are all user defined variables which represent the counting range of the HSC The diagram below gives an example of a range of values that can be set for these variables Variable HscAppData OFSetting Overflow z 4 2 147 483 647 maximum HscAppData HPSetting High Preset y HscAppData LPSetting Low Preset v ik HscAppData UFSetting Underflow 0 gt 2 147 483 648 minimum MyAppData OutputMask along with MyAppData HP Output and MyAppData LP Output allows the user to specify which embedded Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 277 Appendix C 278 Quickstarts outputs can be turned on when a High Preset or Low Preset is reached These variables use a combination of decimals and binary numbers to specify the embedded outputs that are able to turn on off Thus in our example we first set the Output Mask to a decimal value of 3 which when converted to binary is equal to 0011 This means that
172. S Enable I STIS name or Pin ID IROType or ENO Pin ID SetPoint 45638 STIO is used in this document to define how STIS works 290 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 STIS Parameters User Interrupts Appendix D Parameter Parameter Data Parameter Description Type Type Enable Input BOOL Enable Function When Enable TRUE function is performed When Enable FALSE function is not performed IROType Input UDINT Use the STI defined DWORD IRO_STIO IRO_STI1 IRO_STI2 IRO_STI3 SetPoint Input UINT The user timer interrupt interval time value in milliseconds When SetPoint 0 STI is disabled When SetPoint 1 65535 STI is enabled STIS or ENO Output BOOL Rung Status same as Enable The STIS instruction can be used to start and stop the STI function or to change the time interval between STI user interrupts The STI instruction has two operands e IRQType This is the STI ID that a user wants to drive e SetPoint This is the amount of time in milliseconds which must expire prior to executing the selectable timed user interrupt A value of zero disables the STI function The time range is from 0 65 535 milliseconds The STIS instruction applies the specified set point to the STI function as follows STIO is used here as an example e Ifa zero set point is specified the STI is disabled and ST10 Enable is cleared 0 e If the STI is
173. SCO ML Description Data Format HSC Modes User Program Access ML Low Preset Mask bit 2239 read only 1 For Mode descriptions see Count Down HSCSTS CountDownFlag on page 183 The ML Low Preset Mask control bit is used to enable allow or disable not allow a low preset interrupt from occurring If this bit is clear 0 and a Low Preset Reached condition is detected by the HSC the HSC user interrupt is not executed This bit is controlled by the user program and retains its value through a power cycle It is up to the user program to set and clear this bit User Interrupt Enable HSC0 Enabled The Enabled bit is used to indicate HSC interrupt enable or disable status User Interrupt Executing HSC0 EX Description Data HSC User Program Format Modes Access HSCO0 Enabled bit 0 9 read only 1 For Mode descriptions see Count Down HSCSTS CountDownFlag on page 183 Description Data HSC Modes User Program Format Access HSCO0 EX bit O 9 read only 1 For Mode descriptions see Count Down HSCSTS CountDownFlag on page 183 The EX User Interrupt Executing bit is set 1 whenever the HSC sub system begins processing the HSC subroutine due to any of the following conditions Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 197 Chapter 10 Use HSC 198 Use the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch e Low
174. STI Program POU This is the name of the Program Organizational Unit POU which is executed immediately when this STI Interrupt occurs You can choose any pre programmed POU from the drop down list STI Auto Start STIO AS Sub Element Description Data Format User Program Access AS Auto Start binary bit read only The AS Auto Start is a control bit that can be used in the control program The auto start bit is configured with the programming device and stored as part of the user program The auto start bit automatically sets the STI Timed Interrupt Enable STIO Enabled bit when the controller enters any executing mode STI Set Point Milliseconds Between Interrupts STIO SP Sub Element Data Format Range User Program Description Access SP Set Point Msec word INT 0 65 535 read write When the controller transitions to an executing mode the SP set point in milliseconds value is loaded into the STI If the STI is configured correctly and enabled the POU in the STI configuration is executed at this interval This value can be changed from the control program by using the STIS instruction TIP The minimum value cannot be less than the time required to scan the STI POUplus the Interrupt Latency STI Function Status Information STI Function status bits can be monitored either in the User Program or in Connected Components Workbench in Debug mode Rockwell Automation P
175. Suppressors Because of the potentially high current surges that occur when switching 30 inductive load devices such as motor starters and solenoids the use of some type of surge suppression to protect and extend the operating life of the controllers output contacts is required Switching inductive loads without surge suppression can significantly reduce the life expectancy of relay contacts By adding a suppression device directly across the coil of an inductive device you prolong the life of the output or relay contacts You also reduce the effects of voltage transients and electrical noise from radiating into adjacent systems Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Wire Your Controller Chapter 4 The following diagram shows an output with a suppression device We recommend that you locate the suppression device as close as possible to the load device DC or L1 Suppression device ee ACorD 0 C2 oO DC COM or L2 If the outputs are DC we recommend that you use an 1N4004 diode for surge suppression as shown below For inductive DC load devices a diode is suitable A 1N4004 diode is acceptable for most applications A surge suppressor can also be used See Recommended Surge Suppressors on page 32 As shown below these surge suppression circuits connect directly across the load device 24V DC Relay or solid state DC outputs A IN4004 diode A surge suppressor can also be us
176. Surrounding air temperature 65 C Isolation voltage 250V continuous Reinforced Insulation Type Outputs to Aux and Network Inputs to Outputs Type tested for 60 s 720 V DC Inputs to Aux and Network 3250 V DC Outputs to Aux and Network Inputs to Outputs 50V continuous Reinforced Insulation Type 1 0 to Aux and Network Inputs to Outputs Type tested for 60 s 720 V DC 1 0 to Aux and Network Inputs to Outputs Pilot duty rating C300 R150 Insulation stripping length 7 mm 0 28 in Enclosure type rating Meets IP20 North American temp code T4 1 Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 203 AppendixA Specifications Inputs Attribute Number of Inputs High Speed DC Input Inputs 0 3 Standard DC Input inputs 4 and higher Input group to backplane isolation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1 414V DC for 2 s 75V DC working voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Voltage category 24V DC sink source Off state voltage max 5V DC On state voltage nom 24V DC On state voltage range 16 8 26 4V DC 65 C 149 F 10 26 4V DC 65 C 149 F 16 8 30 0V DC 30 C 86 F 10 30 0V DC 30 C 86 F Off state current
177. To Controller 5 Set Port State as Enabled or Disabled 6 To manually set connection speed and duplexity uncheck the option box Auto Negotiate speed and duplexity Then set Speed 10 or 100 Mbps and Duplexity Half or Full values 7 Click Save Settings to Controller if you would like to save the settings to your controller 8 On the device configuration tree under Ethernet click Port Diagnostics to monitor Interface and Media counters The counters are available and updated when the controller is in Debug mode 54 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Micro850 Expansion 1 0 Chapter 6 Expansion 0 Support Micro850 controllers support a range of discrete and analog expansion I O modules You can attach up to four expansion I O modules in any combination to a Micro850 controller as long as the total number of embedded plug in and expansion discrete I O points is less than or equal to 132 This chapter includes a description of features installation and wiring requirements configuration data structure and procedure for Micro850 expansion I O modules Topic Page Micro850 Expansion 1 0 Modules 55 Hardware Features 56 Installation 58 Input Output Wiring 61 Discrete Expansion I O Features 70 Analog Expansion I O Features 71 Configure Your Expansion I O Module 79 1 0 Data Mapping 94 Calibration of Analog Modules 100 Specifications 100 The following expa
178. User Manual Allen Bradley Micro830 and Micro850 Programmable Controllers Catalog Numbers Bulletin 2080 LC30 and 2080 LC50 Allen Bradley Rockwell Software Automation Important User Information Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls publication SGI 1 1 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http www rockwellautomation com literature describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment o
179. Value On state voltage nom 12 24V AC 50 60 Hz Off state voltage min 4V AC 50 60Hz Operating frequency nom 50 60 Hz Relay Output 2080 LC30 16AWB 2080 LC30 160WB only Hi Speed Output 2080 LC30 160VB only Outputs 0 1 Standard Output 2080 LC30 160VB only Outputs 2 5 Number of outputs 6 2 4 Output voltage min 5V DC 5V AC 10 8V DC 10V DC Output voltage max 125V DC 265V AC 26 4V DC 26 4V DC Load current min 10 mA 10 mA 10 mA Load current max 2 0 A 100 mA high speed operation 1 0 A 30 C 1 0 A 30 C 0 3 A 65 C standard operation 0 3 A 65 C standard operation Surge current per point Refer to Relay Contacts Ratings on page 209 4 0 A every 1 s 30 C every 2 s 65 oc Current per common 5A max Turn on time 10 ms 2 5 us 0 1 ms Turn off time max 1 ms 1 Applies for general purpose operation only Does not apply for high speed operation 208 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Relay Contacts Ratings Maximum Volts 120V AC 15A Amperes Make Specifications Appendix A Amperes Continuous Volt Amperes 1800V A 240V AC 7 5A 0 75 A 24V DC 1 0A 1 0A 28V A 125V DC 0 22 A Environmental Specifications Attribute Temperature operating Value IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2
180. Wizard Welcome to Rockwell Automation s EDS Wizard The EDS Wizard allows you to ecister E ased e nregister a device ange the graphic images a ciated with a eate an EDS file from an unknown device upload EDS file s stored in a device To continue click Next Cancel Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 263 AppendixC _Quickstarts 9 Follow the prompts to upload and install the EDS file Rockwell Automation s EDS Wizard Upload EDS File This will upload EDS file s from a device File location C WINDOWS TEMP RS _EMBEDDED_EDS This device s EDS file Size 2 718 KB 2718 bytes Embedded filename EDS txt File revision 11 Related EDS files Cancel Rockwell Automation s EDS Wizard EDS File Installation Test Results This test evaluates each EDS file for errors in the EDS file This test does not guarantee EDS file validity Installation Test Results C WINDOWSS TEMPSASI_EMBEDDED_EDS EDS eds View file Cancel 264 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Quickstarts Appendix C Rockwell Automation s EDS Wizard Change Graphic Image You can change the graphic image that is associated with a device Product Types Change icon ei Rockwell Automation s EDS Wizard Final Task Summary This is a review of the task you want to complete You would like to register the following dev
181. a non positive value an error will be reported Error ID MC_FB_ERR_RANGE e The Jerk input should have a non negative value If Jerk is set to be a negative value error will be reported Error ID MC_FB_ERR_RANGE e f maximum Jerk is configured as zero in Connected Components Workbench motion configuration all jerk parameters for the motion function block has to be configured as zero Otherwise the function block reports an error Error ID MC_FB_ERR_RANGE e f Jerk is set as non zero value S Curve profile is generated If Jerk is set as zero trapezoidal profile is generated e fthe motion engine fails to generate the motion profile prescribed by the dynamic input parameters the function block reports an error Error ID MC_FB_ERR_PROFILE See Function Block and Axis Status Error Codes on page 142 for more information about error codes Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 125 Chapter9 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO General Rules for the Motion Function Block Parameter Output Exclusivity General Rules With Execute The outputs Busy Done Error and CommandAborted indicate the state of the function block and are mutually exclusive only one of them can be true on one function block If execute is true one of these outputs has to be true The outputs Done Busy Error ErrorID and CommandAborted are reset with the falling edge of Execute However the
182. able Monitoring Global Variables Micro850 Local Variables N A System Variables Micro850 1 0 ot oft bet _MOTION_DIAG I Axis Be AxisO ErrorFlag N A Axis0 AxisHomed N A Axis0 ConstVel N A AxisO_AccelFlag N A AxisO DecelFlag N A AxisO AxisState 1 N A AxisO ErronlD 0 N A AxisO ExtraData 0 N A NA AxisO CommandPos 2345 68 N A Axis0 T argetVel 80 0 N A AxisO Commandvel 0 0 N A Axisl m axisO_power WAIT N A axis1_power WAIT N A Axis Monitor Example The Axis Monitor displays seven significant digits with rounding i Running Connected Components Workbench File Edit View Build Debug Tools Wie ole Pe MEEN TE RA ne i V A 1 Communications Window Help Micro850 Axis Monitor Micro850 Motion POU El gt 3 nExesStopi LA ETA HSC_rec a Local Variables Error Description a EA Motion Local Variables Global variables Position and Velocity DataTypes Command Position 946 363 mm Command Velocity 80 0 mm sec User Defined Function Blocks Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Axis State Axis Homed Movement Axis Name AxisO v Constant Velocity Target Position 2345 678 mm Target Velocity 155 Chapter 9 156 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO Workbench on page 145 to learn more about the different
183. ach channel 85 Chapter6 Expansion 1 0 Support 2085 1016 and 2085 1032T 2085 1932T Configuration Input Off to On On to Off Oto aT 8Oms m 8t015 20ms B0ms w 16t023 20ms M 8 0ms 24 to 31 20ms w 80m For the 16 and 32 channel DC input modules 2085 IQ16 and 2085 IQ32T respectively you can configure OFF to ON and ON to OFF ranges Configuration What to do Property Input OFF to ON Choose from the following values 8 0 ms 4 0 ms 2 0 ms default 1 0 ms 0 5 ms 0 1 ms 0 0 ms ON to OFF Choose from the following values 8 0 ms default 4 0 ms 2 0 ms 1 0 ms 0 5 ms 0 1 ms 0 0 ms 2085 0V16 2085 0B16 2085 OW16 2085 0A8 2085 OW8 The output modules 2085 OV16 2085 OB16 2085 OW 16 2085 OA8 2085 OW8 only have device details available to the user in Connected Components Workbench There are no user configuration pages for these modules in the Connected Components Workbench software 2085 0816 General Vendor ID Allen Bradley Description 16 channel DC source output module Product Type Discrete I O Revision 3 001 Series 4 86 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Expansion I O Support Chapter 6 2085 OF4 2085 OF4 Channel 0 C Enable Channel High Clamp Low Clamp High Clamp Yalue Maximum Output Yalue Low Clamp Value Minimum Output Yalue Latch Over and Under Alarm Restore Defaults For the analog outpu
184. age Terminal gt 220K Q Current Terminal 250 Q Overall accuracy Voltage Terminal 1 full scale 25 C Current Terminal 1 full scale 25 C Non linearity in percent full 0 1 scale Repeatability 0 1 Module error over temperature range ull 20 65 C 4 149 F Voltage 1 5 Current 2 0 Input channel configuration Through configuration software screen or the user program Field input calibration ot required Scan time 180 ms Input group to bus isolation o isolation Channel to channel isloation Non isolation Temperature operating EC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold EC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat EC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 20 65 C 4 149 F Temperature non operating EC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold EC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat EC 60068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock 40 85 C 40 185 F Relative humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat 5 95 non condensing Operating altitude 2000 m Cable length max 10m 1 Includes offset gain non linearity and repeatability error terms 2 Repeatability is the ability of the input module to register the same reading in successive measurements for the same input signal 2080 O0F2 Output Specifications Attribute Number of outputs
185. aged Nonoperating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock 40 85 C 40 185 F Temperature surrounding air max 65 C 149 F Relative humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat 5 95 noncondensing Vibration IEC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500 Hz Shock operating IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock 25g Shock nonoperating IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock 25 g for DIN Rail Mounting 35 g for Panel Mounting Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 247 AppendixA Specifications Environment Specifications for Micro850 Expansion 1 0 Modules Attribute Value Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD Immunity IEC 61000 4 2 6 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges Radiated RF Immunity EC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 80 2000 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 1890 MHz 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 2000 2700 MHz EFT B Immunity IEC 61000 4 4 2 kV 5 kHz on signal ports Surge Transient Immunity IEC 61000 4 5 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on power ports 2 kV line earth CM on shielded ports Conducted RF Immunity IEC 61000 4 6 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz Certifications All Micro800 Expans
186. agrams Eto od ital tole haha chat haa Mine EEES 33 Conttoller I O Witting erences ciprini pone eai aE eee 36 Minimize Electrical Noise 65 0ss 06 sc0secncaeaeccescssaves 37 Analog Channel Wiring Guidelines 0 000 c cee eae 37 Minimize Electrical Noise on Analog Channels 37 Grounding Your Analog Cable 0 cece eee eee eee ee 38 Wiring Examples meyen eweotannwewetinks cok E ENE EE 38 Plug In Module Wiring s sunsnsrrersrrrrerrreresrerererrre 39 PAED PAA E E EEE IO E ets So 40 2080 IF4 Terminal Block Wiring 0 cece cece eee ees 41 Embedded Serial Port Wiring ss sciicii tos ete e eee ee ener deci edits 4l Chapter 5 ONE cdtcawiacer Rag wasted a a tre ieotalnate ne Matias bseme ranma 43 Supported Communication Protocols ccc eee ee eee eee ee 43 Modbus RTU 4 poten ee aa teed mols aN AAN 44 Modbus TCP Setveticiay sine nissan ce Nee co ae ide teases 44 CIP Symbolic Serveto rererere EEE EEEE ASS 44 ASC sees Beate UL Al ated ol a a a aa i oe 45 CIP Communications Pass thru s os 54 9 Gian eee es 46 Examples of Supported Architectures 0 02 ceeeeee eee es 46 Use Modems with Micro800 Controllers 0 0 00 cece eee ees 46 Making a DF1 Point to Point Connection 0 008 46 Construct Your Own Modem Cable 00c cee ee eens 47 Configure Serial Port ccniisdeanch dea teg EEEE O EE E ees pene 47 Configure CIP Serial Diiversuisivcnews we
187. al issues mechanical issues Check the connection between the drive and the Check the connection between the drive and the controller Drive Ready and In Position signals controller Drive Ready and In Position signals and ensure the drive is operating normally and ensure the drive is operating normally Reset the state of the axis using the MC_Reset function block 06 MC_FB_ERR_NOPOWER The function block cannot execute because the The axis is not powered on axis is not powered on Power on the axis using MC_Power function block Power on the axis using MC_Power function block Reset the state of the axis using the MC_Reset function block 07 MC_FB_ERR_RESOURCE The function block cannot execute because the The axis is not operational due to the resource resource required by the function block is required by a function block is under the control of controlled by some other function block or not other function block or not available available Ensure the resource required by the function block Ensure the resource required by the function block available for use available for use Reset the state of the axis using the MC_Reset Some examples function block e MC_power function block attempts to control the same axis e MC_Stop function block is executed against the same axis at the same time e Two or more MC_TouchProbe function blocks are executed against the same axis at the same time 08 MC_FB_ERR_PROFILE The function block cannot
188. an edit default configuration by following the procedure provided in the next section Edit Expansion 1 0 Configuration on page 83 After you have added all four expansion I O modules your Connected Components Workbench project should look like this DCABBAUBAUGUaGGaaaas Slot 1 2085 1032T Slot 3 2085 0B16 Slot 2 2085 IF4 Slot 4 2085 IRT4 82 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Expansion I O Support Chapter 6 The Expansion Modules list should appear as shown below To see device details for each of the expansion I O you have just added click General To see default configuration properties click Configuration if available a 2085 1Q32T General Configuration 2085 IF4 General Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 2085 0816 General 2085 IRT4 General Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Edit Expansion l 0 Configuration You can edit default I O configuration through the Expansion Modules Details box located right below the controller graphic IMPORTANT To download configuration to your device see Build Save Download a Project with Expansion I O Configuration on page 94 1 Select the Expansion I O device you want to configure z E Expansion Mo TA ial 2085 1Q32T Configuration 85 IQ32T General Input Off to On On to Off Configuration 2085 IF4 Oto 2 0 ms v 8 0 ms v General Ea z Channel 0 Chan
189. ange the Initialize input to FALSE 5 Wait until the AT Warning output value changes to 2 6 Get the tuned value from OutGains IMPORTANT Io finalize the tuning some fine tuning may be needed depending on the processes and needs Autotune will provide suboptimal value of tuning It may be necessary to do fine tuning with the values in close loop to achieve the user goal If ATWarning goes to 2 to indicate Auto Tune unsuccessful you may need to adjust the AT_Param or and scan time Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 333 Appendix H 334 IPID Function Block PID Application Example Water In Water Level gt Tank N Water Out The illustration above shows a basic water level control system to maintain a preset water level in the tank A solenoid valve is used to control incoming water filling the tank at a preset rate Similarly outflowing water is controlled at a measureable rate IPID Autotuning for First and Second Order Systems Autotune of IPID can only work on first and second order systems A first order system can be described by a single independent energy storage element Examples of first order systems are the cooling of a fluid tank the flow of fluid from a tank a motor with constant torque driving a disk flywheel or an electric RC lead network The energy storage element for these systems are heat energy potential energy rotational kinet
190. ans for emergency machine shutdown Since the master control relay allows the placement of several emergency stop switches in different locations its installation is important from a safety standpoint Overtravel limit switches or mushroom head push buttons are wired in series so that when any of them opens the master control relay is de energized This removes power to input and output device circuits Refer to the figures on pages 19 and 20 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 About Your Controller Chapter 2 WARNING Never alter these circuits to defeat their function since serious injury and or machine damage could result TIP If you are using an external DC power supply interrupt the DC output side rather than the AC line side of the supply to avoid the additional delay of power supply turn off The AC line of the DC output power supply should be fused Connect a set of master control relays in series with the DC power supplying the input and output circuits Place the main power disconnect switch where operators and maintenance personnel have quick and easy access to it If you mount a disconnect switch inside the controller enclosure place the switch operating handle on the outside of the enclosure so that you can disconnect power without opening the enclosure Whenever any of the emergency stop switches are opened power to input and output devices should be removed When you use the
191. arts The homing motion sequence for this scenario is as follows 1 Moving part moves to its right side in positive direction in creep velocity to detect Home switch On Off edge 2 Once Home Abs switch On Off is detected start to detect first Ref Pulse signal 3 Once the first Ref Pulse signal comes record the position as mechanical home position and decelerate to stop 4 Move to the configured home position The mechanical home position recorded during moving right sequence plus the home offset configured for the axis in the Connected Components Workbench software Scenario 4 Moving part at left negative side of Lower Limit switch before homing starts In this case the homing motion fails and moves continuously to the left until drive or moving part fails to move User needs to make sure the moving part is at the proper location before homing starts MC_HOME_REF_PULSE IMPORTANT f Lower Limit switch or Ref Pulse is not configured as Enabled MC_HOME_REF_PULSE 3 homing fails ErrorlD MC_FB_ERR_PARAM For Homing against Lower Limit switch one positive home offset can be configured for Homing against Upper Limit switch one negative home offset can be configured MC_HOME_REF_PULSE 3 homing procedure performs a homing operation against Limit switch plus fine Ref Pulse signal The actual motion sequence is dependent on the limit switch configuration and the actual status for the switches before homing starts
192. at 75 C 167 F or greater 1 2 mm 3 64 in insulation max Wiring category 2 on signal ports Terminal screw torque max 0 5 0 6 Nm 4 4 5 3 Ib in Output circuit type 24V DC sink 24V DC source Power dissipation total 5W Power supply 24V DC Class 2 Status indicators Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 16 Yellow channel indicators 241 AppendixA Specifications 2085 0V16 Sink and 2085 0B16 Source DC Output Module Attribute 2085 0V16 2085 0B16 Isolation voltage 50V continuous Reinforced Insulation Type channel to system Type tested 720V AC for 60 s Enclosure type rating Meets IP20 North American temp code T4 1 Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 2 RTB hold down screws should be tightened by hand They should not be tightened using a power tool 2085 1A8 2085 IM8 2085 0A8 AC Input Output Modules Attribute 2085 1A8 2085 IM8 2085 0A8 Number of inputs 8 Dimensions HxWxD 28 x 90 x 87 mm 1 10 x 3 54 x 3 42 in Shipping weight approx 140 g 4 93 02 Bus current draw max 5V DC 150 mA 5V DC 180 mA Wire size 0 25 2 5 mm 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated 75 C 167 F or greater 1 2 mm 3 64 in insulation max Insulation stripping length 1
193. ate of Motion Axis status Axis Error Scenarios In most cases when a movement function block instruction issued to an axis results in a function block error the axis is also usually flagged as being in Error state The corresponding ErrorID element is set on the axis_ref data for the axis However there are exception scenarios where an axis error is not flagged The exception can be but not limited to the following scenarios e A movement function block instructs an axis but the axis is in a state where the function block could not be executed properly For example the axis has no power or is in Homing sequence or in Error Stop state e A movement function block instructs an axis but the axis is still controlled by another movement function block The axis cannot allow the motion to be controlled by the new function block without going to a full stop For example the new function block commands the axis to change motion direction e When one movement function block tries to control an axis but the axis is still controlled by another movement function block and the newly defined motion profile cannot be realized by the controller For example User Application issues an S Curve MC_MoveAbsolute function block to an axis with too short a distance given when the axis is moving e When one movement function block is issued to an axis and the axis is in the Stopping or Error Stopping sequence Rockwell Automation Publication 2080
194. ated MCEng_Running 0x02 MC engine exists at least one axis defined and the the engine is running The diagnostic data is being updated MCEng_Faulted 0x03 MC engine exists but the engine is faulted Function Block and Axis All motion control function blocks share the same ErrorID definition Status Error Codes Axis error and function block error share the same Error ID but error descriptions are different as described in the table below TIP Error code 128 is warning information to indicate the motion profile has been changed and velocity has been adjusted to a lower value but the function block can execute successfully 142 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO Chapter 9 Motion Function Block and Axis status Error ID Error ID Error ID MACRO Error description for Function Block Error description for Axis Status 00 MC_FB_ERR_NO Function block execution is successful The axis is in operational state 01 MC_FB_ERR_WRONG_STATE The function block cannot execute because the The axis is not operational due to incorrect axis axis is not in the correct state Check the axis state detected during a function block execution state Reset the state of the axis using the MC_Reset function block 02 MC_FB_ERR_RANGE The function block cannot execute because there is The axis is not
195. ation 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO Chapter 9 The homing motion sequence discussed in this section has the following configuration assumptions 1 Homing direction is configured as negative direction 2 The Lower limit switch is configured as enabled and wired The different homing modes as defined see table Homing Modes on page 158 can have different but still similar motion sequence The concept discussed below is applicable to various homing configurations MC_HOME_ABS_SWITCH IMPORTANT _ f home switch is not configured as enabled MC_HOME_ABS_SWITCH 0 homing fails with MC_FB_ERR_PARAM MC_HOME_ABS_SWITCH 0 homing procedure performs a homing operation against the home switch The actual motion sequence is dependent on the home switch limit switch configuration and the actual status for the switches before homing starts that is when the MC_Home function block is issued Scenario 1 Moving part at right positive side of home switch before homing starts The homing motion sequence for this scenario is as follows 1 Moving part moves to the left side negative direction 2 When home switch is detected the moving part decelerates to stop 3 Moving part moves back positive direction in creep velocity to detect home switch On Off edge 4 Once home switch On Off is detected record the position as mechanical home position and decelerate
196. axis using MC_Home_ Reset the state of the axis using the MC_Reset Function Block Function Block 128 MC_FB_PARAM_MODIFIED Warning The requested motion parameter for the Motion internal Fault Error ID 0x80 axis has been adjusted Contact your local Rockwell Automation technical The function block executes successfully support representative For contact information see http support rockwellautomation com MySuppor Lasp 1 You can view axis status through the Axis Monitor feature of the Connected Components Workbench software 144 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO Chapter 9 Major Fault Handling Motion Axis Configuration in Connected Components Workbench When a motion control function block ends with an error and the axis is in ErrorStop state in most cases MC_Reset function block or MC_Power Off On and MC_Reset can be used to have the axis to be recovered With this the axis can get back to normal motion operation without stopping the controller operation In case the controller encounters issues where recovery is not possible through the Stop Reset or Power function blocks controller operation will be stopped and a major fault will be reported The following motion related major fault codes are defined for Micro830 and Micro850 controllers Major Fault Error Codes and Description Major Fault Fault ID
197. based on the low preset being reached The low output bit pattern can be configured during initial setup or while the controller is operating Use the HSC function block to load the new parameters while the controller is operating Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 181 Chapter 10 Use the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch HSC STS HSC Status Data Define a HSC STS data HSC status information data data type HSCSTS Structure 182 minaaa re TH Mira83D Ss Programs RCP uritan E YO Untitled D2 ie Ghbd variables CS Detotypes a Function Blacks i Local Varlables a Local Yariables when programming a HSC SCALER_1 SCALER gt l H ReadWrke H SCA HSE z vi ReadWrke H5C_omcL0 USIT ReadWrke Counting Enabled HSCSTS CountEnable Description Data Format HSC Modes JUser Program Access HSCSTS CountEnable bit 0 9 read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode HSCAPP HSCMode on page 172 The Counting Enabled control bit is used to indicate the status of the High Speed Counter whether counting is enabled 1 or disabled 0 default Error Detected HSCSTS ErrorDetected Description Data Format HSC Modes JUser Program Access HSCSTS ErrorDetected bit 0 9 read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode
198. bedded Input 1 HSC0 Value of CE Bit Accumulator and Counter Action A B A OFF TRUE Count Up Acc Value A ON TRUE Count Down Acc Value v OFF TRUE Count Down Acc Value v ON TRUE Count Up Acc Value OFF A RUE Count Down Acc Value ON A TRUE Count Up Acc Value OFF v TRUE Count Up Acc Value ON v TRUE Count Down Acc Value OFF or ON OFF or ON X Hold Acc Value X X FALSE Hold Acc Value Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 177 Chapter 10 Use the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch HSC Mode 9 Examples HSC Mode 9 Quadrature X4 Counter with External Reset and Hold Embedded Embedded Embedded Embedded Input Value of CE Bit Accumulator and Counter Action Input 0 HSCO Input 1 HSCO Input 2 HSCO 3 HSCO A B Reset Hold A OFF X TRUE Count Up Acc Value A ON X TRUE Count Down Acc Value Vv OFF X TRUE Count Down Acc Value h ON X TRUE Count Up Acc Value OFF A X TRUE Count Down Acc Value ON A X TRUE Count Up Acc Value OFF v X TRUE Count Up Acc Value ON v X TRUE Count Down Acc Value OFF or ON OFF or ON OFF X X Hold Acc Value OFF OFF ON X X Reset Acc to Zero X X OFF ON X Hold Acc Value X X OFF X FALSE Hold Acc Value Accumulator HSCAPP Accumulator Description Data Format User Program Access HSCAPP Accumulator long word 32 bit I
199. blication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 173 Chapter 10 Use the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Blank cells don t care tt rising edge Je falling edge TIP Inputs 0 11 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used HSC Mode 3 Counter with External Direction Reset and Hold HSC Mode 3 Examples Input Terminals Embedded Input 0 Embedded Input 1 Embedded Input 2 Embedded Input 3 ICE Bit Comments Function Count Direction Reset Hold Example 1 T off on off off jon 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 0 1 0 0 Example 2 lI on on off off jon 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 1 1 0 0 Example3 on U off on Hold accumulator value 1 0 1 Example 4 on off off 0 Hold accumulator value 1 0 Example 5 on IU loff on U Joff Hold accumulator value 1 0 1 0 Example 6 II Clear accumulator 0 Blank cells don t care f rising edge Y falling edge TIP Inputs 0 11 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used 174 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Use the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Chapter 10 HSC Mode 4 Two Input Counter up and down HSC Mode 4 Examples Input Terminals Embedded Input 0 E
200. can change the password on a target controller through the Connected Components Workbench software The target controller must be in Connected status 268 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Quickstarts Appendix C 1 On the Device Details toolbar click Secure button Select Change Password Micro850 Micro850 ige Poan Marak N 5 Run Controller Mode R Upload Micro850 2080 LC50 24QBH 2 The Change Controller Password dialog appears Enter Old Password New Password and confirm the new password Change Controller Password Old Password A RKERAKKAAKKEKKEARKERKERKER Q New Password New Password Confirm Clear Password OK Cancel 3 Click OK The controller requires the new password to grant access to any new session Clear Password With an authorized session you can clear the password on a target controller through the Connected Components Workbench software Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 269 Appendix C Quickstarts 1 On the Device Details toolbar click Secure button Select Clear Password Micro850 Micro850 Program Major Fault Not Faul Run Controller Mode Run Upload Micro850 2080 LC50 24QBH 2 The Clear Password dialog appears Enter Password 3 Click OK to clear the password The controller will require no password on any new session Use the High Speed Counter To use HSC you first need
201. ch 0x01 MC_HOME_LIMIT_SWITCH Homing process searches for limit switch 0x02 MC_HOME_REF_WITH_ABS Homing process searches for Home Absolute switch plus using encoder reference pulse 0x03 MC_HOME_REF_PULSE Homing process searches for limit switch plus using encoder reference pulse 0x04 MC_HOME_DIRECT Static homing process with direct forcing a home position from user reference The function block will set current position the mechanism is in as home position with its position determined by the input parameter Position IMPORTANT _ f axis is powered On with only one direction enabled the MC_Home function block in modes 0 1 2 3 will generate an error and only MC_Home function block mode 4 can be executed See MC_Power function block for more details Conditions for Successful Homing For homing operation to be successful all configured switches or sensors must be properly positioned and wired The correct position order from the most negative position to the most positive position that is from the leftmost to the rightmost in the homing setup diagrams in this section for the switches are 1 Lower Limit switch 2 ABS Home switch 3 Upper Limit switch During MC_Home function block execution the home position will be reset and the soft limits mechanical position will be recalculated During homing sequence the motion configuration for the soft limits will be ignored Rockwell Automation Public
202. com2 v H Shielded cable co 3 A caren v0 3 ad a tf coms j Shielded cable 45321 r cl 4 4 m Current VI 4 transmitter COM4 j T shielded cable CI 5 VI 5 A Voltage cOMs transmitter shielded cable Cl 6 m7 Current VI 6 transmitter COM6 ro eee ee Shielded cable Cl 7 VI 7 1 i Voltage transmitter COM7 Shielded cable 45322 Expansion I O Support Chapter 6 2085 IRT4 2 wire RTD 3 wire RTD a iihi atii r en CHO CH2 1 TS 1 1 ae poe CHOH CH2H Fa f 1 eee 2 es CHOL CHL 1 i H CHo CH2 may Shielded cable shielded cable a1 i H em CH3 DM4a ji li i CH1H CH3H Kuta mV Ly S E a i La j CHIL CH3L T on ee H CHI CH3 Hy o es 7 ie o i 4 wire RTD Shielded cable L shielded cable 4 NC CJC CJC NG i If a thermocouple is used the use of the TH supplied CJC assembly is compulsory NC CJC CJC NC NC 45326 Terminal Block 1 Terminal Block 2 Wiring Options for the 2085 1032T Module Included with your 2085 IQ32T module is a keyed 40 pin female connector and crimp type pins These components allow you to wire I O devices to the module using a 40 conductor cable or individual wires A ATTENTION
203. configuration Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 313 Appendix F Troubleshooting List of Error Codes for Micro800 controllers Error Code Description Recommended Action OxF8A0 The TOW parameters are invalid Perform the following e Correct the program to ensure that there are no invalid parameters e Build and download the program using Connected Components Workbench e Put the Micro800 controller into Run mode OxF8A1 The DOY parameters are invalid Perform the following e Correct the program to ensure that there are no invalid parameters e Build and download the program using Connected Components Workbench e Put the Micro800 controller into Run mode OxFFzz A user created fault from Connected Contact your local Rockwell Automation technical support representative if the error Note zz indicates Components Workbench has occurred persists the last byte of the program number Only program numbers up to OxFF can be displayed For program numbers 01x00 to OXxFFFF only the last byte is displayed 314 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Troubleshooting Appendix F Controller Error Recove ry Use the following error recovery model to help you diagnose software and M 0 d el hardware problems in the micro controller The model provides common questions you might ask to help troubleshoot your system Refer to the recommended pages within the m
204. controller ground or be floating not referenced to a potential other than ground Failure to follow this procedure may result in property damage or personal injury This product is intended to be mounted to a well grounded mounting surface such as a metal panel Refer to the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 for additional information The following illustrations show the wiring diagrams for the Micro800 controllers Controllers with DC inputs can be wired as either sinking or sourcing inputs Sinking and sourcing does not apply to AC inputs High speed inputs and outputs are indicated by O 33 Chapter4 Wire Your Controller 2080 LC30 10QWB Input Terminal Block BFQOOQQHOOOHS I I I IT If 1 DC24 CM0 CM1 CM2 CM3 NC DC24 0 00 0 01 0 02 0 03 NC Output Terminal Block 45033 2080 LC30 100QVB Input Terminal Block como 1 01 1 03 1 04 NC NC OWOOOOOOOOO 1 00 1 02 COMI 1 05 NC NC I I I l DC24 CM0 0 01 CM1 0 03 NC DC24 0 00 CM0 0 02 CM1 NC Output Terminal Block ae 2080 LC030 16AWB 2080 LC30 16QWB Input Terminal Block OQOQOOOOOOO 000000000000 Output Terminal Block iw TIP 2080 LC30 16AWB has no high speed inputs 34 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Wire Your Controller Chapter 4 2080 LC30 16QVB Input Terminal Block Cane 1 01 1 03 1 04 1
205. corresponding channels are open have data error or under overrange 2085 OF4 I O Data Mapping Analog output data can be written to Global Variables_IO_Xx_AO_yy where x represents the expansion slot number 1 4 and yy represents the channel number 00 03 Control bit states can be written to Global Variable IO Xx CO_00 zz where x represents the expansion slot number 1 4 and zz represents the bit number 00 12 2085 OF4 Control Data Mapping Word Bit Position 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 97 Chapter6 Expansion 1 0 Support Channel Alarm Error Unlatch UUsx and UOx are written during run mode to clear any latched lunder and over range alarms The alarm is unlatched when the unlatch bit is set 1 and the alarm condition no longer exists If the alarm condition persists then the unlatch bit has no effect CEx are written during run mode to clear any DAC hardware error bits and re enable the error disabled channel x You need to keep the unlatch bit set until verification from the appropriate input channel status word says that the alarm status bit has cleared 0 then you need to reset 0 the unlatch bit Status Data Analog output status can be read from Global Variables IO_Xx_ST_yy where x represents the expansion slot number 1 4 and yy represents the status word number 00 06 Individual bits within a
206. cted Components Workbench e a power down occurred during i program download or data transfer e Transfer the program using the memory module restore utility from the memory module If the fault persists contact your local Rockwell Automation technical support representative For contact information see e the cable was removed from the http support rockwellautomation com MySupport asp controller during program download e the RAM integrity test failed 0xF002 The controller hardware watchdog was Perform the following activated e Establish a connection to the Micro800 controller e A Micro800 controller revision 2 xx attempts to save the program e Download the program using Connected Components Workbench and clear the user data If the system If the fault persists contact your local Rockwell Automation technical support variable _SYSVA_USER_DATA_LOST representative For contact information see is set the controller is able to recover http support rockwellautomation com MySupport asp the user program but the user data is cleared If not the Micro800 controller program is cleared e A Micro800 controller revision 1 xx clears the program Note that the system variable SYSVA_USER_DATA_LOST is not available on Micro800 controllers revision 1 xx OxDOOF A particular hardware type for example Perform one of the following embedded 0 was selected in the user 5 PAE program M but did not match Connect to the hardware that i
207. d CL I DIV 2 GP A B C D are suitable for use in Class Division 2 Groups A B C D Hazardous Locations and nonhazardous locations only Each product is supplied with markings on the rating nameplate indicating the hazardous location temperature code When combining products within a system the most adverse temperature code lowest T number may be used to help determine the overall temperature code of the system Combinations of equipment in your system are subject to investigation by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction at the time of installation Les produits marqu s CL I DIV 2 GP A B C D ne conviennent qu une utilisation en environnements de Classe Division 2 Groupes A B C D dangereux et non dangereux Chaque produit est livr avec des marquages sur sa plaque d identification qui indiquent le code de temp rature pour les environnements dangereux Lorsque plusieurs produits sont combin s dans un syst me le code de temp rature le plus d favorable code de temp rature le plus faible peut tre utilis pour d terminer le code de temp rature global du syst me Les combinaisons d quipements dans le syst me sont sujettes a inspection par les autorit s locales qualifi es au moment de l installation EXPLOSION HAZARD Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous e Do not disconnect connections to this equipment unless power has been removed or th
208. d RUN indicators are on If a force condition is active the FORCE indicator turns on and remains on until all forces are removed If an error exists within the controller the controller indicators operate as described in the following table Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Troubleshooting Appendix F Indicator Behavior All indicators off Probable Error No input power or power supply error Probable Cause No line power Recommended Action Verify proper line voltage and connections to the controller Power supply overloaded This problem can occur intermittently if power supply is overloaded when output loading and temperature varies Power and FAULT indicators on solid Hardware faulted Processor hardware error Cycle power Contact your local Allen Bradley representative if the error persists Loose wiring Verify connections to the controller Power on with solid indicator and FAULT indicator flashing Application fault Hardware software major fault detected For error codes and status information refer to the Connected Components Workbench online Help Power on with solid indicator and FAULT indicator flashing Operating system fault Firmware upgrade unsuccessful See Flash Upgrade Your Micro800 Firmware on page 255 Error codes Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 This section li
209. d as Immediate Soft Stop during motion when the Soft Limit reach is detected Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO Chapter 9 e The Emergency Stop is configured as Immediate Soft Stop During motion MC_Stop function block is issued with Deceleration parameter equal to 0 Decelerating Soft Stop Decelerating soft stop could be delayed as much as Motion Engine Execution Time interval This type of stop is applied in the following scenarios e One Hard Limit is enabled for an axis but Hard Stop on Hard Limit switch is configured as Off If the emergency stop is configured as decelerating stop during motion when the Hard Limit switch is detected e One Soft Limit is enabled for an axis and the axis has been homed If the emergency stop is configured as decelerating stop during motion when the soft limit reach is detected by firmware e The Emergency Stop is configured as Decelerating Stop During motion the MC_Stop function block is issued with deceleration parameter set to 0 e During motion MC_Stop function block is issued with Deceleration parameter not set to 0 Motion Direction For distance position motion with the target position defined absolute or relative the direction input is ignored For velocity motion direction input value can be positive 1 current 0 or negative 1 For any other value only the sign whether posit
210. d from the controller that exceeds those clamps sets an appropriate limit alarm and transitions the output to that limit but not beyond the requested value 87 Chapter6 Expansion 1 0 Support Configuration Parameters for 2085 OF4 Configuration What to do Description Property Overrange alarm If you enabled and entereda The overrange and underrange feature trigger High Clamp value you can detects when the output module is operating check High Clamp Value as beyond limits set by the output range The overrange alarm trigger trigger could be set based on clamp values or minimum maximum output values Over Range Alarm Trigger High Clamp Value Maximum Output Value If you did not enable and entered a High Clamp value you can check Maximum Output Value as your overrange alarm trigger Over Range Alarm Trigger High Clamp Value Maximum Output Value Underrange alarm If you enabled and entered a trigger Low Clamp value you can check Low Clamp Value to set it as underrange alarm trigger Under Range Alarm Trigger Low Clamp Value Minimum Output Value If you did not enable and entered a Low Clamp value you can check Minimum Output Value as underrange alarm trigger Under Range Alarm Trigger Low Clamp Value Minimum Output Value Latch over and Click to latch Check the box to latch an alarm in the set under alarm position even if the condition that causes the alarm disappears Restore defaults
211. ded serial port is configured for Slave From the default Communications Settings for a PanelView Component HMI PVC there are three items that must be checked or modified in order to set up communications from PVC to Micro800 250 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Modbus Mapping for Micro800 Appendix B 1 Change from DF1 to Modbus protocol r Protocol serial Modbus x O Ethernet Allen Bradley SLC P Driver ALEEA Use Ethernet Encapsulation C PanelView Component Settings Write Optimization I R8232 19200 i 8o Controller Settings Add Controller Delete Selected Controllers Sort by Name x Ascending x 2 Set the Address of Micro800 slave to match the serial port configuration for the controller Settings Zero based addressing Zero based addressing within registers Holding register bit mask writes Modbus function 06 for single register writes Modbus function 05 for single coil writes Default Modbus byte order First word low in 32 bit data types First Dword low in 64 bit data types Modicon bit ordering bit 0 is MSB O88 AAHORD 3 Deactivate Tags on Error This is to prevent the requirement of power cycling PVC when new Modbus Mappings are downloaded from Connected Components Workbench to Micro800 controller Modbus TCP OZAT OTTI ene Framing address exception O
212. dielectric tests 1 400V AC for 2 s 132V working voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Verified by the following dielectric tests 75V DC working voltage IEC Class 2 rein 1 414V DC for 2 s forced insulation Voltage category 110V AC 24V DC sink source On state voltage range 79 132V AC 16 8 26 4V DC 10 26 4V DC 47 63 Hz Off state voltage max 20V AC 5V DC Off state current max 1 5mA Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 207 Appendix A Inputs Attribute Specifications High Speed DC Input 120V AC Input 2080 LC30 16AWB only 2080 LC30 160VB and 2080 LC30 160WB only Inputs 0 3 Standard DC Input 2080 LC30 160VB and 2080 LC30 160WB only Inputs 4 9 On state current min 5 mA 79V AC 5 0 mA 16 8V DC 1 8 mA 10V DC On state current nom 12 mA 120V AC 7 66 mA 24V 6 15 mA 24V On state current max 16 mA 132V AC 12 0 mA 30V DC Nominal impedance 12 kQ 50 Hz 3kQ 3 74 kQ 10 kQ2 60 Hz Inrush current max 250 mA 120V AC Input frequency max 63 Hz IEC input compatibility Type 3 AC input filter setting Outputs Attribute 8 ms for all embedded inputs each input group In Connected Components Workbench go to the Embedded 1 0 configuration window to re configure the filter setting for Isolated AC Inputs 2080 LC30 160WB 2080 LC30 160VB Inputs 0 3 Attribute
213. ds on the selected sensor type 5 The resolution is 0 01 mV per count For example 9999 here means 99 99 mV or 9999 x 0 01 mV 6 The resolution is 0 1 mV per count For example 999 here means 99 9 mV or 999 x 0 1 mV 7 The resolution is 0 1 ohm per count For example 4999 here means 499 9 ohm or 4999 x 0 1 ohm Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 77 Chapter 6 78 Expansion 1 0 Support 8 The resolution is 1 ohm per count For example 499 here means 499 ohm or 499 x 1 ohm Convert Analog Value to Data Format Value The formula for converting an analog value x to a data format value y or converting data format value y to analog value x is as follows Y X Minimum Value of X Range Range of Y Range of X Minimum Value of Y Range Example Find the temperature value Y of thermocouple type K when the Raw Proportional Data X is 20000 Given X 20000 Raw Proportional Value Minimum value of X Range 32768 Minimum value of Raw Proportional Data Range of X 32767 32768 65535 Range of Raw Proportional Data Range of Y 1372 270 1642 Range of Thermocouple K in C Minimum value of Y Range 270 C Minimum value of Thermocouple K Then Y 20000 32768 1642 65535 270 C 49 9 C Temperature Units Temperature value can be set to C default or F Open circuit response This parameter defines the
214. e Bit set to report an unknown update rate error in configuration OR Overrange Bit set to indicate overrange on channel input The Channel Temperature Data shows maximum temperature count for individual type of sensor used and th e value does not change until overrange error is clear UR Underrange Bit set to indicate the chan Channel Temperature Data count for individual type of change until underrange er nel input underrange happens The will show minimum temperature sensor used and the value does not or is clear OC Open Circuit Bit set to indicate open circuit on the channel input sensor DI Data illegal The data in the channel da by user This bit is set whe use a field is illegal and cannot be used n temperature data is not ready for CC Code Calibrated Bit set indicates temperatu calibration coefficient re data is calibrated by the system SOR System Overrange Bit set to indicate system overrange error with environment temperature over 70 C SUR System Underrange Bit set to indicate system underrange error with environment temperature under 20 C COC CJC open circuit Bit set to indicate CJC sensor not connected for thermocouple module open circuit This bit is for thermocouple module only CE Calibration Error Bit set indicates that the module is not accurate This bit is set to 0 by defaul when the valu
215. e f the respective PowerFlex drive supports Modbus Function Code 16 Preset Write Multiple Registers use a single write message with a length of 2 to write the Logic Command 8193 and Speed reference 8194 at the same time e Use a single Function Code 03 Read Holding Registers with a length of 4 to read the Logic status 8449 Error Code 8450 and Speed Feedback 8452 at the same time Refer to the respective PowerFlex 4 Class drive User Manual for additional information about Modbus addressing See Appendix E Modbus RTU Protocol on publication 22C UMO001G Performance The performance of MSG_MODBUS Micro800 is master is affected by the Program Scan because messages are serviced when the message instruction is executed in a program For example if the program scan is 100 ms and six serial ports are used then the theoretical maximum for serial ports is 60 messages second total This theoretical maximum may not be possible since MSG_MODBUS isa master slave request response protocol so performance is affected by several variables such as message size baud rate and slave response time The performance of Micro800 when receiving Modbus request messages Micro800 is slave is also affected by the Program Scan Each serial port is serviced only once per program scan Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Flash Upgrade Your Micro800 Firmware Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E
216. e 172 The High Preset Interrupt status bit is set 1 when the HSC accumulator reaches the high preset value and the HSC interrupt is triggered This bit can be used in the control program to identify that the high preset condition caused the HSC interrupt If the control program needs to perform any specific control action based on the high preset this bit is used as conditional logic This bit can be cleared 0 by the control program and is also cleared by the HSC sub system whenever these conditions are detected e Low Preset Interrupt occurs e Underflow Interrupt occurs e Overflow Interrupt occurs Low Preset Interrupt HSCSTS LPCauselnter Description Data Format HSC Modes User Program Access HSCSTS LPCauselnter bit 2529 read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode HSCAPPHSCMode on page 172 The Low Preset Interrupt status bit is set 1 when the HSC accumulator reaches the low preset value and the HSC interrupt has been triggered This bit can be used in the control program to identify that the low preset condition caused the HSC interrupt If the control program needs to perform any specific control action based on the low preset this bit would be used as conditional logic This bit can be cleared 0 by the control program and is also be cleared by the HSC sub system whenever these conditions are detected e High Preset Interrupt occurs e Underflow Interru
217. e HSC status Info only if Rung is disabled 0x02 HSC Stop Stop a HSC counting if HSC is in RUN mode and Rung is Enabled 0x03 HSC Load reload HSC Configuration if Rung is Enabled for 6 input elements HPSetting LPSetting HPOutput LPOutput OFSetting and UFSetting HSC accumulator is NOT reloaded by cmd 0x03 0x04 HSC Reset set Accumulator to assigned value and reset HSC status information if Rung is Enabled HSC Function Block Status Codes HSC Status Code 0x00 Description No action from Controller because the function block is not enabled 0x01 HSC function block successfully executed 0x02 HSC command invalid 0x03 HSC ID out of range 0x04 190 HSC Configuration Error Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 HSC_SET_STS Function Block Enable Hscld Mode1Done HPReached LPReached OFOccured UFOccured Use the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Chapter 10 HSC STS 45646 The HSC Set Status function block can be used to change the HSC counting status This function block is called when the HSC is not counting stopped HSC Parameters Parameter Parameter Data Type Parameter Description Type Enable Input BOOL Enable function block When Enable TRUE set reset the HSC status When Enable FALSE there is no HSC status change Hscld Input See HSC APP Describes which HSC
218. e UPM4 8388608 bit 23 Plug In Module UPM3 4194304 bit 22 Plug In Module UPM2 2097152 bit 21 Plug In Module UPM1 1048576 bit 20 Plug In Module UPMO 524288 bit 19 STI Selectable Timed Interrupt STI3 262144 bit 18 STI Selectable Timed Interrupt STI2 131072 bit 17 STI Selectable Timed Interrupt STI 65536 bit 16 STI Selectable Timed Interrupt STIO 32768 bit 15 EIl Event Input Interrupt Event 7 16384 bit 14 EIl Event Input Interrupt Event 6 8192 bit 13 Ell Event Input Interrupt Event 5 4096 bit 12 Ell Event Input Interrupt Event 4 2048 bit 11 HSC High Speed Counter HSC5 1024 bit 10 HSC High Speed Counter HSC4 512 bit 9 HSC High Speed Counter HSC3 256 bit 8 HSC High Speed Counter HSC2 128 bit 7 HSC High Speed Counter HSC1 64 bit 6 HSC High Speed Counter HSCO 32 bit 5 Ell Event Input Interrupt Event 3 16 bit 4 Ell Event Input Interrupt Event 2 8 bit 3 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 293 Appendix D 294 User Interrupts Types of Interrupts Enabled by the UIE Instruction Interrupt Type Element Decimal Corresponding Value Bit Ell Event Input Interrupt Event 1 4 bit 2 Ell Event Input Interrupt Event 0 2 bit 1 1 bit 0 reserved To enable interrupt s 1 Select which interrupts you want to enable 2 Find the Decimal Value for the interrupt s you selected 3 Add the Decimal Values if you selected more than one type of interrupt 4 Enter th
219. e area is known to be nonhazardous Secure any external connections that mate to his equipment by using screws sliding latches threaded connectors or other means provided with this product e Substitution of any component may impair suitability for Class Division 2 e If this product contains batteries they must only be changed in an area known to be nonhazardous RISQUE D EXPLOSION e Couper le courant ou s assurer que l environnement est class non dangereux avant de d brancher l quipement e Couper le courant ou s assurer que l environnement est class loquets coulissants connecteurs filet s ou autres moyens fournis avec ce produit e La substit inadapt a une utilisation en environnement de Classe Division 2 de changer les piles Disconnecting Main Power WARNING Explosion Hazard Do not replace components connect equipment or disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off tion de tout composant peut rendre cet quipement e S assurer que l environnement est class non dangereux avant non dangereux avant de d brancher les connecteurs Fixer tous les connecteurs externes reli s cet quipement a l aide de vis The main power disconnect switch should be located where operators and maintenance personnel have quick and easy access to it In addition to disconnecting electrical power all other sources of power pneumatic and hydraulic should be de energized before wo
220. e damage United States Only If the controller is installed within a potentially hazardous environment all wiring must comply with the requirements stated in the National Electrical Code 501 10 b i WARNING Calculate the maximum possible current in each power and e Allow for at least 50 mm 2 in between I O wiring ducts or terminal strips and the controller Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 29 Chapter 4 Wire Your Controller e Route incoming power to the controller by a path separate from the device wiring Where paths must cross their intersection should be perpendicular TIP Do not run signal or communications wiring and power wiring in the same conduit Wires with different signal characteristics should be routed by separate paths e Separate wiring by signal type Bundle wiring with similar electrical characteristics together Separate input wiring from output wiring e Label wiring to all devices in the system Use tape shrink tubing or other dependable means for labeling purposes In addition to labeling use colored insulation to identify wiring based on signal characteristics For example you may use blue for DC wiring and red for AC wiring Wire Requirements Wire Size Type Min Max Micro830 Solid 0 2 mm 24 AWG 2 5mm 12 AWG rated 90 C 194 F Micro850 insulation max Controllers Stranded 0 2 mm 24 AWG 2 5 mm 12 AWG Use Surge
221. e ere einige testa paa 79 Add an Expansion l Oican orice citudexnee cert bkheds 80 Edit Expansion I O Contigutationes ciuss cent otiiieeeeminedaers 83 Delete and Replace an Expansion I O Configuration 92 Build Save Download a Project with Expansion I O Configuration eno a T ae E a al cn housed altel diel 94 I O Data Map pine s resus eiio to rne A REE A 94 Discrete I O Data Mapping ssssssurssserrerrrrerrren 94 Analog I O Data Mapping nsussrsrsrrersrrrrerrrrrrsrerse 95 Specialty I O Data Mapping saccades oa datebvursenscences 99 Calibration of Analog Modules 00 e ce cce eee eee e eens 100 Specification Senner ane e E whe OT E 100 Chapter 7 PlusIn Modules cierne da es San R aE EERE 101 Hardware Feat rcs miserine Sumit A R E 102 Insert Module into Gottrollet cn diesiacdn eect ieee eeedan 103 Plug In Features soa gun tater esata Gen tae hiui aTa 103 Micro800 Discrete Input Output and Combination Plug in Modules reie oe e dea tae w ated Ui a toh ca 103 Micro800 AC DC Relay Output Module 104 Micro800 Non isolated Unipolar Analog Input Non isolated Unipolar Analog Outputsccs ciwra nets ies tdlee bi sebate ead 105 Micro800 Non isolated Unipolar Analog Output Plug in Module serraria rini e oak a Maude eG 9S 105 Micro800 Non isolated Thermocouple and RTD Plug in Mine ules sty ttt cheered seed oh eho lM ald ike nak Ald 106 Micro800 RS 232 RS 485 Isolated Serial Port Plug in Module 106 Micro8
222. e in user unit Value in pulse x 2 The parameter is set as REAL float value in Connected Components Workbench To learn more about conversions and rounding of REAL values see Real Data Resolution on page 153 TIP A red border on an input field indicates that an invalid value has been entered Scroll over the field to see tooltip message that will let you know the valid value range for the parameter Supply the valid value Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO Chapter 9 3 Click Dynamics The lt Axis Name gt Dynamics tab appears Edit the Dynamics parameters based on the table below axisl Dynamics Normal Operation Profile Start Stop Velocity 5 0 mm sec 300 0 rpm Max Velocity 500 0 mm sec 30000 0 rpm gt Max Acceleration 5000 0 mm sec EERE E ER EE EERE EERE EH Max Deceleration 5000 0 mm sec Max Jeric 50000 0 mm sec Emergency Stop Profile Stop Type Deceleration Stop v nn Stop Velocity 50 mm sec 300 0 rpm Stop Deceleration 5000 0 mm se Stop Jere 00 mm sec r Dynamics Parameters Parameter Values Start Stop Velocity 2 Range 1 100 000 pulse sec Default 5 0 mm sec 300 rpm Start Stop Velocity in For example you can configure the value from 0 005 500 user units mm for steps per revolution of 200 3 Rpm value is automatically populated when a value in user units is
223. e is otherwis and should remain as 0 Contact Technical Support e Temperature Conversion Data to Degree Celsius C To keep the precision of temperature value from the Thermocouple and RTD plug in modules there is a general data mapping conversion in the firmware Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 321 Appendix G 322 Non isolated Thermocouple and RTD Plug in Modules before the actual temperature is sent to the Connected Components Workbench software The following equation shows how the Connected Components Workbench software data count is mapped from temperature Celsius degree by the firmware Connected Components Workbench software Data Count Temp C 270 0 10 IMPORTANT This conversion formula applies to all types of Thermocouple and RTD sensors This equation illustrates how the Connected Components Workbench data count does not use full range of 0 65535 of data word Derive Actual Temperature C From Connected Components Workbench Data Count The following formula shows how to derive temperature Celsius degree from temperature data word in the Connected Components Workbench software Temp C Data 2700 10 These sample equations show how actual temperature is derived by applying the formula above 1234 1234 2700 10 146 6 C 8000 8000 2700 10 530 0 C IMPORTANT Underrange overrange error reporting checking is not based on
224. e sum into the UIE instruction For example to enable EII Event 1 and EII Event 3 EI Event 1 4 EII Event 3 16 4 16 20 enter this value UIF User Interrupt Flush UIF Enable IROType UIF name or Pin ID or ENO Pin ID The UIF instruction is used to flush remove pending interrupts from the system selected user interrupts The table below shows the types of interrupts with their corresponding flush bits Types of Interrupts Disabled by the UIF Instruction Interrupt Type Element Decimal Corresponding Value Bit Plug In Module UPM4 8388608 bit 23 Plug In Module UPM3 4194304 bit 22 Plug In Module UPM2 2097152 bit 21 Plug In Module UPM1 1048576 bit 20 Plug In Module UPMO 524288 bit 19 STI Selectable Timed Interrupt STI3 262144 bit 18 STI Selectable Timed Interrupt STI2 131072 bit 17 STI Selectable Timed Interrupt STI 65536 bit 16 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 User Interrupts Appendix D Types of Interrupts Disabled by the UIF Instruction Interrupt Type Element Decimal Corresponding _ Value Bit STI Selectable Timed Interrupt STIO 32768 bit 15 Ell Event Input Interrupt Event 7 16384 bit 14 Ell Event Input Interrupt Event 6 8192 bit 13 Ell Event Input Interrupt Event 5 4096 bit 12 EIl Event Input Interrupt Event 4 2048 bit 11 HSC High S
225. e these after the modules are replaced 2085 0W16 2085 1032T Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 93 Chapter6 Expansion 1 0 Support 1 0 Data Mapping 94 TIP You can also delete and replace an expansion I O through the Expansion Modules list To replace right click the expansion I O module you would like to replace then select the Expansion I O module you would like to replace it with from the list that appears To delete the Expansion 1 0 choose Delete Modbus Mapping Embedde Plug In Modul 2085 IA8 lt Empty 2085 IF4 lt Empty lt Empty 2085 IF8 Expansion M 2085 IM8 ji Esc 2085 1Q16 Genet Confi 2085 1Q32T lt Availab 2085 IRT4 eee oe 2085 0a8 Gener E 2085 IRT 2085 0B16 Gener 2085 OF4 Sah 2085 OV16 Chant Chant 2085 OW16 chan 2085 OW8 Delete Build Save Download a Project with Expansion 1 0 Configuration To learn how to build save and download the project to your controller see the Connected Components Workbench Online Help This section includes I O data mapping for the discrete analog and specialty expansion I O modules Discrete 1 0 Data Mapping TIP Use the Connected Components Workbench software to see Global Variables 2085 1016 and 2085 1032T I O Data Mapping Discrete input states can be read from Global Variables _IO_Xx_DI_yy where x represents the expansion slot number 1 4 and yy represents the point n
226. e time 8 Pin Female Terminal Block Back _ View into terminal block B OOO Pin A1 COM Pin B1 VO 0 Pin A2 COM Pin B2 CO 0 A OOOO Pin A3 COM Pin B3 VO 1 Front asia Pin A4 COM Pin B4 CO 1 Micro800 Non isolated Thermocouple and RTD Plug in Modules These plug in modules 2080 T C2 and 2080 RTD2 help to make temperature control possible when used with PID These plug ins can be used in any slot of your Micro830 Micro850 controller Removal and Insertion Under Power is not supported The RTD and Thermocouple plug in modules are discussed in detail in the next chapter See Non isolated Thermocouple and RTD Plug in Modules on page 317 Micro800 RS 232 RS 485 Isolated Serial Port Plug in Module The 2080 SERIALISOL plug in supports CIP Serial RS 232 only Modbus RTU RS 232 only and ASCII RS 232 only protocols Unlike the embedded Micro830 Micro850 serial port this port is electrically isolated making it ideal for connecting to noisy devices such as variable frequency and servo drives as well as for communications over long cable lengths up to 100 m 109 36 yd using RS 485 Wire the Module Follow the pinout diagram to wire your plug in module 8 Pin Female Terminal Block Back View into terminal block n Pin A1 RS485 B Pin B1 RS232 DCD B OOOO Pin A2 GND Pin B2 RS232 RXD A OOOO Pin A3 RS232 RTS Pin B3 RS232 TXD Front 45014 Pin A4 RS232 CTS Pin B4 RS485 A Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM
227. e when one drive MC_Power on is commanded Lower Negative INPUT The input for hardware negative limit Not Shared Limit switch switch to be connected to mechanical electrical negative limit sensor Upper Positive Limit INPUT The input for hardware positive limit Not Shared switch switch to be connected to mechanical electrical positive limit sensor Absolute Home INPUT The input for hardware home switch Not Shared switch sensor to be connected to mechan ical electrical home sensor Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO Chapter 9 Motion Wiring Input Output Description Motion Signals Touch Probe Input switch Input Output INPUT Description The input for hardware touch probe signal to be used with Motion MC_TouchProbe and MC_AbortTrigger function blocks to capture axis commanded position during the motion path Uniqueness Not Shared Servo Drive Ready INPUT The input signal that indicates Servo Drive is ready to receive PTO pulse and direction signal from controller No moving function blocks can be issued to an axis before the axis has this signal ready if this signal is Enabled in the motion axis configuration or axis properties page Can be shared with more than one drive In Position signal from Servo motor INPUT The input signal that indicates the moving part is in
228. eater than Maximum Deceleration Homing Jerk Range 0 10 000 000 pulse sec Default 0 0 pulse sec 0 0 mm sec NOTE Homing Jerk should not be greater than Maximum Jerk Creep Velocity Range 1 5 000 pulse sec Default 1000 0 pulse sec 5 0 mm sec NOTE Homing Creep Velocity should not be greater than Maximum Velocity Homing Offset Range 1073741824 1073741824 pulse Default 0 0 pulse 0 0 mm Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO Chapter 9 Homing Parameters Parameter Value range Home Switch Input Enable home switch input by clicking the checkbox Input Read only value specifying the input variable for home switch input Active Level High default or Low Home Marker Input Enable the setting of a digital input variable by clicking the checkbox Input Specify digital input variable for home marker input Active Level Set the active level for the home switch input as High default or Low The parameter is set as REAL float value in Connected Components Workbench To learn more about conversions and rounding of REAL values see Real Data Resolution on page 153 Axis Start Stop Velocity Start Stop velocity is the initial velocity when an axis starts to move and the last velocity before the axis stops moving Generally Start Stop velocity is configured at some low value so that
229. ection Pin A1 CHO Pin B1 CH1 B Pin A2 CHO Pin B2 CH1 Q Pin A3 CHOL Sense Pin B3 CH1L Sense Pin B4 No connection Pin B5 No connection Pin B6 No connection to Channel 1 3 Wire 2 Wire 45772 Wire the RTD Sensors In an RTD sensor the sensing element is always connected between two wires of different colors Wires of the same color are shorted and form the compensation 324 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Non isolated Thermocouple and RTD Plug in Modules Appendix G leads Measuring resistance between these wires confirms the position of sensing element and compensation elements Compensation elements will always show 0 ohms Wire the Sensors white ChO white ChO white Ch0 red ChO ChOL red 2 wire sensor 3 wire single connection sensor connection 5 ai 3 wire dual NOTE This illustration provides for channel 0 only for 2 and 3 sensor connection wire single sensor connections The wire colors illustrate a particular type of RTD sensor available in market For better accuracy in noisy industrial environments 3 or 4 wire RTD sensors are mostly used While using these sensors the resistance added by lead lengths is compensated by an additional third wire in case of 3 wire RTD and two additional wires in bridge configuration in case of 4 wire RTD For 2 wire RTD sensor in this module this lead compensation is provided by usi
230. ed 24V DC common Suitable surge suppression methods for inductive AC load devices include a varistor an RC network or an Allen Bradley surge suppressor all shown below These components must be appropriately rated to suppress the switching Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 31 Chapter4 Wire Your Controller transient characteristic of the particular inductive device See Recommended Surge Suppressors on page 32 for recommended suppressors Surge Suppression for Inductive AC Load Devices Output device Output device Output device Surge suppressor Varistor RC network Recommended Surge Suppressors Use the Allen Bradley surge suppressors shown in the following table for use with relays contactors and starters Recommended Surge Suppressors Device Coil Voltage Suppressor Catalog Number Type Bulletin 100 104K 700K 24 48V AC 100 KFSC50 RC 110 280VAC Jookse 380 480V AC 100 KFSC480 12 55 VAC 12 77V DC 100 KFSV55 MOV 56 136VAC 78 180VDC 100KFSV136 itstititst sS 137 277V AC 181 250 V DC 100 KFSV277 12 250V DC 100 KFSD250 Diode Bulletin 100C C09 C97 24 48V AC 100 FSc4g RC 110 280V AC 100 FSC280 380 480V AC 100 FSc4go 12 55V AC 12 77V DC 100 FSV55 MOV 56 136V AC 78 180V DC 100 FSV136 137 277V AC 181 250V DC 100 FSV277 278 575V AC 100 FSV5
231. ely from any AC wiring Additional noise immunity can be obtained by routing the cables in grounded conduit Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 37 Chapter4 Wire Your Controller Grounding Your Analog Cable Use shielded communication cable Belden 8761 The Belden cable has two signal wires black and clear one drain wire and a foil shield The drain wire and foil shield must be grounded at one end of the cable Foil Shield Insulation N 4 Clear Wire 44531 IMPORTANT Do not ground the drain wire and foil shield at both ends of the cable Wiring Examples Examples of sink source input output wiring are shown below Sink output wiring example User side f Logic side i proce a f 24V Supply DC COM Micro800 Sink Output 38 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Wire Your Controller Chapter 4 Sink input wiring example Com 24V DC l I P Fuse 45627 Source output wiring example Logic side User side 24V Supply Micro800 Source Output 45626 Source input wiring example 45625 PI ug In Module Wi ring The following diagrams show additional wiring information that supplements the Wiring Diagrams included with your plug in module Rockwe
232. ent Description Data Format User Program Access EX User Interrupt Executing binary bit read only The EX User Interrupt Executing bit is set whenever the EIT mechanism detects a valid input and the controller is scanning the EII POU The EI mechanism clears the EX bit when the controller completes its processing of the EII subroutine The EII EX bit can be used in the control program as conditional logic to detect if an EI interrupt is executing Ell User Interrupt Enable EII0 Enabled Sub Element Description Data Format User Program Access Enabled User Interrupt Enable binary bit read only The Enabled User Interrupt Enable bit is used to indicate the EII enable or disable status Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 301 Appendix D 302 User Interrupts EIl User Interrupt Lost EN0 LS Sub Element Description Data Format User Program Access LS User Interrupt Lost binary bit read write LS User Interrupt Lost is a status flag that represents an interrupt has been lost The controller can process 1 active and maintain up to 1 pending user interrupt conditions before it sets the lost bit This bit is set by the controller It is up to the control program to utilize or track the lost condition if necessary EIl User Interrupt Pending EII0 PE Sub Element Description Data Format User Program Access PE User Int
233. ents Workbench software is connected to the Micro800 controller 1 On the Connected Components Workbench software open the project for the target controller 2 Click Connect to connect to the target controller On the Device Details toolbar roll over the Secure button The tooltip message Set Change or Clear Micro800 Controller Password Protection is displayed Micro850 7 Micro850 Program Major Fault Not Faulted Run Controller Mode Run t Upload Secure Micro850 Set Change or Clear Micro800 Controller Password Protection 2080 LC50 24QBB Ol o o q r D marso O o 5 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 267 AppendixC _Quickstarts 3 Click Secure button Select Set Password Micro350 E Micro850 Program Major Fault Not Fal Run Controller Mode Run t Upload Micro850 2080 LC50 24QBE 4 The Set Controller Password dialog appears Provide password Confirm the password by providing it again in the Confirm field Set Controller Password Password FSCS SFRSERSERSERSE EE RSE Confirm PERE SE SEL SESSLER EE SS OK Cancel TIP Passwords must have at least eight characters to be valid 5 Click OK Once a password is created any new sessions that try to connect to the controller will have to supply the password to gain exclusive access to the target controller Change Password With an authorized session you
234. equency so that your fastest changing signal is below that of the filter s cut off frequency The cut off frequency should not be confused with the update time The cut off frequency relates to how the digital filter attenuates frequency components of the input signal The update time defines the rate at which an input channel is scanned and its channel data word is updated A lower filter frequency provides a better noise rejection but it also increases the update time A higher filter frequency provides a faster update time but it decreases the noise rejection and effective resolution TIP For quickstart instructions on how to add configure delete and replace your expansion I O module see Configure Your Expansion I O Module The following sample project guides you through the step by step process of adding configuring deleting and replacing expansion I O modules in Connected Components Workbench TIP For more information about using the Connected Components Workbench software you can refer to the Connected Components Workbench Online Help it comes with your software In this sample project you need to create a Connected Components Workbench project with a 2080 LC50 24QWB controller Then configure four expansion I O devices 2085 IF4 2085 1Q32T 2085 OB16 2085 IRT4 following the instructions below These instructions make use of the drag and drop mechanism available in Connected Components Workbench release 2 and high
235. er which allows the user to easily add replace delete devices through simple drag and drop motion Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 79 Chapter 6 Expansion 1 0 Support Add an Expansion 1 0 TIP Expansion O modules are automatically added to a project when using the Discover feature in Connected Components Workbench To add Expansion I O modules to an existing Micro850 controller project do the following 1 On the Project organizer pane right click Micro850 and choose Open i Open Build Upload Import gt Export gt a a arene The Micro850 project page opens in the center pane with a graphical replica of the Micro850 controller on the first tier Controller properties on the second tier and an Output box on the last tier Micro850 vx A Program Major Fault F i Micro850 Hep Disconnected Run Controller Mode Upload Manuals Help 2080 LC50 24QWB iv lt m B Controler Expansion Modules General Memory Serial Port USB Port E Ethernet Internet Protocc Port Settings Port Diagnostics Date and Time Interrupts StarhuntFaults ji v 80 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Expansion I O Support Chapter 6 2 On the Device Toolbox pane found at the rightmost corner of the Connected Components Workbench window go to the Expansion Modu
236. erflow and low preset values are negative numbers the low preset must be a number with a smaller absolute value This is the latest low preset setting which may be updated by PLS function from the PLS data block High Preset Output HSCSTS HPOutput Description Data Format User Program Access HSCSTS HPOutput long word 32 bit binary read only The High Preset Output defines the state 1 ON or 0 OFF of the outputs on the controller when the high preset is reached See Output Mask Bits HSCAPP OutputMask on page 180 for more information on how to directly turn outputs on or off based on the high preset being reached This is the latest high preset output setting which may be updated by PLS function from the PLS data block Low Preset Output HSCSTS LPOutput Description Data Format User Program Access HSCSTS LPOutput long word 32 bit binary read only The Low Preset Output defines the state 1 on 0 off of the outputs on the controller when the low preset is reached See Output Mask Bits HSCAPP OutputMask on page 180 for more information on how to directly turn outputs on or off based on the low preset being reached This is the latest low preset output setting which may be updated by PLS function from the PLS data block Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 HSC High Speed Counter Function Block HSC Parameters Use the Hig
237. errupt Pending binary bit read only PE User Interrupt Pending is a status flag that represents an interrupt is pending This status bit can be monitored or used for logic purposes in the control program if you need to determine when a subroutine cannot execute immediately This bit is automatically set and cleared by the controller The controller can process 1 active and maintain up to 1 pending user interrupt conditions before it sets the lost bit Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Appendix E System Loading Micro830 and Micro850 Power Requirements Controller Module Power Requirement Micro830 and Micro850 without plug in expansion 1 0 10 16 point 5W 24 point 8W 48 point 11W Plug in modules each 1 44W Expansion 1 0 2085 1Q16 0 85 W system bus power consumption 2085 I1Q327T 0 95 W 2085 IA8 075W 2085 IM8 075W 2085 0A8 0 90 W 2085 0B16 1 00 W 2085 0V16 1 00 W 2085 OW8 1 80 W 2085 0W16 3 20 W 2085 IF4 170W 2085 IF8 175W 2085 0F4 370W 2085 IRT4 200W Calculate Total Power for Your Micro830 Micro850 Controller To calculate Total Power for your Micro830 and Micro850 controller use the following formula Total Power Main Unit Power No of Plug ins Plug in Power Sum of Expansion I O Power Example 1 Derive Total Power for a 24 point Micro830 controller with two plug ins Total Power 8 W
238. ers also support two LEDs for EtherNet IP to indicate the following e Module status e Network status See Troubleshooting on page 305 for descriptions of Module and Network status indicators 8 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Programming Software for Micro800 Controllers Agency Certifications Compliance to European Union Directives Chapter 2 About Your Controller Connected Components Workbench is a set of collaborative tools supporting Micro800 controllers It is based on Rockwell Automation and Microsoft Visual Studio technology and offers controller programming device configuration and integration with HMI editor Use this software to program your controllers configure your devices and design your operator interface applications Connected Components Workbench provides a choice of IEC 61131 3 programming languages ladder diagram function block diagram structured text with user defined function block support that optimizes machine control Obtain Connected Components Workbench A free download is available at http ab rockwellautomation com Programmable Controllers Connected Components Workbench Software Use Connected Components Workbench To help you program your controller through the Connected Components Workbench software you can refer to the Connected Components Workbench Online Help it comes with the software e UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment cert
239. ete you see a status screen similar to the following Click OK to complete the update Update Status x Catalog Number 2080 LC10 120WB DK Serial Number FFFFFFFF Ee Current Revision 1 4 View Log New Revision 1 4 _ irae ene agro Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 259 Appendix Quickstarts Establish Communications This quick start shows you how to get RSLinx RSWho to communicate with a Between RSLinx anda Micro830 or Micro850 controller through a USB Micro830 Micro850 1 RSLinx Classic is installed as part of the Connected Components Controller th rough USB Workbench software installation process The minimum version of RSLinx Classic with full Micro800 controller support is 2 57 build 15 released March 2011 2 Power up the Micro830 Micro850 controller 3 Plug USB A B cable directly between your PC and the Micro830 Micro850 controller 4 Windows should discover the new hardware Click No not this time and then click Next Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New ey Hardware Wizard Windows will search for current and updated software by looking on your computer on the hardware installation CD or on the Windows Update Web site with your permission Read our privacy policy Can Windows connect to Windows Update to search for software C Yes this time only Yes now and every time connect a device No not this time Click Next to con
240. eters inches 2080 RTD2 shown 31 5 20 24 mounting screw 0 79 1 hole 62 2 44 terminal block mounting AAA screw hole 45010 D QQOODD C 45811 Side view Front view 102 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Micro800 Plug In Modules and Accessories Chapter 7 Insert Module into Controller Follow the instructions to insert and secure the plug in module to the controller 45012 Position the plug in module with the terminal block facing the front of the controller as shown Snap the module into the module bay Using a screwdriver tighten the 10 12 mm 0 39 0 47 in M3 self tapping screw to torque specifications Plug In Features Micro800 Discrete Input Output and Combination Plug in Modules The following Micro800 discrete plug in modules are supported by Micro830 and Micro850 controllers 2080 IQ4 2080 IQ40B4 2080 IQ40V4 2080 OB4 2080 OV4 These modules convert AC or DC On Off signals from user devices to appropriate logic level for use within the processor They can update the controller with new data whenever a specified input point transitions from On to Off and Off to On Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 103 Chapter7 Micro800 Plug In Modules and Accessories Wire the Modules 2080 104 Back View into terminal block fos a PinA1 1 02 Pin B1 1 00 B OAQOOO PinA2 1 03 Pin B2 1 01 PinA3 COM PinB3
241. f Power Supply 44564 19 Chapter2 About Your Controller Schematic Using ANSI CSA Symbols L1 L2 230V AC Disconnect Fuse MCR 230V AC o i T i Output e Circuits Isolation l Operation of either of these contacts will Transformer remove power from the external 1 0 Master Control Relay MCR x1 VAC OF 2 circuits stopping machine motion Cat No 700 PK400A1 30V AC Emergency Stop l Suppressor i Fuse Push Button Overtrav i Stop Start Cat No 700 N24 ale Limit Switch I O 0 _ ale O o co l L Suppr MCR e MCR 115V AC or bd g 230v ac e 1 0 Circuits DC Power Supply Use NEC Class 2 for UL Listing MCR Lo Hi j r 24 DC 1 0 Line Terminals Connect to terminals of Power l ae Supply Line Terminals Connect to 24V DC terminals of Power Supply 20 44565 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Chapter 3 Install Your Controller This chapter serves to guide the user on installing the controller It includes the following topics Topic Page Controller Mounting Dimensions 21 Mounting Dimensions 21 DIN Rail Mounting 23 Panel Mounting 24 Controller Mounting Mounting Dimensions Dimensions Mounting dimensions do not include mounting feet or DIN rail latches Micro830 10 and 16 Point Controllers 2080 LC30 10QWB
242. firmware revisions for your Micro800 controller For more information on firmware revision compatibility go to http www rockwellautomation com support firmware html OxF023 The controller program has been cleared Download or transfer the program This happened because a power down occurred during program download or transfer from the memory module e the Flash Integrity Test failed Micro810 only OxF050 The embedded 1 0 configuration in the Perform the following user program is invalid e Correct the embedded 1 0 configuration in the user program to match that of the actual hardware configuration e Build and download the program using Connected Components Workbench e Put the Micro800 controller into Run mode e Ifthe error persists be sure to use Connected Components Workbench programming software to develop and download the program OxF100 There is general configuration error Perform the following detected in the motion configuration ae downloaded from the Connected e Correct the axes configuration in the user program Components Workbench software such e If fault is consistent upgrade to the latest software revision of Connected as number of axis or motion execution c ts Workbench interval being configured out of range COMPONENTS YOrkDenel See Motion Axis Configuration in Connected Components Workbench on page 145 0xF110 There is motion resource missing such Perform the following as Motion _DIAG variable n
243. formation required by EN 61131 2 see the appropriate sections in this publication as well as the following Allen Bradley publications e Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Noise Immunity publication 1770 4 1 e Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries publication AG 5 4 e Automation Systems Catalog publication B115 Most applications require installation in an industrial enclosure Pollution Degree 20 to reduce the effects of electrical interference Over Voltage Category 2 and environmental exposure Locate your controller as far as possible from power lines load lines and other sources of electrical noise such as hard contact switches relays and AC motor drives For more information on proper grounding guidelines see the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 1 Pollution Degree 2 is an environment where normally only non conductive pollution occurs except that occasionally temporary conductivity caused by condensation shall be expected 2 Overvoltage Category II is the load level section of the electrical distribution system At this level transient voltages are controlled and do not exceed the impulse voltage capability of the products insulation Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 About Your Controller Chapter 2 WARNING When used in a Class Division 2 hazardous location this equipment must be mounted in a sui
244. frequency nom 50 60 Hz Relay Contacts Ratings Maximum Volts Amperes Make 120V AC Amperes Continuous Volt Amperes 1800V A 240V AC 7 5A 0 75 A 24V DC 1 0A 1 0A 28V A 125V DC 0 22 A Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Environmental Specifications Attribute Temperature operating Specifications Appendix A Value IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 20 65 C 4 149 F Temperature surrounding air max 65 C 149 F Temperature non operating EC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold EC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat EC 60068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock 40 85 C 40 185 F Relative humidity EC 60068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat 5 95 non condensing Vibration EC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500 Hz Shock operating EC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock 25g Shock non operating EC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock DIN mount 25 g PANEL mount 35 g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD immunity IEC 61000 4 2 4 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges Radiated RF immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 80 2000 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pu
245. g starts In this case the homing motion fails and moves continuously to the left until drive or moving part fails to move User needs to make sure the moving part is at the proper location before homing starts MC_HOME_REF_WITH_ABS IMPORTANT f Home switch or Ref Pulse is not configured as Enabled MC_HOME_REF_WITH_ABS 2 homing fails with Error ID MC_FB_ERR_PARAM MC_HOME_REF_WITH_ABS 2 homing procedure performs a homing operation against Home switch plus fine Ref Pulse signal The actual motion sequence is dependent on the home switch limit switch configuration and the Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 161 Chapter9 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO actual status for the switches before homing starts that is when the MC_Home function block is issued Scenario 1 Moving part at right positive side of Home switch before homing Starts The homing motion sequence for this scenario is as follows 1 2 Moving part moves to its left side in negative direction When Home Abs switch is detected the moving part decelerates to stop Moving part moves back in positive direction in creep velocity to detect Home Abs On Off edge Once Home Abs switch On Off is detected start to detect first Ref Pulse signal coming in Once the first Ref Pulse signal comes record the position as mechanical home position and decelerate to stop Move to the conf
246. g value x is as follows Y X Minimum Value of X Range Range of Y Range of X Minimum Value of Y Range Example 1 Find the analog value Y of Type Range 4 20 mA when the Raw Proportional Data X is 20000 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 73 Chapter 6 74 Expansion 1 0 Support Given X 20000 Minimum value of X Range 32768 Range of X 32767 32768 65535 Range of Y 21 3 2 17 8 Minimum value of Y Range 3 2 Using the conversion formula Y 20000 32768 17 8 65535 3 2 6 668 mA Example 2 Find the Raw Proportional value Y of 10 mA X for type range 4 20 mA Given X 10mA Minimum Value of X Range 3 2 mA Minimum value of 4 20 mA Range of X 21 3 2 17 8 mA Range of 4 20 mA Range of Y 32767 32768 65535 Range of Raw Proportional Data Minimum Value of Y Range 32768 Min value of Raw Proportional Data Using the conversion formula Y 7732 15 decimals are not displayed Input Filter For the input modules 2085 IF4 and 2085 IF8 the input filter parameter lets you specify the frequency filter type for each channel Frequency filter type affects noise rejection as explained below Select a frequency filter type considering acceptable noise and response time Through the Connected Components Workbench software you can configure input filter as e 50 60Hz Rejection default e No Filter e 2
247. gestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA DU002 available at http www rockwellautomation com literature Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A S Kar Plaza Ig Merkezi E Blok Kat 6 34752 erenk y stanbul Tel 90 216 5698400 www rockwellautomation com Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation NV Pegasus Park De Kleetlaan 12a 1831 Diegem Belgium Tel 32 2 663 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core F Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Supersedes Publication 2080 UM002C EN E March 2012 Copyright 2012 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the U S A
248. h should not be interrupted 286 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 User Interrupts Appendix D Priority of User Interrupts When multiple interrupts occur the interrupts are serviced based upon their individual priority When an interrupt occurs and another interrupt s has already occurred but has not been serviced the new interrupt is scheduled for execution based on its priority relative to the other pending interrupts At the next point in time when an interrupt can be serviced all the interrupts are executed in the sequence of highest priority to lowest priority If an interrupt occurs while a lower priority interrupt is being serviced executed the currently executing interrupt routine is suspended and the higher priority interrupt is serviced Then the lower priority interrupt is allowed to complete before returning to normal processing If an interrupt occurs while a higher priority interrupt is being serviced executed and the pending bit has been set for the lower priority interrupt the currently executing interrupt routine continues to completion Then the lower priority interrupt runs before returning to normal processing Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 287 Appendix D User Interrupts The priorities from highest to lowest are User Fault Routine highest priority Event Interrupt0 Event Interrupt1 Event Interrupt2 Event
249. h Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Chapter 10 The HSC function block can be used to start stop HSC counting to refresh HSC status to reload HSC setting and to reset HSC accumulator HSC Enable STS HscCmd HscAppData HscStsInfo PlsData 45631 Parameter Parameter Data Type Parameter Description Type Enable Input BOOL Enable function block When Enable TRUE perform the HSC operation specified in HSC command parameter When Enable FALSE there is no HSC operation and no HSC status update HscCmd Input USINT Refer to HSC Commands on page 190 HscAppData Input See HSC APP Data Structure on HSC application configuration Only initial configuration is needed usually page 171 PlsData Input See array of Programmable Limit Programmable Limit Switch PLS Data Switch PLS Function on page 191 HscStsInfo Output See HSC STS HSC Status Data HSC dynamic status Status info is usualy continuously updated during HSC Structure on page 182 counting Sts Output UINT HSC function block execution status Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 HSC Commands HScCmd HscCmd is an input parameter with data type USINT All HSC commands 1 4 are Level commands Users are advised to disable the instruction before updating the command HscCmd 1 starts the HSC mechanism Once the HSC is in running mode the HscCmd 2 must be
250. h channel alarm individually Clamping Limits and Alarm For the output module 2085 OF4 clamping limits the output from the analog module to remain within a range configured by the controller even when the controller commands an output outside that range This safety feature sets a high clamp and a low clamp Once clamps are determined for a module any data received from the controller that exceeds those clamps transitions the output to that limit but not beyond the clamp value It also sets the alarm status bit when the alarm is enabled It is also possible to latch the alarm status bit when the latch configuration is enabled For example an application may set the high clamp on a module for 8V and the low clamp for 8V Ifa controller sends a value corresponding to 9V to the module the module will only apply 8V to its screw terminals You can configure the clamp limit high low clamp the associated alarm and its latching configuration on a per channel basis The following table shows the default values of the High Low Clamps in the order of low clamp value followed by the high clamp value for the respective type range when they are first enabled You can change these values within their full range according to your application Default Range of High Clamp Low Clamp Values Data Format 0 20mA 4 20mA 10 10V 0 10V Raw Proportional Data 32768 29647 29822 29086 31207 31207 32768 29647 Engineering Units 0 20
251. h software Soft Limits Checking on the Function Blocks Function Block Limits Checking MC_MoveAbsolute The target position will be checked against the soft limits before motion _ MC_MoveRelative MC_MoveVelocity The soft limits will be checked dynamically during motion When a soft limit is enabled the axis comes to a stop when the limit is detected during motion The motion is stopped using emergency stop parameters If both hard and soft limits are configured as enabled for two limits in the same direction upper or lower the limits should be configured such that the soft limit is triggered before the hard limit PTO Pulse Limits This limit parameter is not configurable by the user and is the physical limitation of the embedded PTO The limits are set at 0x7FFF0000 and 0x7 FFF0000 pulses for upper and lower limits respectively PTO pulse limits are checked by the controller unconditionally that is the checking is always ON Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 137 Chapter 9 138 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO On a non continuous motion to prevent a moving axis going to ErrorStop status with Motion PTO Pulse limits detected user needs to prevent current position value going beyond PTO Pulse limit On a continuous motion driven by MC_MoveVelocity function block when the current position value goes beyond PTO pulse limit PTO pulse current p
252. he 48 point controllers can support up to six serial ports one embedded and five plug ins and so consequently six separate Modbus networks Only Modbus RTU over a serial port is supported In addition the Micro850 controller supports Modbus TCP server through the Ethernet port Endian Configuration Modbus protocol is big endian in that the most significant byte of a 16 bit word is transmitted first Micro800 is also big endian so byte ordering does not have to be reversed For Micro800 data types larger than 16 bits for example DINT LINT REAL LREAL multiple Modbus addresses may be required but the most significant byte is always first Mapping Address Space and supported Data Types Since Micro800 uses symbolic variable names instead of physical memory addresses a mapping from symbolic Variable name to physical Modbus addressing is supported in Connected Components Workbench software for example InputSensorA is mapped to Modbus address 100001 By default Micro800 follows the six digit addressing specified in the latest Modbus specification For convenience conceptually the Modbus address is mapped with the following address ranges The Connected Components Workbench mapping screen follows this convention Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 249 Appendix B Modbus Mapping for Micro800 Variable Data Type 0 Coils 1 Discrete Inputs 3 Inpu
253. he wire barrel around the wire using small needle nose pliers 4 Crimp the insulation barrel around the wire insulation using small needle nose pliers 1 m Stripped wire C Tang L Insulation barrel 44921 5 Solder wire and wire barrel together using lead free solder and soldering pencil 68 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Expansion I O Support Chapter 6 6 Insert the assembled wire contact into the terminal socket Push the wire contact in until the tang latches Make sure the tang is properly latched by lightly pulling on the wire Terminal connector Terminal sockets Wire contact 44922 Option 2 Use Allen Bradley 1492 Connector Cables with Flying Leads Preassembled 40 conductor cables with the 40 pin connector on one end and flying leads on the other end are also available from Allen Bradley They are available in 1 m 2 5 m and 5 m lengths The catalog numbers from shortest to longest are e 1492 CAB010U62 or 1492 CAB010P62 e 1492 CAB025U62 or 1492 CAB025P62 e 1492 CAB050U62 or 1492 CAB050P62 The U62 cables route the cable upward when plugged into the module while P62 cables route the cable downward when plugged into the module Option 3 Use Allen Bradley 1492 Cables with Keyed Connectors a5 2085 1032T Module TT Ww 1492 CABLExx Connects module to DIN rail mountable
254. hen wiring your analog channels e The analog common COM is not electrically isolated from the system and is connected to the power supply common e Analog channels are not isolated from each other e Use Belden cable 8761 or equivalent shielded wire e Under normal conditions the drain wire shield should be connected to the metal mounting panel earth ground Keep the shield connection to earth ground as short as possible e To ensure optimum accuracy for voltage type inputs limit overall cable impedance by keeping all analog cables as short as possible Locate the I O system as close to your voltage type sensors or actuators as possible Minimize Electrical Noise on Analog Channels Inputs on analog channels employ digital high frequency filters that significantly reduce the effects of electrical noise on input signals However because of the variety of applications and environments where analog controllers are installed and operated it is impossible to ensure that all environmental noise will be removed by the input filters Several specific steps can be taken to help reduce the effects of environmental noise on analog signals e install the Micro800 system in a properly rated enclosure for example NEMA Make sure that the shield is properly grounded e use Belden cable 8761 for wiring the analog channels making sure that the drain wire and foil shield are properly earth grounded e route the Belden cable separat
255. his table illustrates this relationship Effect of HSC Output Mask on Base Unit Outputs Output Variable 32 Bit Signed Integer Data Word 32 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 1 0 HSCAPP HPOutput high 0 1 0 1 JO 1 JO 1 J0 J0 1 1 JO JO JO m 1 J0 J0 preset output HSCAPP OutputMask 1 1 0 JO JO 0 JO JO JO 1 J1 JO JO JO 1 41 J0 output mask Embedded output 10 poin Embedded output 16 point Embedded output 24 point Embedded output 48 point 180 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Use the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Chapter 10 Effect of HSC Output Mask on Base Unit Outputs Output Variable 32 Bit Signed Integer Data Word 32 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 j4 3 2 J1 JO The outputs shown in the black boxes are the outputs under the control of the HSC sub system The mask defines which outputs can be controlled The high preset output or low preset output values HSCAPP HPOutput or HSCAPP LPOutput define if each output is either ON 1 or OFF 0 Another way to view this is that the high or low preset output is written through the output mask with the output mask acting like a filter The b
256. i ar Li 31 5 tole a j m i foo00 24 200 M oa B a O g g i g g g g a o O p A y N o mesesseeeeeeeeeseee sg T 45910 15 14 13 12 11 10 6 10 8 Controller Description Description Description 1 Status indicators k Expansion I O slot cover 2 Optional power supply slot 10 DIN rail mounting latch 3 Plug in latch 11 Mode switch 4 Plug in screw hole 12 Type B connector USB port 5 40 pin high speed plug in connector 13 RS232 RS485 non isolated combo serial port 6 Removable 1 0 terminal block 14 RJ 45 Ethernet connector with embedded green and yellow LED indicators 7 Right side cover 15 Optional power supply 8 Mounting screw hole mounting foot Status Indicator Description Description Description 16 Input status 21 Fault status 17 Module Status 22 Force status 18 Network Status 23 Serial communications status 19 Power status 24 Output status 20 Run status Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Hardware Overview Chapter 1 Micro850 48 point Controllers and Status Indicators
257. ic energy and capacitive storage energy respectively This may be written in a standard form such as f t t dy dt y t where T is the system time constant f is the forcing function and y is the system state variable In the cooling of a fluid tank example it can be modeled by the thermal capacitance C of the fluid and thermal resistance R of the walls of the tank The system time constant will be RC the forcing function will be the ambient temperature and the system state variable will be the fluid temperature A second order system can be described by two independent energy storage elements which exchange stored energy Examples of second order systems are a motor driving a disk flywheel with the motor coupled to the flywheel via a shaft with torsional stiffness or an electric circuit composed of a current source driving a series LR inductor and resistor with a shunt C capacitor The energy storage elements for these systems are the rotational kinetic energy and torsion spring energy for the former and the inductive and capacitive storage energy for the Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 IPID Function Block Appendix H latter Motor drive systems and heating systems can be typically modeled by the LR and C electric circuit PID Code Sample RST_FB FB_PRESET The illustration PID Code Sample shows sample code for controlling the PID application example shown before Developed using Functio
258. ice Micro830 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 265 AppendixC Quickstarts 10 Click Finish to complete Rockwell Automation s EDS Wizard You have successfully completed the EDS wizard If the Micro830 Micro850 still shows up as a 1756 Module then you are probably running pre release firmware which is reporting itself as Major Revision 0 which does not match the embedded EDS file To confirm right click the device and select Device Properties firmware Revision is Major Minor AB_VBP 1 16 Device Name 2080 Lc30 240wW8 Vendor fallen Bradley Company Product Type ie Product Code ED l Revision 0 20 Serial Number FFF FFFFF Faults 266 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Configure Controller Password Quickstarts Appendix C Set change and clear the password on a target controller through the Connected Components Workbench software IMPORTANT The following instructions are supported on Connected Components Workbench revision 2 and Micro800 controllers with firmware revision 2 For more information about the controller password feature on Micro800 controllers see Controller Security on page 235 Set Controller Password IMPORTANT After creating or changing the controller password you need to power down the controller in order for the password to be saved In the following instructions the Connected Compon
259. ified for US and Canada UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations certified for U S and Canada e CE marked for all applicable directives e C Tick marked for all applicable acts e KC Korean Registration of Broadcasting and Communications Equipment compliant with Article 58 2 of Radio Waves Act Clause 3 This product has the CE mark and is approved for installation within the European Union and EEA regions It has been designed and tested to meet the following directives Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 9 Chapter2 About Your Controller Installation Considerations 10 EMC Directive This product is tested to meet Council Directive 2004 108 EC Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC and the following standards in whole or in part documented in a technical construction file e EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B e EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 11 e EN 61000 6 4 EMC Part 6 4 Generic Standards Emission Standard for Industrial Environments e EN 61000 6 2 EMC Part 6 2 Generic Standards Immunity for Industrial Environments This product is intended for use in an industrial environment Low Voltage Directive This product is tested to meet Council Directive 2006 95 ECLow Voltage by applying the safety requirements of EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Part 2 Equipment Requirements and Tests For specific in
260. ignal Once the first Ref Pulse signal comes record the position as the mechanical home position and decelerate to stop Move to the configured home position The mechanical home position recorded during moving back sequence plus the home offset configured for the axis through the Connected Components Workbench software Scenario 3 Moving part at left negative side of Lower Limit switch before homing starts In this case the homing motion fails and moves continuously to the left until drive or moving part fails to move User needs to make sure the moving part at the proper location before homing starts MC_HOME_DIRECT MC_HOME_DIRECT 4 homing procedure performs a static homing by directly forcing an actual position No physical motion is performed in this mode This is equivalent to a MC_SetPosition action except that Axis Homed status will be on once MC_Home mode 4 is performed successfully Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Chapter 10 Use the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch High Speed Counter All Micro830 and Micro850 controllers except for 2080 LCxx AWB support Overview up to six high speed counter HSC inputs The HSC feature in Micro800 consists of two main components the high speed counter hardware embedded inputs in the controller and high speed counter instructions in the application program High speed counter instructions apply configurat
261. igured home position The mechanical home position recorded during moving back sequence plus the home offset configured for the axis through the Connected Components Workbench software Scenario 2 Moving part between Lower Limit and Home switch before homing starts The homing motion sequence for this scenario is as follows 1 2 Moving part moves to its left side in negative direction When Lower Limit switch is detected the moving part decelerates to stop or stops immediately according to Limit Switch Hard Stop configuration Moving part moves back in positive direction in creep velocity to detect Home switch On Off edge Once Home Abs switch On Off is detected start to detect first Ref Pulse signal Once the first Ref Pulse signal comes record the position as mechanical home position and decelerate to stop Move to the configured home position The mechanical home position recorded during moving back sequence plus the home offset configured for the axis through the Connected Components Workbench software IMPORTANT inthis case if Lower limit switch is not configured or not wired the 162 homing motion will fail and moves continuously to the left until the drive or moving part fails to move Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO Chapter 9 Scenario 3 Moving part on Lower Limit or Home switch before homing st
262. ill Standstill Discrete Motion Continuous Motion A these variable inputs and outputs ATTENTION Each motion function block has a set of variable inputs and outputs that allows you to control a specific motion instruction Refer to the Connected Components Workbench Online Help for a description of 124 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO Chapter 9 General Rules for the Motion Control Function Blocks To work with motion control function blocks users need to be familiar with the following general rules General Rules for the Motion Function Block Parameter Input parameters General Rules When Execute is True The parameters are used with the rising edge of the Execute input To modify any parameter it is necessary to change the input parameter s and to trigger motion again When Enable is True The parameters are used with the rising edge of the Enable input and can be modified continuously Inputs exceeding application limits If a function block is configured with parameters that result in a violation of application limits the instance of the function block generates an error In this case the Error output is flagged On and error information will be indicated by the output ErrorlD The controller in most cases will remain in Run mode and no motion error will be reported as a major controller fault Po
263. ime the program scan cycle time will be prolonged The Watchdog timeout fault 0xD011 could be reported if the impact of these activities is underestimated and the Watchdog timeout is set marginally Practically if the load of one or several of the above activities is heavy you should provide a reasonable buffer when you calculate the Watchdog timeout setting Periodic Execution of Programs For applications where periodic execution of programs with precise timing is required such as for PID it is recommended that STI Selectable Timed Interrupt be used to execute the program STI provides precise time intervals It is not recommended that the system variable __ SYSVA_TCYCYCTIME be used to periodically execute all programs as this also causes all communication to execute at this rate WARNING Communication timeouts may occur if programmed cycle time is set too slow for example 200 ms to maintain communications System Variable for Programmed Cycle Time Variable __SYSVA_TCYCYCTIME Description Programmed cycle time Note Programmed cycle time only accepts values in multiples of 10 ms If the entered value Is not a multiple of 10 it will be rounded up to the next multiple of 10 Power Up and First Scan On firmware revision 2 and later all digital output variables driven by the I O scan gets cleared on powerup and during transition to RUN mode Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 113
264. in Connected Components Workbench Pulses per revolution 8388608 8388608 Pulse per revolution must be in no conversion the range of 0 0001 to 8388607 user unit Upper Soft Limit 10730175 1 073018E 7 Upper Soft limit must be greater than Lower Soft Limit The range is from 0 exclusive to 1 073217E 07 user unit Lower Soft Limit 10730175 1 073018E 7 Lower Soft limit must be smaller than Upper Soft Limit The range is from 1 073217E 07 to 0 exclusive user unit 1 On the axis configuration page in Connected Components Workbench an input field with a red border indicates that the value that has been entered is invalid A tooltip message should let you know the expected range of values for the parameter The range of values presented in the tooltip messages are also presented in REAL data format For the motion function block parameters data validaton is performed during Run time The corresponding error will be given if the validation fails 154 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO Chapter 9 Variable Monitor Example The Variable Monitor displays six significant digits with rounding although the real data type still contains seven significant digits In this example the user has entered the Target Position value of 2345 678 This value is rounded up to six digits 2345 68 in the Variable Monitoring screen fei Vari
265. in user unit per second e target position in user unit e target velocity in user unit per second Homing Function Block The homing function block MC_Home commands the axis to perform the search home sequence The Position input is used to set the absolute position when the reference signal is detected and configured home offset is reached This function block completes at StandStill if the homing sequence is successful MC_Home only can be aborted by the function blocks MC_Stop or MC_Power Any abort attempt from other moving function blocks will result in function Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 157 Chapter 9 158 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO block failure with Error ID MC_FB_ERR_STATE However homing operation is not interrupted and can be executed as usual If MC_Home is aborted before it completes the previously searched home position is considered as invalid and the axis Homed status is cleared After axis power on is done the axis Homed status is reset to 0 not homed On most scenarios the MC_Home function block needs to be executed to calibrate the axis position against the axis home configured after MC_Power On is done There are five homing modes supported on Micro830 and Micro850 controllers Homing Modes Homing Homing Mode name Homing Mode Description Mode Value 0x00 MC_HOME_ABS_SWITCH Homing process searches for Home Absolute swit
266. ion 1 0 Modules Certification when product is marked 1 c UL us Value UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E322657 UL Listed for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations certified for U S and Canada See UL File E334470 CE European Union 2004 108 EC EMC Directive compliant with EN 61326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions KC Korean Registration of Broadcasting and Communications Equipment compliant with Article 58 2 of Radio Waves Act Clause 3 1 See the Product Certification link athttp www rockwellautomation com products certification for Declaration of Conformity Certificates and other certification details 248 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Appendix B Modbus Mapping for Micro800 Modbus Mapping All Micro800 controllers except the Micro8 10 12 point models support Modbus RTU over a serial port through the embedded non isolated serial port The 2080 SERIALISOL isolated serial port plug in module also supports Modbus RTU Both Modbus RTU master and slave are supported Although performance may be affected by the program scan time t
267. ion 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO Chapter 9 TIP To help you edit these motion properties see Edit Axis Configuration on page 147 You can also learn more about axis configuration parameters Edit Axis Configuration General Parameters 1 On the axis configuration tree click General The lt Axis Name gt General properties tab appears Simulator General Axis Name Simulator PTO Channel EMO v Pulse Output 10_EM_DO_00 Direction Output 10_EM_DO_03 Drive Enable Output L_ In Position Input Output 10_EM_D0_06 w Active Level High Drive Ready Input E Touch Probe Input Input 10_EM_DI_03 Active Level High v 2 Edit General parameters You can refer to the table for a description of the general configuration parameters for a motion axis IMPORTANT To edit these general parameters you can refer to Input and Output Signals on page 119 for more information about fixed and configurable outputs General Parameters Parameter Description and Values Axis Name User defined Provides a name for the motion axis PTO Channel Shows the list of available PTO channels Pulse output Presents the logical variable name of the Direction Output channel based on the PTO channel value that has been assigned Direction output Presents the logical variable name of the Direction Output channel based on the PTO channel
268. ion file 191 High Speed Counter Overview 167 HSC High Speed Counter Function Block 191 302 HSC APP Data Structure 173 HSC function file 191 HSC Interrupt Configuration 197 HSC Interrupt POU 198 HSC Interrupt Status Information 199 HSC Interrupts 196 HSC STS Data Structure 184 HSC_SET_STS Function Block 193 home marker 120 l in position signal 121 input filter 74 85 input parameters 125 input states on power down 16 installation 10 21 INT instruction 292 293 interrupt subroutine instruction 292 293 interrupts interrupt instructions 292 overview 287 selectable timed start STS instruction 292 user fault routine 291 user interrupt disable UID instruction 294 user interrupt enable UIE instruction 295 user interrupt flush UIF instruction 296 IPID function Block 335 isolation transformers power considerations 15 J Index 339 jerk inputs general rules 125 L low alarm 85 low low alarm 85 lower Negative limit switch 119 120 master control relay 16 emergency stop switches 17 using ANSI CSA symbols schematic 20 using IEC symbols schematic 19 master control relay circuit periodic tests 14 MC_AbortTrigger 123 MC_Halt 124 129 131 133 MC_Home 124 MC_MoveAhbsolute 124 129 MC_MoveRelative 124 129 MC_MoveVelocity 124 129 MC_Power 123 MC_ReadAxisError 123 MC_ReadBoolParameter 123 MC_ReadParameter 123 MC_ReadStatus 123 MC_Reset 123 134 MC_SetPosition 123 MC_Stop 124 129 133 MC_Touch
269. ion to the high speed counter hardware and updates the image accumulator have a basic understanding of the following ATTENTION To use the Micro800 HSC feature effectively you need to e HSC components and data elements The first sections of the chapter provides a detailed description of these components Quickstart instructions see page 255 are also available to guide you through setting up a sample HSC project e Programming and working with elements in Connected Components Workbench The user needs to have a working knowledge of programming through ladder diagram structured text or function block diagram to be able to work with the HSC function block and variables ATTENTION Additional information is available on the HSC function A block and its elements in the Connected Components Workbench Online Help that comes with your Connected Components Workbench installation This chapter describes how to use the HSC function and also contains sections on the HSC and HSC_ SET_STS function blocks as follows High Speed Counter HSC Data Structures HSC High Speed Counter Function Block HSC_SET_STS Function Block Programmable Limit Switch PLS Function HSC Interrupts Programmable Limit Switch The Programmable Limit Switch function allows you to configure the High Speed Counter to operate as a PLS Programmable Limit Switch or rotary Overview cam switch For more information see Programmable Limit Switch PLS Function
270. ional logic This bit can be cleared 0 by the control program and is also cleared by the HSC sub system whenever these conditions are detected e Low Preset Interrupt executes e High Preset Interrupt executes e Underflow Interrupt executes Underflow Interrupt HSCSTS UFCauselnter Description Data Format HSC Modes User Program Access HSCSTS UFCauselnter bit 229 read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode HSCAPRHSCMode on page 172 The Underflow Interrupt status bit is set 1 when the HSC accumulator counts through the underflow value and the HSC interrupt is triggered This bit can be used in the control program to identify that the underflow condition caused the HSC interrupt If the control program needs to perform any specific control action based on the underflow this bit is used as conditional logic This bit can be cleared 0 by the control program and is also cleared by the HSC sub system whenever these conditions are detected e Low Preset Interrupt occurs Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 185 Chapter 10 186 Use the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch e High Preset Interrupt occurs 8 p e Overflow Interrupt occurs High Preset Interrupt HSCSTS HPCauselnter Description Data Format HSC Modes JUser Program Access HSCSTS HPCauselnter bit 0 9 read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode HSCAPPHSCMode on pag
271. is Manual Additional Resources Read this preface to familiarize yourself with the rest of the manual It provides information concerning e who should use this manual e the purpose of this manual e related documentation e supporting information for Micro800 Use this manual if you are responsible for designing installing programming or troubleshooting control systems that use Micro800 controllers You should have a basic understanding of electrical circuitry and familiarity with relay logic If you do not obtain the proper training before using this product This manual is a reference guide for Micro800 controllers plug in modules and accessories It describes the procedures you use to install wire and troubleshoot your controller This manual e explains how to install and wire your controllers e gives you an overview of the Micro800 controller system Refer to the Online Help provided with Connected Components Workbench software for more information on programming your Micro800 controller These documents contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products Resource Description Micro800 Programmable Controller External AC Information on mounting and wiring the optional Power Supply Installation Instructions external power supply 2080 IN001 Micro830 Programmable Controllers Installation Information on mounting and wiring the Instructions 2080 IN002 Micro830
272. it 21 Plug In Module UPM1 1048576 bit 20 Plug In Module UPMO 524288 bit 19 STI Selectable Timed Interrupt STI3 262144 bit 18 STI Selectable Timed Interrupt STI2 131072 bit 17 STI Selectable Timed Interrupt STI 65536 bit 16 STI Selectable Timed Interrupt STIO 32768 bit 15 Ell Event Input Interrupt Event 7 16384 bit 14 Ell Event Input Interrupt Event 6 8192 bit 13 EIl Event Input Interrupt Event 5 4096 bit 12 Ell Event Input Interrupt Event 4 2048 bit 11 HSC High Speed Counter HSC5 1024 bit 10 HSC High Speed Counter HSC4 512 bit 9 HSC High Speed Counter HSC3 256 bit 8 HSC High Speed Counter HSC2 128 bit 7 HSC High Speed Counter HSC1 64 bit 6 HSC High Speed Counter HSCO 32 bit 5 Ell Event Input Interrupt Event 3 16 bit 4 Ell Event Input Interrupt Event 2 8 bit 3 Ell Event Input Interrupt Event 1 4 bit 2 Ell Event Input Interrupt Event 0 2 bit 1 UFR User Fault Routine Interrupt UFR 1 bit 0 reserved Using the Selectable Timed Configure the STI function from the Interrupt Configuration window Interrupt STI Function 296 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 User Interrupts Appendix D Selectable Time Interrupt STI Function Configuration and Status Add Selectable Timed Interrupt ST Properties Intemupt Type Selectable Timed Interupt ST STID STIO x STI Description ST10 General Program ball
273. it is smaller than most velocity used in the motion function block e When the target velocity is smaller than Start Stop velocity move the axis immediately at the target velocity e When the target velocity is NOT smaller than Start Stop velocity move the axis immediately at Start Stop velocity Real Data Resolution Certain data elements and axis properties use REAL data format single precision floating point format Real data has seven digit resolution and digit values entered by the user that are longer than seven digits are converted See the following examples REAL Data Conversion Examples User value Converted to 0 12345678 0 1234568 1234 1234567 1234 123 12345678 1 234568E 07 exponential format 0 000012345678 1 234568E 05 exponential format 2147418166 2 147418 E09 0 12345678 0 1234568 If the number of digits is greater than seven 7 and the eighth digit is greater than or equal to 5 then the 7th digit is rounded up For example Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 153 Chapter9 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO 21474185 rounded to 2 147419E 07 21474186 rounded to 2 147419E 07 If the eighth digit is lt 5 no rounding is done and the seventh digit remains the same For example 21474181 rounded to 2 147418E 07 Examples for Motion Configuration 1 Parameter Actual Value Converted Tooltip Error Value Entered by User Value
274. its e Soft Limits e PTO Pulse Limits TIP See Motion Axis Configuration in Connected Components Workbench on page 145 for information on how to configure limits and stop profiles and the acceptable value range for each If any one of these limits is reached on a moving axis except on homing an over travel limit error will be reported and the axis will be stopped based on configured behavior axisl Limits Hard Limits When hard limit is reached apply Emergency Stop Profile 7 Lower Hard Limit 7 Upper Hard Limit Active Level Low X Active Level kow Mi Switch Input 10_EM_DLOO Switch Input 10_EM_DLOi Soft Limits When soft limit is reached Emergency Stop Profile will be applied _ Lower Soft Limit 0 0 mm F Upper Soft Limit 00 mm Sample Limits configuration in Connected Components Workbench Hard Limits Hard limits refer to the input signals received from physical hardware devices such as limit switches and proximity sensors These input signals detect the presence of the load at the maximum upper and minimum lower extents of allowable motion of the load or movable structure that carries the load such as a load tray on a transfer shuttle Hardware limits are mapped to discrete inputs that are associated with data tags variables When a hard limit switch is enabled the axis comes to a stop when the limit switch is detected during motion If hard stop on hard limit switch is configured as ON and the
275. its in the gray boxes are unused For the 10 point controller the first 4 bits of the mask word are used and the remaining mask bits are not functional because they do not correlate to any physical outputs on the base unit For the 16 24 and 48 point controllers the first 6 10 and 20 bits of the mask word are used respectively The mask bit pattern can be configured only during initial setup High Preset Output HSCAPP HPOutput Description HSCAPP HPOutput Data Format long word 32 bit binary User Program Access read write The High Preset Output defines the state 1 ON or 0 OFF of the outputs on the controller when the high preset is reached For more information on how to directly turn outputs on or off based on the high preset being reached see Output Mask Bits HSCAPP OutputMask on page 180 The high output bit pattern can be configured during initial setup or while the controller is operating Use the HSC function block to load the new parameters while the controller is operating Low Preset Output HSCAPP LPOutput Description HSCAPPLPOutput Data Format long word 32 bit binary User Program Access read write The Low Preset Output defines the state 1 on 0 off of the outputs on the controller when the low preset is reached See Output Mask Bits HSCAPP OutputMask on page 180 for more information on how to directly turn outputs on or off
276. ive or negative is considered and defines whether the direction is positive or negative This means that if the product of velocity and direction is 3 then direction type is negative MC_MoveVelocity Supported Direction Types Direction Type Value used Direction description Positive direction 1 Specific for motion rotation direction Also called clockwise direction for rotation motion Current direction 0 Current direction instructs the axis to continue its motion with new input parameters without direction change The direction type is valid only when the axis is moving and the MC_MoveVelocity is called Negative direction 1 Specific for motion rotation direction Also referred to as counter clockwise direction for rotation motion 0 Data type short integer Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 139 Chapter9 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO Axis Elements and Data Types Axis_Ref Data Type Axis Refisa data structure that contains information on a motion axis It is used as an input and output variable in all motion function blocks One axis_ref instance is created automatically in the Connected Components Workbench software when the user adds one motion axis to the configuration The user can monitor this variable in controller debug mode through the software when the motion engine is active or in the user application as part of user logic It can also be
277. ks you can refer to Connected Components Workbench Online Help that comes with your Connected Components Workbench installation IMPORTANT The PTO function can only be used with the controller s embedded 1 0 It cannot be used with expansion I O modules Use the Micro800 Motion Control Feature The Micro800 motion control feature has the following elements New users need to have a basic understanding of the function of each element to effectively use the feature Components of Motion Control Element Description Page Pulse Train Outputs Consists of one pulse output and one direction output A standard interface to control a servo or stepper drive e Input and Output Signals on page 119 From a system point of view an axis is a mechanical apparatus that is driven by a motor and drive combination The drive receives position commands through the Micro800 pulse train outputs interface based upon the PLC execution of motion function blocks On the Micro800 controller it is a pulse train output and a set of inputs outputs and configuration e Motion Axis and Parameters on page 133 e Motion Axis Configuration in Connected Components Workbench on page 145 Motion Function Blocks A set of instructions that configure or act upon an axis of motion e Connected Components Workbench Online Help e Motion Control Function Blocks on page 123 e Axis Ref Data Type on
278. l 672 80 260 C 112 500 F 0 Q Copper 427 200 260 C 328 500 F Ohms 0 500 Ohms Data format You can configure the following data formats for channels 0 3 through the Connected Components Workbench software Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Expansion I O Support Chapter 6 Engineering Units x 1 If you select engineering units x 1 as the data format for a Thermocouple and RTD input the module scales input data to the actual temperature values for the selected Thermocouple RTD type per Thermocouple RTD standard It expresses temperatures in 0 1 C F units For resistance inputs the module expresses resistance in 0 1 ohm per count For mV inputs the module expresses it in 0 01 mV per count Engineering Units x 10 For a Thermocouple or RTD input the module scales input data to the actual temperature values for the selected Thermocouple RTD type per Thermocouple RTD standard With this format the module expresses temperatures in 1 C F units For resistance inputs the module expresses resistance in 1 ohm per count For mV inputs the module expresses it in 0 1 mV per count Raw Proportional Data Format The value presented to the controller is proportional to the selected input and scaled into the maximum data range allowed by the bit resolution of the A D converter For example the full data value range for a thermocouple type B 300 1800 C is mapped to
279. l Relay Circuit Any part can fail including the switches in a master control relay circuit The failure of one of these switches would most likely cause an open circuit which would be a safe power off failure However if one of these switches shorts out it no longer provides any safety protection These switches should be tested periodically to assure they will stop machine motion when needed The following explains power considerations for the micro controllers Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 About Your Controller Chapter 2 Isolation Transformers You may want to use an isolation transformer in the AC line to the controller This type of transformer provides isolation from your power distribution system to reduce the electrical noise that enters the controller and is often used as a step down transformer to reduce line voltage Any transformer used with the controller must have a sufficient power rating for its load The power rating is expressed in volt amperes VA Power Supply Inrush During power up the Micro800 power supply allows a brief inrush current to charge internal capacitors Many power lines and control transformers can supply inrush current for a brief time If the power source cannot supply this inrush current the source voltage may sag momentarily The only effect of limited inrush current and voltage sag on the Micro800 is that the power supply capacitors charge more slowly Ho
280. l Shock 40 85 C 40 185 F North American temp code T4 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Specifications Appendix A Certifications Certification when Value product if marked c UL us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E322657 UL Listed for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations certified for U S and Canada See UL File E334470 CE European Union 2004 108 EC EMC Directive compliant with EN 61326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions 1 See the Product Certification link at http www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details Event Input Interrupt Support Ell Inputs Micro800 Controller All inputs support Ell 2080 10 point 6 inputs 0 5 Yes 2080 16 point 10 inputs 0 9 2080 24 point 14 inputs 0 13 2080 48 point 16 inputs 0 15 No HSC Support HSC Inputs Micro800 Controller Number of 4 input HSC Number of 2 input HSC 2080 10 point 1 HSCO 2 HSCO 1 2080 16 point 2080 24 point 2 HSCO 2 4 HSC0 1 2 3 2080 48 point 3 HSCO 2 4 6 HSCO 1 2 3 4 5 HSC I
281. les folder Device Toolbox Discover Catalog we Expansion Modules 2085 148 2085 IF4 2085 IFS 2085 IM8 2085 IQ16 E 2085 IRT4 3 Click and drag 2085 IQ32T to the right of the controller graphic at the center pane Four blue slots appear to indicate available slots for expansion I O modules Drop 2085 IQ32T on the first and rightmost slot against the controller 2080 LC50 24QWB Drag and drop the expansion 1 0 device in the slot Expansion 0 slots 2085 ECR 2080 LC50 24QWB The device appears in the slot where you have dropped it 2085 1032T Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 81 Chapter6 Expansion 1 0 Support 4 From the Expansion Modules folder on the Device Toolbox pane drag and drop 2085 IF4 on the second Expansion I O slot next to 2085 IQ32T 2080 LC50 24QWB COO 2085 F4 TIP To move an expansion I O device to another slot simply drag and drop the device to the preferred slot For step by step instructions on how to delete and replace expansion I O devices see Delete and Replace an Expansion 1 0 Configuration on page 92 5 From the Expansion Modules folder on the Device Toolbox drag and drop 2085 OB16 on the third Expansion I O slot next to 2085 IF4 6 From the Expansion Modules folder on the Device Toolbox pane drag and drop 2085 IRT4 on the fourth Expansion I O slot next to 2085 IRT4 TIP You c
282. ll Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Quickstarts Appendix C 3 Right click UntitledLD and select Open UntitledLD POU Project Organizer Name Project20 TH Micro830 D Programs E AKO untitled i Local Variables Global Variables 4 From the Toolbox double click Direct Contact to add it to the rung or drag and drop Direct Contact onto the Rung UntitledLD POU 5 Double click the Direct Contact you have just added to bring up the Variable Selector dialog Click I O Micro830 tab Assign the Direct Contact to input 5 by selecting _IO_EM_DI_05 Click OK ES Variable Selector Name Type Global Scope Local Scope _ 0_EM_DI_05 BOOL v Micro830 v UntitledLD1 _I0_EM_DO_17 _I0_EM_DO_18 _I0_EM_DO_19 _I0_EM_DI_o0 _I0_EM_DI_01 _I0_EM_DI_02 _I0_EM_DI_03 _I0_EM_DI_04 _10_EM_DI_05 _I0_EM_DI_06 _I0_EM_DI_07 Im Cha mI no BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL DANI Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 273 Appendix Quickstarts 6 To the right of the Direct Contact add a function block by double clicking function block from the Toolbox or dragging and dropping the function block onto the rung UntitledLD POU 7 Double click the function block to open up Instruc
283. ll Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 39 Chapter4 Wire Your Controller 2080 0F2 2080 0F2 Terminal block B1 V0 0 n B2 00 0 A1 COM O Q C Pin A2 COM PinB3V0 1 Q Voltage load Ls Cable shield Pin B4 CO 1 Pin A3 COM Pin A4 COM Current load Cable shield C 45622 ATTENTION A1 A4 are shorted to the main ground There is no isolation between field and main unit power supply 40 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Wire Your Controller Chapter 4 2080 IF4 Terminal Block Wiring 2080 IF4 Terminal block Vino Viino O ANLG Com Voltage Transmitter lini ANLG Com lin2 ANLG Com 2 wire current transmitter 45623 A ATTENTION Analog inputs are not isolated Embedded Serial Port The embedded serial port is a non isolated RS232 RS485 serial port which is Wiring targeted to be used for short distances lt 3 m to devices such as HMIs See Embedded Serial Port Cables on page 7 for a list of cables that can be used with the embedded serial port 8 pin Mini DIN connector For example the 1761 CBL PM02 cable is typically used to connect the embedded serial port to Panel View Component HMI using RS232 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 41 Chapter4 Wire Your Controller Embedded Serial Port Pinout
284. ller e Replace the plug in I O module e f the error persists refer to Micro800 Plug In Modules and Accessories on page 101 OxFODz When power was applied to the plug in Perform the following m Era a a A e Correct the plug in I O module configuration in the user program e Build and download the program using Connected Components Workbench e Put the Micro800 controller into Run mode OxFOEz The plug in 1 0 module configuration Perform the following Sree 0 e Correct the plug in I O module configuration in the user program e Build and download the program using Connected Components Workbench e Put the Micro800 controller into Run mode 312 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Troubleshooting Appendix F List of Error Codes for Micro800 controllers Error Code Description Recommended Action OxD011 The program scan time exceeded the Perform one of the following watchdog timeout value e Determine if the program is caught in a loop and correct the problem e n the user program increase the watchdog timeout value that is set in the system variable _SYSVA_TCYWDG and then build and download the program using Connected Components Workbench OxF830 An error occurred in the Ell configuration Review and change the Ell configuration in the Micro800 controller properties OxF840 An error occurred in the HSC Review and change the HSC configuration in the Micro800 controller propertie
285. lowing e Cycle power the Micro800 controller or e Replace the slot number z module If the error persists contact your local Rockwell Automation technical support representative For contact information see http support rockwellautomation com MySupport asp OxF2Bz z indicates the slot number of the expansion I O If z 0 then the slot number cannot be identified Expansion I O configuration fault Perform the following e Correct the expansion IO module configuration in the user program to match that of the actual hardware configuration e Check the expansion I O module operation and condition e Cycle power to the Micro800 controller e Replace the expansion I O module For the following four error codes z is the slot number of the plug in module If z 0 then the slot number cannot be identified OxFOAz The plug in I O module experienced an Perform one of the following error duning operation e Check the condition and operation of the plug in 1 0 module e Cycle power to the Micro800 controller e f the error persists see Micro800 Plug In Modules and Accessories on page 101 OxFOBz The plug in 1 0 module configuration Perform one of the following pS o e Correct the plug in 1 0 module configuration in the user program to match that of the actual hardware configuration e Check the condition and operation of the plug in 1 0 module e Cycle power to the Micro800 contro
286. lse 100 AM 900 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 1890 MHz 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 2000 2700 MHz EFT B immunity IEC 61000 4 4 2 kV 5 kHz on power ports 2 kV 5 kHz on signal ports 1 kV 5 kHz on communication ports Surge transient immunity IEC 61000 4 5 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on power ports 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports 1 kV line earth CM on communication ports Conducted RF immunity Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 IEC 61000 4 6 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz 225 AppendixA Specifications Certifications Certification when product is marked 1 c UL us Value UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E322657 UL Listed for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations certified for U S and Canada See UL File E334470 CE European Union 2004 108 EC EMC Directive compliant with EN 61326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B European Union 2006 95 EC LVD compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 11 C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions EtherNet I
287. ly 108 additional resources iii Allen Bradley 1492 wiring 70 analog cable grounding 38 analog channel wiring guidelines 37 analog expansion I 0 71 analog inputs analog channel wiring guidelines 37 analog to data format conversion 78 ASCII Protocol 43 45 47 configuration 51 autotune 337 axis 118 axis output general rules 126 axis state diagram 134 update 135 before calling for assistance 320 C cable recommended for 2080 TC2 2080 RTD2 334 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 338 Index cable pinout controller to modem cable 107 cables programming 6 serial port 7 calling for assistance 320 CE mark 9 10 certifications 9 CIP communications pass thru 46 CIP Serial 47 configure 48 parameters 49 Server 43 CIP Symbolic Addressing 45 CIP Symbolic Server 44 clamping alarm 75 default high low values 75 limits 75 common mode rejection 75 communication connections 43 communication protocols 43 communications ports 43 Compliance to European Union Directive EMC Directive 10 Low Voltage Directive 10 Connected Components Workbench v 9 70 86 135 202 203 321 323 330 controller description 3 grounding 33 1 0 wiring 36 minimizing electrical noise 37 password 201 preventing excessive heat 16 recover 204 security 201 D data formats 72 85 91 engineering units 72 percent range 72 raw proportional data 72 valid range 73 valid range for 2085 OF4 73 decelera
288. master control relay to remove power from the external I O circuits power continues to be provided to the controller s power supply so that diagnostic indicators on the processor can still be observed The master control relay is not a substitute for a disconnect to the controller It is intended for any situation where the operator must quickly de energize I O devices only When inspecting or installing terminal connections replacing output fuses or working on equipment within the enclosure use the disconnect to shut off power to the rest of the system TIP Do not control the master control relay with the controller Provide the operator with the safety of a direct connection between an emergency stop switch and the master control relay Using Emergency Stop Switches When using emergency stop switches adhere to the following points e Do not program emergency stop switches in the controller program Any emergency stop switch should turn off all machine power by turning off the master control relay e Observe all applicable local codes concerning the placement and labeling of emergency stop switches Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 17 Chapter2 About Your Controller e Install emergency stop switches and the master control relay in your system Make certain that relay contacts have a sufficient rating for your application Emergency stop switches must be easy to reach e In the following ill
289. mbedded Input 1 Embedded Input 2 Embedded Input 3 CE Bit Comments Function Count Up Count Down Not Used Not Used Example 1 lI on IU off on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 1 0 Example 2 on IU loff If on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 1 0 Example3 off 0 Hold accumulator value Blank cells don t care i rising edge 4 falling edge TIP Inputs 0 through 11 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used HSC Mode 5 Two Input Counter up and down with External Reset and Hold HSC Mode 5 Examples Input Terminals Embedded Input 0 Embedded Input 1 Embedded Input 2 Embedded Input 3 CE Bit Comments Function Count Direction Reset Hold Example 1 lI on IU off on Jof off jon 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 1 0 1 0 0 Example 2 on IU loff IT on Jof off jon 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 1 0 1 0 0 Example3 on 4 Jof on Hold accumulator value 1 0 1 Example 4 on Jof off 0 Hold accumulator value 1 0 Example 5 on IU loff on 4 Jof Hold accumulator value 1 0 1 0 Example 6 T Clear accumulator 0 Blank cells don t care f rising edge falling edge TIP Inputs 0 11 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 175 Chapter 10 Use the High Speed
290. move the controller 3 Drill the holes at the markings then replace the controller and mount it Leave the protective debris strip in place until you are finished wiring the controller and any other devices IMPORTANT For instructions on how to install your Micro800 expansion 1 0 see Expansion 1 0 Support on page 55 Panel Mounting Dimensions Micro830 10 and 16 Point Controllers 2080 LC30 10QWB 2080 LC30 10QVB 2080 LC30 16AWB 2080 LC30 1G6QWB 2080 LC30 16QVB 86 mm 3 39 in O OOo0o0oo00000000 E2285 E3 3 s E BBE l E N S AN E WS e l H D l Ooooo0oo000009 ie CF In 45325 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Install Your Controller Chapter 3 Micro830 24 Point Controllers 2080 LC30 240QWB 2080 LC30 24Q0VB 2080 LC30 240BB 131 mm 5 16 in lt gt e 4 AWOCC OO OOOOOWWWWOOS ooog
291. mpatibility Type 3 Output Specifications Attribute 2080 LC50 240WB _ 2080 LC50 240VB 2080 LC50 240BB 2080 LC50 24AWB Relay Output Hi Speed Output Standard Output Outputs 0 1 Outputs 2 and higher Number of outputs 10 2 8 Output voltage min 5V DC 5V AC 10 8V DC 10V DC Output voltage max 125V DC 265V AC 26 4V DC 26 4V DC Load current min 10 mA 220 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Output Specifications Specifications Appendix A Attribute 2080 LC50 240WB_ 2080 LC50 240VB 2080 LC50 240BB 2080 LC50 24AWB Relay Output Hi Speed Output Standard Output Outputs 0 1 Outputs 2 and higher Load current 2 0A 100 mA high speed 1 0 A 30 C continuous max operation 0 3 A 65 C standard 1 0 A 30 C operation 0 3A 65 C standard operation Surge current per point See Relay Contacts 40A for 10 ms every 1 s 30 C every 2 s Ratings on page 212 65 ocli Current per common 5A max Turn on time 10 ms Turn off time max 2 5 us 0 1 ms 1 ms 1 Applies for general purpose operation only does not apply for high speed operation Relay Contacts Ratings Maximum Volts Amperes Make Amperes Volt Amperes Continuous 120V AC 15A 1800V A 240V AC 75A 0 75 A 24V DC 1 0 A 1 0 A 28V A 125V DC 0 22 A Environmental Specifications Attribute Value Temperature operating IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IE
292. n Block Diagrams it consists of a pre defined function block IPIDCONTROLLER and four user defined function blocks These four are e PID_OutputRegulator This user defined function block regulates the output of IPIDCONTROLLER within a safe range to ensure that there is no damage to the hardware used in the process IF RMIN lt RIN lt RMAX then ROUT RIN IF RIN lt RMIN then ROUT RMIN IF RIN gt RMAX then ROUT RMAX e PID_ Feedback This user defined function block acts as a multiplexer IF FB_RST is false FB_OUT FB_IN If FB_RST is true then FB_OUT FB_PREVAL Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 335 Appendix H IPID Function Block e PID PWM This user defined function block provides a PWM function converting a real value to a time related ON OFF output e SIM _WATERLVL This user defined function block simulates the process depicted in the application example shown before IMPORTANT User Program Scan Time is Important The autotuning method needs to cause the output of the control loop to oscillate In order to identify the oscillation period the IPID must be called frequently enough to be able to sample the oscillation adequately The scan time of the user program must be less than half the oscillation period In essence the Shannon or Nyquist Shannon or the sampling theorem must be adhered to In addition it is important that the function block is executed at a relati
293. n be used to update the controller firmware which also clears the controller memory ATTENTION The project in the controller will be lost but a new project can be downloaded Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Micro830 Controllers Specifications General 2080 LC30 100WB 2080 LC30 100VB Appendix A Micro830 10 Point Controllers Attribute 2080 LC30 100WB 2080 LC30 100VB Number of 1 0 10 6 inputs 4 outputs Dimensions 90 x 100 x 80 mm HxWxD 3 54 x 3 94 x 3 15 in Shipping weight approx 0 302 kg 0 666 Ib Wire size 0 14 2 5 mm 26 14 AWG solid copper wire or 0 14 1 5 mm 26 14 AWG stranded copper wire rated 90 C 194 F insulation max Wiring category 2 on signal ports 2 on power ports Wire type Use copper conductors only Terminal screw torque 0 6 Nm 4 4 Ib in max using a 2 5 mm 0 10 in flat blade screwdriver Input circuit type 12 24V sink source standard 24V sink source high speed Output circuit type Relay 24V DC sink transistor standard and high speed Event input interrupt support Yes Power consumption 3 6 W without plug ins Power supply voltage range 20 4 26 4V DC Class 2 1 0 rating Input 24V DC 8 8 mA Output 2 A 240V AC general use Input 24V DC 8 8 mA Output 2 A 24V DC 1 A per point Surrounding air temperature 30 C 24 V DC 0 3 A per point
294. n hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding WARNING When you connect or disconnect the Removable Terminal Block RTB with field side power applied an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations WARNING Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding ATTENTION To comply with the CE Low Voltage Directive LVD this equipment must be powered from a A source compliant with the following Safety Extra Low Voltage SELV or Protected Extra Low Voltage PELV ATTENTION To comply with UL restrictions this equipment must be powered from a Class 2 source ATTENTION Be careful when stripping wires Wire fragments that fall into the controller could cause damage Once wiring is complete make sure the controller is free of all metal fragments ATTENTION Do not remove the protective debris strips until after the controller and all other equipment in the panel near the module are mounted and wired Remove strips before operating the controller Failure to remove strips before operating can cause overheating ATTENTION Electrostatic discharge can damage semiconductor devices inside the module Do not touch the connector pins or other sensitive areas ATTENTION The USB and serial cables are not to exceed 3 0 m 9 84 ft ATTENTION Do not wire more than 2 conductors on any single terminal ATTENTION
295. n the Driver field Controller Serial Port Driver Modbus RTU Baud Rate 19200 v Parity None v Modbus Role Modbus RTU Master v Advanced Settings Protocol Control Media R5232 v RTS Pre Delay 0 Data Bits RTS Post Delay 0 Stop Bits 1 v Response Timer 200 Broadcast Pause 200 Inter Char Timeout 0 50 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Communication Connections Chapter 5 3 Specify the following parameters e Baud rate e Parity e Unit address e Modbus Role Master Slave Auto Modbus RTU Parameters Parameter Options Default Baud Rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 19200 Parity None Odd Even None Modbus Role Master Slave Auto Master 4 Click Advanced Settings to set advanced parameters Refer to the table for available options and default configuration for advanced parameters Modbus RTU Advanced Parameters Parameter Options Default Media RS 232 RS 232 RTS CTS RS 485 RS 232 Data bits Always 8 8 Stop bits 12 1 Response timer 0 999 999 999 milliseconds 200 Broadcast Pause 0 999 999 999 milliseconds 200 Inter char timeout 0 999 999 999 microseconds 0 RTS Pre delay 0 999 999 999 milliseconds 0 RTS Post delay 0 999 999 999 milliseconds 0 Configure ASCII 1 Open your Connected Components Workbench project On the device co
296. n this mode 1 Up Counter with external reset and hold The accumulator is immediately cleared 0 when it reaches the high preset A low preset cannot be defined in this mode Counter with external direction Counter with external direction reset and hold Two input counter up and down Two input counter up and down with external reset and hold Quadrature counter phased inputs A and B Quadrature counter phased inputs A and B with external reset and hold Quadrature X4 counter phased inputs A and B oO o NY ajl om A wt N Quadrature X4 counter phased inputs A and B with external reset and hold 172 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Use the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Chapter 10 The main high speed counters support 10 types of operation mode and the sub high speed counters support 5 types mode 0 2 4 6 8 If the main high speed counter is set to mode 1 3 5 7 or 9 then the resub high speed counter will be disabled For more information on HSC Function Operating Modes and Input Assignments see HSC Inputs and Wiring Mapping on page 167 HSC Mode 0 Up Counter HSC Mode 0 Examples Input Terminals Embedded Input 0 Embedded Input Embedded Input Embedded Input CE Bit Comments 1 2 3 Function Count Not Used Not Used Not Used Example 1 T on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count Example 2 T lon U Joff 0 off 0
297. nario 1 Moving part at right positive side of Lower Limit switch before homing starts The homing motion sequence for this scenario is as follows 1 Moving part moves to its left side in negative direction 2 When Lower Limit switch is detected the moving part decelerates to stop or stops immediately according to Limit Switch Hard Stop configuration 3 Moving part moves back in positive direction in creep velocity to detect Lower Limit switch On Off edge 4 Once Lower Limit switch On Off edge is detected record the position as mechanical home position and decelerate to stop 5 Move to the configured home position The mechanical home position recorded during moving back sequence plus the home offset configured for the axis through the Connected Components Workbench software Scenario 2 Moving part on Lower Limit switch before homing starts The homing motion sequence for this scenario is as follows 1 Moving part moves to its right side in positive direction in creep velocity to detect Lower Limit switch On Off edge 2 Once Lower Limit switch On gt Off edge is detected record the position as mechanical home position and decelerate to stop 3 Move to the configured home position The mechanical home position recorded during moving right sequence plus the home offset configured for the axis through the software Scenario 3 Moving part at left negative side of Lower Limit switch before homin
298. nden nbareaiceauturncadels 48 Configure Modbus RTU esichris ss 94 sg va haben es 50 Config re ASC argh et ctentes iena a e eieaa 51 Configure Ethernet Settings sec sctduve satiny enh iesedieadabevakel s 53 Chapter 6 Micro850 Expansion I O Modules 0 c seen eee e eee e es 55 Hardware Features ua hide ee eal on 2 sels eka as Ys cate ll cals 56 Installation gad rane ses Renee ovat teens ee eee eee 58 Mount the Module ico yong dS acetals a anda be bes Pecan rs 58 Module Spacing ticicvevies voscigvett aed Meade ooeeueeias thee 4 58 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM001D EN E September 2012 Micro800 Plug In Modules and Accessories Chapter 1 DIN Rail Mountings ccccwstseween vanes poke a EES 59 Panel Mountina essnee eea a E ie nee E A 60 System Assembly o rsrsrs tipi i tie A eee tai 60 Field Wiring Connections exes sneoi dia eee eeeenek Vet onetar 61 Input O tput WARIS sseb acts hia ea eel hood eal es dacs 61 Wiring Options for the 2085 IQ32T Module 67 Discrete Expansion I O Features s v 03 0 ssiseetedeswia dasa dan da Reeots os 70 Discrete Tipu tech cacao Nees E A ENE EE 70 Discrete OUL DUE sachin tacts taki Anais ea a Mun tetany satay 71 Analog Expansion I O Features o c cis esses to sasuke tieciwenes esas 71 Analog Input and OUtput cccranesswn traced veweheveneeses ecnees 72 Specialty Module 2085 IRT4 Temperature Input Module 76 Configure Your Expansion VO Mile ds manna abl atone aad cha eet m
299. nel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 2085 0816 General ie N 24to31 2 0 ms v 8 0 ms v General Channel 0 Bto 15 20m 80m 16 to 23 20ms v 8 0 ms I lt lt 2 Click Configuration Edit module and channel properties according to your requirements and application The next sections show you configuration properties for each of the expansion I O module Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 83 Chapter6 Expansion 1 0 Support 2085 IA8 and 2085 IM8 These two AC input modules only have general device details available for the user in Connected Components Workbench software No configuration properties are available 2085 146 General Vendor ID Allen Bradley Description 8 channel 1204 AC input module Product Type Discrete I O Revision 3 001 Series 4 2085 IMS8 General Vendor ID Allen Bradley Description 8 channel 2404 AC input module Product Type Discrete I O Revision 3 001 Series 4 2085 IF4 and 2085 IF8 2085 IF4 Channel 0 Enable Channel Minimum Maximum AmA to 20m v Data Format Engineering Units v Input Range o a Input Filter 50 60Hz Rejection Alarm Limits C High High Alarm 000 E High Alarm i 20 000 m M Low Alarm 4 0005 ne C Low Low Alarm Restore Defaults For the analog input modules 2085 IF4 and 2085 IF8 you can configure properties such as input range format filter and alarm limits for each individual channel
300. nfiguration tree go to Controller properties Click Serial Port Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 51 Chapter5 Communication Connections 2 Select ASCII on the Driver field Controller Serial Port Driver ASCII v Baud Rate 38400 v Parity None v Advanced Settings Protocol Control Control Line No Handshake q S Append Chars Ox0D 0x04 Deletion Mode Ignore v Term Chars ox00 0x08 Data Bits 8 x Stop Bits 1 v XON XOFF a Echo Mode E 3 Specify baud rate and parity ASCII Parameters Parameter Options Default Baud Rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 19200 Parity Nore Odd Even None 52 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Communication Connections Chapter 5 4 Click Advanced Settings to configure advanced parameters Z Advanced Settings Protocol Control Control Line No Handshake v Append Chars 0x0D 0x0A Deletion Mode Ignore x Term Chars oxoD 0x0A Data Bits 8 x Stop Bits 1 v XON XOFF O Echo Mode a ASCII Advanced Parameters Parameter Options Default Control Line Full Duplex No Handshake Half duplex with continuous carrier Half duplex without continuous carrier No Handshake Deletion Mode CRT Ignore Ignore Printer Data bits 7 8 8 Stop bits 1 2 1 XON XOFF Enabled or Disabled Disabled Echo Mode Enabled or Disabled Disabled Append
301. ng IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold 20 65 C 4 149 F IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock Temperature surrounding 65 C 149 F air max Temperature non operating IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged N 40 85 C 40 185 F onoperating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock Relative humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat 5 95 non condensing Vibration IEC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500 Hz Shock operating IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock 25g Shock non operating IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock DIN mount 25 g PANEL mount 35 g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD immunity IEC 61000 4 2 6 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges Radiated RF immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 80 2000 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 1890 MHz from 2000 2700 MHz Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Specifications Appendix A Environmental Specifications Attribute EFT B immunity Value IEC 61000 4 4 2 kV at 5 kHz on power ports 2 kV at 5 kHz on signal ports Surge transient immunity
302. ng an external 50 mm 22 AWG shorting wire between terminals A2 A3 and B2 B3 for channel 0 and 1 respectively Shielded twisted pair cables are to be utilized for remote use of these sensors with cable shield grounded at controller end For more information see Recommended Cable Specifications on page 330 Wire the RTD Module and RTD Sensor in the Field Shielded twisted wire cable 3 wire u 2080 RTD2 RTD ex a aiue shred Cable tray conduit z CLXXI iJ Z 3 Field screw 1 junction box Qil filled thermowell 3 wire RTD shown Process temperature Measurement 45779 The RTD sensing element should always be connected between terminals B1 and B2 for channel 1 and A1 and A2 for channel 0 in the module Terminals B3 and A3 should always be shorted to B2 and A2 respectively to Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 325 Appendix G Non isolated Thermocouple and RTD Plug in Modules complete the constant current loop Mismatch in wiring can cause erroneous over or underrange readings Configure the Plug ins in This a ae you an configure 7 adie ba 2080 RTD2 plug Connected C omponents ins through the Connected Components Workbench software Workbench For more information about using Connected Components Workbench you can check out the Connected Components Workbench Online Help it comes with the software The following steps
303. nication functionality Micro800 supports the following plug in modules Module Type Description 2080 104 Discrete 4 point 12 24V DC Sink Source Input 2080 1040B4 Discrete 8 point Combo 12 24V DC Sink Source Input 12 24V DC Source Output 2080 I040V4 Discrete 8 point Combo 12 24V DC Sink Source Input 12 24V DC Sink Output 2080 084 Discrete 4 point 12 24V DC Source Output 2080 0V4 Discrete 4 point 12 24V DC Sink Output 2080 OW4l Discrete 4 point AC DC Relay Output 2080 IF2 Analog 2 channel Non isolated Unipolar Voltage Current Analog Input Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 101 Chapter7 Micro800 Plug In Modules and Accessories Module Type Description 2080 IF4 Analog 4 channel Non isolated Unipolar Voltage Current Analog Input 2080 OF2 Analog 2 channel Non isolated Unipolar Voltage Current Analog Output 2080 TC2 Specialty 2 channel Non isolated Thermocouple Module 2080 RTD2 Specialty 2 channel Non isolated RTD Module 2080 MEMBAK RTC Specialty Memory Backup and High Accuracy RTC 2080 TRIMPOT6 Specialty 6 Channel Trim Pot Analog Input 2080 SERIALISOL Communication RS232 485 Isolated Serial Port Hardware Features The plug in modules except for the 2080 MEMBAK RTC can be inserted onto any plug in slot on the Micro830 Micro850 controller Measurements in millim
304. nly The PE is a status flag that represents an interrupt is pending This status bit can be monitored or used for logic purposes in the control program if you need to determine when a subroutine cannot execute immediately This bit is automatically set and cleared by the controller The controller can process 1 active and maintain up to 1 pending user interrupt conditions before it sets the lost bit Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 299 Appendix D User Interrupts Using the Event Input Interrupt Ell Function The EI Event Input Interrupt is a feature that allows the user to scan a specific POU when an input condition is detected from a field device EITO is used in this document to define how EI works Configure EII Input Edge from the Embedded I O configuration window Configure the EII from the Interrupt Configuration window General Memory Event Input Interrupt Ell Function Configuration and Status 300 Communication Ports Serial Port USB Port Date and Time Interrupts Startup Faults Modbus Mapping Embedded 1 0 Plug In Modules lt Empty gt lt Empty gt Properties Interrupt Type EILID C xl Ell Description feno g Program Parameters UntitedLD Auto Start False ov Input Select 0 Apply Help i OK Cancel Ell Function Configuration The Event Input Interrupt
305. nput Wiring Mapping Embedded Input 0 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 HSCO A C B D Reset Hold HSC1 A C B D HSC2 A C B D Reset Hold Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM0 02D EN E September 2012 237 AppendixA Specifications HSC Input Wiring Mapping Embedded Input 0 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 HSC3 A C B D HSC4 A C B D Reset Hold HSC5 A C B D Micro830 10 and 16 point controller HSC Input Wiring Mapping Modes of Operation Input 0 HSCO Input 1 HSCO Mode Value in User Input 2 HSC1 Input 3 HSC1 Program Counter with Internal Direction Count Up Not Used 0 mode 1a Counter with Internal Count Up Not Used Reset Hold 1 Direction External Reset and Hold mode 1b Counter with External Count Up Down Direction Not Used 2 Direction mode 2a Counter with External Count Up Down Direction Reset Hold 3 Direction Reset and Hold mode 2b Two Input Counter mode 3a Count Up Count Down Not Used 4 Two Input Counter with Count Up Count Down Reset Hold 5 External Reset and Hold mode 3b Quadrature Counter mode 4a A Type inpu B Type inpu Not Used 6 Quadrature Counter with A Type inpu B Type inpu Z Type Reset Hold 7 External Reset and Hold mode 4b Quadrature X4 Counter A Type inpu B Type inpu Not Used 8 mode 5a Quadrature X4 Counter with A Type inpu
306. nputs will be used depending on the mode and the type of application See the table HSC Inputs and Wiring Mapping on page 167 to know the different IDs that can be used as well as the embedded inputs and its characteristics IfID 0 is used ID 1 cannot be used on the same controller since the inputs are being used by the Reset and Hold MyAppData HscMode allows the user to specify the type of operation in which the HSC will use to count See HSC Mode HSCAPP HSC Mode Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Quickstarts Appendix C on page 172 for more information about HSC modes You can also quickly refer to the table below for the list of ten available modes HSC Operating Modes Mode Type Number 0 Up Counter The accumulator is immediately cleared 0 when it reaches the high preset A low preset cannot be defined in this mode Up Counter with external reset and hold The accumulator is immediately cleared 0 when it reaches the high preset A low preset cannot be defined in this mode Counter with external direction Counter with external direction reset and hold Two input counter up and down Two input counter up and down with external reset and hold Quadrature counter phased inputs A and B Quadrature counter phased inputs A and B with external reset and hold Quadrature X4 counter phased inputs A and B co coo NN Mm om A wy N
307. ns AutoTune ATParameters The following table explains the arguments used in this function block IPIDCONTROLLER Arguments Parameter Parameter Data Type Description Type EN Input BOOL Function block enable When EN TRUE execute function When EN FALSE do not execute function Only applicable to LD EN is not required in FBD Programming Process nput REAL Process value measured from the output of controlled process SetPoint nput REAL Set point value for desired process Feedback nput REAL Feedback signal is the value of the control variable applied to the process such as the IPIDCONTROLLER output Auto nput BOOL Operating modes of PID controller e TRUE controller runs in normal mode e FALSE the derivative term is ignored This will force the controller output to track the feedback within controller limits and allow the controller to switch back to auto without bumping the output Initialize Input BOOL A change in value True to False or FALSE to TRUE causes the controller to eliminate any proportional gain during that cycle It also initializes AutoTune sequences Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 201 N 331 Appendix H IPID Function Block IPIDCONTROLLER Arguments Data Type Description GAIN_PID Gains for IPIDCONTROLLER See GAIN_PID Data type Parameter Parameter Type Gains Input AutoTune Inpu
308. ns for Solid State Controls SGI 1 1 Preface Description A description of important differences between solid state programmable controller products and hard wired electromechanical devices National Electrical Code Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston An article on wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment Allen Bradley Industrial Automation Glossary AG 7 1 A glossary of industrial automation terms and abbreviations You can view or download publications at http www rockwellautomation com literature To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative You can download the latest version of Connected Components Workbench for your Micro800 at the URL below http ab rockwellautomation com Programmable Controllers Connected Components Workbench Software Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002C EN E March 2012 Preface vi Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002C EN E March 2012 Preface Hardware Overview About Your Controller Install Your Controller Table of Contents Who Should Use this Manual iit cc2s couch un eied uths seeeenouek ws iii P rposeof this Mania tee iieiel cece are Sete ee Roe EAEE oe iii Additional Resources teen tcratenaten od tetenor ties Punta teshabaao snes iii Chapter 1 Hardware Features ss cscuk ess bea yaaa tare ee babun ye Pues
309. ns if data size is sacrificed and vice versa This flexibility allows maximum usage of execution memory In addition to the user defined variables data memory also includes any constants and temporary variables generated by the compiler at build time The Micro830 and Micro850 controller also has project memory which stores a copy of the entire downloaded project including comments as well as configuration memory for storing plug in setup information and so on Here are some guidelines and limitations to consider when programming a Micro800 controller using Connected Components Workbench software Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Program Execution in Micro800 Chapter 8 e Each program Program Organizational Unit POU can use up to 64 Kb of internal address space With Micro830 Micro850 24 48 point controllers supporting up to 10 000 steps you could potentially use all of the available internal programming space with just 4 Program Organizational Units POU It is recommended that you split large programs into smaller programs to improve code readability simplify debugging and maintenance tasks A User Defined Function Block UDFB can be executed within another UDEB with a limit of five nested UDFBs Avoid creating UDFBs with references to other UDFBs as executing these UDFBs too many times may result in a compile error Example of Five Nested UDFBs ae Low UDFB2 a UDFB3 ane UDFB4 ier
310. nsion I O modules are compatible with Micro850 controllers Micro850 Expansion 1 0 Modules Catalog Number Type Description 2085 1A8 Discrete 8 point 120V AC input 2085 IM8 Discrete 8 point 240V AC input 2085 0A8 Discrete 8 point 120 240V AC Triac Output 2085 1016 Discrete 16 point 12 24V Sink Source Input 2085 1032T Discrete 32 point 12 24V Sink Source Input 2085 0V16 Discrete 16 point 12 24V DC Sink Transistor Output 2085 0B16 Discrete 16 point 12 24V DC Source Transistor Output 2085 OW8 Discrete 8 point AC DC Relay Output 2085 OW16 Discrete 16 point AC DC Relay Output 2085 IF4 Analog 4 channel 14 bit isolated voltage current input Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 55 Chapter6 Expansion 1 0 Support Micro850 Expansion 1 0 Modules Catalog Number Type Description 2085 IF8 Analog 8 channel 14 bit isolated voltage current input 2085 0F4 Analog 4 channel 12 bit isolated voltage current output 2085 IRT4 Analog 4 channel 16 bit isolated RTD and Thermocouple input module 2085 ECR Terminator 2085 bus terminator 1 Refers to isolation from field side wiring to controller not channel to channel isolation The bus terminator 2085 ECR serves as an end cap and terminates the end of the serial communication bus It is required whenever an expansion I O module is connected to the controller and should be connected to the
311. o io Example 2 Micro800 Master to PowerFlex 4M Drive Slave The following is the overview of the steps to be taken for configuring a PowerFlex 4M drive Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 251 Appendix B 252 Modbus Mapping for Micro800 Parameter numbers listed in this section are for a PowerFlex 4M and will be different if you are using another PowerFlex 4 Class drive Parameter Name Parameter Number 4M 4 40 40P 400 400N 400P Start Source P106 P36 Speed Reference P108 P38 Comm Data Rate C302 A103 C103 Comm Node Addr C303 A104 C104 Comm Loss Action C304 A105 C105 Comm Loss Time C305 A106 C106 Comm Format C306 A107 C102 e Connect the 1203 USB to the PowerFlex Drive and to the Computer e Launch Connected Components Workbench Connect to the Drive and set parameters To configure PowerFlex 4M perform the following steps 1 Double click the PowerFlex 4M if it is not already open in Connected Components Workbench 2 Click Connect 3 In the Connection Browser expand the AB_DF1 DH Driver Select the AB DSI PF4 Port and click OK 4 Once the Drive has connected and been read in select the Start up wizard and change the following items Select Finish to save the changes to the drive e Select the Comm Port as the Speed Reference Set P108 Speed Reference to 5 Comm Port e Set Start Source to Comm Port Set P106 Start Sou
312. o Outputs North American temp code 1 Use this Conductor Category information for planning cond 214 T4 ctor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Inputs Attribute 2080 LC30 48AWB Specifications Appendix A 2080 LC30 480WB 2080 LC30 480VB 2080 LC30 480BB 120V AC Input High Speed DC Input Standard DC Input Inputs 0 11 Inputs 12 and higher Number of Inputs 28 12 16 Voltage category 110V AC 24V DC sink source Operating voltage 132V 60Hz AC max 16 8 26 4V DC 10 26 4V DC Off state voltage max 20V AC 5V DC Off state current max 1 5mA 1 5mA On state current min 5 mA 79V AC 5 0 mA 16 8V DC 1 8 mA 10V DC On state current nom 12 mA 120V AC 8 8 mA 24V DC 8 5 mA 24V DC On state current max 16 mA 132V AC 12 0 mA 30V DC Nominal impedance 12 kQ 50 Hz 3kQ 3 74 KQ 10 kQ 60 Hz IEC input compatibility Type 3 Inrush current max 250 mA 120V AC Input frequency max 63 Hz AC input filter setting 8 ms for all embedded inputs In Connected Components Workbench go to the Embedded 1 0 configuration window to re configure the filter setting for each input group Isolated AC Inputs 2080 LC30 480WB 2080 LC30 480VB 2080 LC30 480BB Inputs 0 3 Attribute Value On state voltage nom 12 24V AC
313. o assign values to your variable according to your application 275 Appendix C 276 Quickstarts 1 On the Initial Value field for the MyCommand variable type 1 See HSC Commands HScCmd on page 189 for more information on the description for each value Assign values to the MyAppData variables Expand the list of MyAppData sub variables clicking the sign Set the values of the different sub variables as shown in the following screenshot Data Type Initial alue 7 f Zippe 7 MyAppData HSCAPP E MyAppData PlsEnable BOOL FALSE MyAppData HscID UINT 0 MyAppData HscMode UINT MyAppData Accumulator DINT MyAppData HPSetting DINT 40 MyAppData LPSetting DINT 40 MyAppData OFSetting DINT 50 MyAppData UFSetting DINT 50 MyAppData OutputMask UDINT fe MyAppData HPOutput UDINT 1 MyAppData LPOutput UDINT 2 MyCommand USINT wal i MyInfo HSCSTS i MyPLS PLS z MyStatus UINT IMPORTANT MyAppData variable has sub variables which determine the settings of the counter It is crucial to know each one in order to determine how the counter will perform A quick summary is provided below but you can also see HSC APP Data Structure on page 171 for detailed information MyAppData PlsEnable allows the user to either enable or disable the PLS settings It should be set to FALSE disabled if the MyAppData variable is to be used MyAppData HscID allows the user to specify which embedded i
314. o drives with pulse direction input PTO and motion axes support on the Micro830 and Micro850 controllers are summarized below PTO and Motion Axis Support on Micro830 and Micro850 Controller PTO built in Number of Axes Supported 10 16 Points 1 1 2080 LC30 100VB 2080 LC30 160VB 24 Points 2 2 2080 LC30 240VB 2080 LC30 240BB 2080 LC50 240VB 2080 LC50 240BB 48 Points 3 3 2080 LC30 480VB 2080 LC30 480BB 2080 LC50 480VB 2080 LC50 480BB 1 For Micro830 catalogs Pulse Train Output functionality is only supported on Firmware Revision 2 and later ATTENTION To use the Micro800 Motion feature effectively users need A to have a basic understanding of the following e PTO components and parameters See Use the Micro800 Motion Control Feature on page 118 for a general overview of Motion components and their relationships e Programming and working with elements in the Connected Components Workbench software The user needs to have a working knowledge of ladder diagram structured text or function block diagram programming to be able to work with motion function blocks variables and axis configuration parameters Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 117 Chapter9 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO A ATTENTION To learn more about Connected Components Workbench and detailed descriptions of the variables for the Motion Function Bloc
315. o this publication see Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines Rockwell Automation publication 1770 4 1 for additional installation requirements NEMA Standard 250 and IEC 60529 as applicable for explanations of the degrees of protection provided by different types of enclosure Preventing Electrostatic Discharge A This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge which can cause internal damage and affect normal operation Follow these guidelines when you handle this equipment e Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static e Wear an approved grounding wriststrap Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment e Use a static safe workstation if available Store the equipment in appropriate static safe packaging when not in use Safety considerations are an important element of proper system installation Actively thinking about the safety of yourself and others as well as the condition of your equipment is of primary importance We recommend reviewing the following safety considerations Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 About Your Controller Chapter 2 North American Hazardous Location Approval The following information applies when operating this equipment in hazardous locations Informations sur l utilisation de cet quipement en environnements dangereux Products marke
316. odel for further help Identify the error code and Is the error description hardware related Refer to page 308 for probable cause and recommended action Are the wire connections tight Tighten wire connections Yes No Is the Power LED on Clear Fault controller have power Check power supplied Yes Yes Refer to page 308 for Correct the condition Is the RUN No probable cause and causing the fault LED on recommended action Is an input LED No accurately showing status Is the Fault Return controller to RUN or LED on any of the REM test modes Yes Refer to page 308 for probable cause and Refer to page 308 for probable cause and recommended action recommended action Test and verify system operation Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 315 Appendix F Troubleshooting Calling Rockwell If you need to contact Rockwell Automation or local distributor for assistance it Automation for Assistance is helpful to obtain the following prior to calling controller type series letter revision letter and firmware FRN number of the controller e controller indicator status 316 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Appendix G Non isolated Thermocouple and RTD Plug in Modules Overview This chapter describes the features configuration installation and
317. oject Click Disconnect 6 Power down controller Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 201 Chapter 11 Controller Security Configure Controller Password Recover from a Lost Password 202 7 Swap controller hardware with controller2 hardware 8 Power up controller2 9 Click Connect 10 Select target controller2 11 Click Download 12 Lock controller2 See Configure Controller Password on page 267 Back Up a Password Protected Controller In this workflow user application will be backed up from a Micro800 controller that is locked to a memory plug in device 1 On the Device Toolbox open Discover Click Browse Connections 2 Select the target controller 3 When requested enter the controller password 4 Back up controller contents from the memory module To set change and clear controller password see the quickstart instructions Configure Controller Password on page 267 IMPORTANT After creating or changing the controller password you need to power down the controller in order for the password to be saved Ifthe controller is secured with a password and the password has been lost then it becomes impossible to access the controller using the Connected Components Workbench software To recover the controller must be set to Program Mode using the keyswitch for Micro830 and Micro850 controllers or the 2080 LCD for Micro810 controllers Then ControlFlash ca
318. omation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 27 Chapter3 Install Your Controller Micro830 and Micro850 48 point Controllers Side Micro830 Micro850 48pt Controller with Micro800 Power Supply Expansion 1 0 Slots Applicable to Micro850 only Single width 1st slot Double width 2nd slot 2085 ECR terminator Measurements in millimeters 28 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Chapter 4 Wire Your Controller This chapter provides information on the Micro830 and Micro850 controller wiring requirements It includes the following sections Topic Page Wiring Requirements and Recommendation 29 Use Surge Suppressors 30 Recommended Surge Suppressors 32 Grounding the Controller 33 Wiring Diagrams 33 Controller 1 0 Wiring 36 Minimize Electrical Noise 37 Analog Channel Wiring Guidelines 37 Minimize Electrical Noise on Analog Channels 37 Grounding Your Analog Cable 38 Wiring Examples 38 Plug In Module Wiring 39 2080 0F2 40 2080 IF4 Terminal Block Wiring 41 Embedded Serial Port Wiring 41 Wiring Requirements and Recommendation WARNING Before you install and wire any device disconnect power to the controller system common wire Observe all electrical codes dictating the maximum current allowable for each wire size Current above the maximum ratings may cause wiring to overheat which can caus
319. ommunication before taking 5 action set in C304 5 sec Max 60 C306 Comm Format Data Parity Stop RTU 8 Data Bit Parity None 1 0 Stop bit 8 Disconnect the Communications and save your project pe e eae i iiias x Powerflex 4M_1 PowerFlex 4M 9 Turn off the power to the drive until the PowerFlex 4M display blanks out completely then restore power to the PowerFlex 4M The drive is now ready to be controlled by Modbus RTU communication commands initiated from the Micro830 850 controller Modbus devices can be 0 based registers are numbered starting at 0 or 1 based registers are numbered starting at 1 When PowerFlex 4 Class drives are used with Micro800 family controllers the register addresses listed in the PowerFlex User Manuals need to be offset by n 1 For example the Logic Command word is located at address 8192 but your Micro800 program needs to use 8193 8192 1 to access it Modbus Address n 1 value shown 8193 Logic Command word Stop Start Jog etc Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 253 Appendix B 254 Modbus Mapping for Micro800 8194 Speed Reference word Xxx x format for 4 4M 40 where 123 12 3 Hz xxx xx format for 40P 400 400N 400P where 123 1 23 Hz 8449 Logic Status word Read Active Fault and so on 8452 Speed Feedback word uses same format as Speed Reference 8450 Error Code word n 1 To access Parameter n TIP
320. on Not Used 2 Direction mode 2a Counter with External Count Up Down Direction Reset Hold 3 Direction Reset and Hold mode 2b Two Input Counter mode 3a Count Up Count Down Not Used 4 Two Input Counter with Count Up Count Down Reset Hold 5 External Reset and Hold mode 3b Quadrature Counter mode 4a A Type input B Type input Not Used 6 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 169 Chapter 10 Use the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Micro830 Micro850 48 point Controller HSC Input Wiring Mapping Modes of Operation Input 0 HSCO Input 1 HSCO Input 2 HSCO Input 3 HSCO Mode Value in User Input 2 HSC1 Input 3 HSC1 Input 6 HSC2 Input 7 HSC2 Program Input 4 HSC2 Input 5 HSC2 Input 10 HSC4 Input 11 HSC4 Input 6 HSC3 Input 7 HSC3 Input 8 HSC4 Input 9 HSC4 Input 10 HSC5 Input 11 HSC5 Quadrature Counter with A Type input B Type input Z Type Reset Hold 7 External Reset and Hold mode Ab Quadrature X4 Counter A Type input B Type input Not Used 8 mode 5a Quadrature X4 Counter with A Type input B Type input Z Type Reset Hold 9 External Reset and Hold 170 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 High Speed Counter HSC Data Structures ame Project4 PP microsao e Programs E E untitledLo x Local Variables eC untitledio2 iE Local Variables i Global Variables i DataTypes
321. on Publication 2080 UM001D EN E September 2012 xi Table of Contents Controller Security Specifications xii PLS Operation srkerocccerrecieeeia base EEEE O de eee tune ks 192 BIS Bxain pl ig2 cert cain ae ahd cetera seman er dou meh EAN CA 193 HSG I terrupts sts sities til cee ete teens teen 4 194 HSC Interrupt Comngurations wi aSaia dahl ew ewkvenorntes 195 HSC Interr pt POU ui ne ens moh eh Utena ees eal 196 Auto Start PISCOAS 0025 3 o b2s cated hes Sa uwkecaene 196 Maske fox TV HSCO MN eh foes E S execs 196 Makta IN HISCOMIN capes cue nkc ich tent eeleatee 196 Mask for TELCEISCO MIER sto sce nearau dante Be eos aenle Saree ots 197 Mask for IL HSCO ML n i ae ahs a ba hee Oat ie fe 197 HSC Interrupt Status Information 1 conc ueiesopeniadean ane 197 User Interrupt Enable HSC0 Enabled 00 000 197 User Interrupt Executing HISCOEX Sijicucenndecieured tees 197 User Interrupt Pending ASCO PEV sin seal entel pee cid wemsais 198 User Interrupt Lost HSC0 US 22 stivecucdeey assess ne hhes 198 LOTE a o O te ste date bart wie th Nowaiess eats Bais Brees sted ane es 198 Chapter 11 Exclusive PCCESS inns nt okt anges eed pities aca aed ee hneeney 199 Password Protectiontsci ive hateutel ihe ee ideas bated 199 Compatibility rrei eaa a en E AEE cies aaen one A 200 Work with a Locked Controller 0 c cece cece cence ee eee 200 Upload from a Password Protected Controller 200 Deb
322. operating Cold EC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat EC 60068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock 40 85 C 40 185 F Relative humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat 5 95 non condensing Operating altitude 2000 m Cable length max 10m 1 Step response is the period of time between when the D A converter was instructed to go from minimum to full range until the device is at 63 of full range 2 Includes offset gain non linearity and repeatability error terms 3 Repeatability is the ability of the output module to reproduce output readings when the same controller value is applied to it consecutively under the same conditions and in the same direction Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Specifications Appendix A 2080 MEMBAK RTC Specifications Attribute Value Resolution READ_RTC 1 sec Accuracy 5 sec month 25 C 9 sec month 20 65 C Power off Battery 3 5 years from date of manufacture 25 65 C 2 5 years from date of manufacture 0 C Temperature operating IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock 20 65 C 4 149 F Temperature nonoperating IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold IEC 600
323. operating Thermal Shock Relative humidity 5 95 non condensing IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Damp Heat Vibration 2 g 10 500 Hz IEC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating Shock operating 25g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Specifications Appendix A Environmental Specifications Attribute Shock non operating Value IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock DIN mount 25 g PANEL mount 35 g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD immunity IEC 61000 4 2 6 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges Radiated RF immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 80 2000 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 1890 MHz 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 2000 2700 MHz EFT B immunity IEC 61000 4 4 2 kV at 5 kHz on power ports 2 kV at 5 kHz on signal ports Surge transient immunity IEC 61000 4 5 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on power ports 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF immunity IEC 61000 4 6 Certifications Certification whe product is marked c UL us i 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz Value UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E322657 UL ce isted for Class
324. operational due to invalid axis invalid axis dynamic parameter s velocity dynamic parameter s velocity acceleration acce eration deceleration or jerk set in the deceleration or jerk set in a function block function block Reset the state of the axis using the MC_Reset Correct the setting for the dynamic parameters in function block the function block against Axis Dynamics Correct the setting for the dynamic parameters in configuration page the function block against Axis Dynamics configuration page 03 MC_FB_ERR_PARAM The function block cannot execute because there is The axis is not operational due to invalid invalid parameter other than velocity acceleration parameter s other than velocity acceleration deceleration or jerk set in the function block deceleration or jerk set in a function block Correct the setting for the parameters for Reset the state of the axis using the MC_Reset example mode or position for the function block function block Correct the setting for the parameters for example mode or position for the function block 04 MC_FB_ERR_AXISNUM The function block cannot execute because the Motion internal Fault Error ID 0x04 axis does not exist the axis configuration data is Call Tech support corrupted or the axis is not correctly configured 05 MC_FB_ERR_MECHAN The function block cannot execute because the The axis is not operational due to drive or axis is faulty due to drive or mechanic
325. or IV Tue v Mask for IH Fase v Mask for IN Fake v Mask for IL Tue v Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 195 Chapter 10 196 Use the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch HSC Interrupt POU This is the name of the Program Organizational Unit POU which is executed immediately when this HSC Interrupt occurs You can choose any pre programmed POU from the drop down list Auto Start HSC0 AS Description Data Format HSC Modes User Program Access AS Auto Start bit 0 9 read only 1 For Mode descriptions see Count Down HSCSTS CountDownFlag on page 183 The Auto Start is configured with the programming device and stored as part of the user program The auto start bit defines if the HSC interrupt function automatically starts whenever the controller enters any run or test mode Mask for IV HSCO MV Description Data Format HSC Modes JUser Program Access MV Overflow Mask bit 0 9 read only 1 For Mode descriptions see Count Down HSCSTS CountDownFlag on page 183 The MV Overflow Mask control bit is used to enable allow or disable not allow an overflow interrupt from occurring If this bit is clear 0 and an overflow reached condition is detected by the HSC the HSC user interrupt is not executed This bit is controlled by the user program and retains its value through a power cycle It is up to the user prog
326. orces are cleared from memory Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Appendix D User Interrupts Interrupts allow you to interrupt your program based on defined events This chapter contains information about using interrupts the interrupt instructions and interrupt configuration The chapter is arranged as follows Topic Page Information About Using Interrupts 285 User Interrupt Instructions 290 Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function 296 Selectable Time Interrupt STI Function Configuration and Status 297 Using the Event Input Interrupt Ell Function 300 For more information on HSC Interrupt see Use the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch on page 165 Information About Using The purpose of this section is to explain some fundamental properties of the Interru pts User Interrupts including e What is an interrupt When can the controller operation be interrupted Priority of User Interrupts Interrupt Configuration e User Fault Routine What is an Interrupt An interrupt is an event that causes the controller to suspend the Program Organization Unit POU it is currently performing perform a different POU and then return to the suspended POU at the point where it suspended The Micro830 controller supports the following User Interrupts e User Fault Routine e Event Interrupts 8 e High Speed Counter Interrupts 6 e Selectable Timed Inte
327. orted Consequently Busy and Active outputs have the same behavior Behavior of CommandAborted is set when a commanded motion is aborted by another motion command CommandAborted Output When CommandAborted occurs other output signals such as InVelocity are reset Always_on i Enable and Valid Status The Enable input for read function blocks is level sensitive On every program scan with the Enable input as true the function block will perform a read and update its outputs The Valid output parameter shows that a valid set of outputs is available The Valid output is true as long as valid output values are available and the Enable input is true The relevant output values will be refreshed as long as the input Enable is true If there is a function block error and the relevant output values are not valid then the valid output is set to false When the error condition no longer exists the values will be updated and the Valid output will be set again Relative Move versus Absolute Move Relative move does not require the axis to be homed It simply refers to a move in a specified direction and distance Absolute move requires that the axis be homed It is a move to a known position within the coordinate system regardless of distance and direction Position can be negative or positive value Buffered Mode For all motion control function blocks BufferMode input parameter is ignored Only aborted moves are supported for
328. osition will automatically roll over to 0 or the opposite soft limit if it is activated and the continuous motion continues For a continuous motion if the axis is homed and the soft limit in the motion direction is enabled soft limit will be detected before PTO pulse limit being detected Motion Stop There are three types of stops that can be configured for an axis Immediate Hardware Stop This type of Immediate Stop is controlled by the hardware Ifa Hard Stop on a Hard Limit switch is enabled and the Hard Limit has been reached the PTO pulse for the axis will be cut off immediately by the controller The stop response has no delay less than 1 us axis_1 Limits Hard Limits When hard limit is reached apply Lower Hard Limit ae M Upper Hard Limit E Active Level A Active Level lw Switch Input 10_EM_DI_00 Switch Input 10_EM_DI_01 Immediate Soft Stop The maximum possible response delay for this type of stop could be as much as the Motion Engine Execution time interval This type of stop is applicable in the following scenarios e During motion when axis PTO Pulse Limit is reached e One Hard Limit is enabled for an axis but Hard Stop on Hard Limit switch is configured as Off If the Emergency Stop is configured as Immediate Software Stop during motion when the Hard Limit switch is detected e One Soft Limit is enabled for an axis and the axis has been homed If the emergency stop is configure
329. ot defined so e Correct the axes configuration in the user program e f fault is consistent upgrade to the latest Connected Components Workbench software revision See Motion Axis Configuration in Connected Components Workbench on page 145 310 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Troubleshooting Appendix F List of Error Codes for Micro800 controllers Error Code OxF12z Note z indicates the logic axis ID Description Motion configuration for axis z cannot be supported by this controller model or the axis configuration has some resource conflict with some other motion axis which has been configured earlier Recommended Action Perform the following e Remove all axes and re configure motion with the guidance from the User Manual e If fault is consistent upgrade to the latest Connected Components Workbench software revision OxF15z Note z indicates the logic axis ID There is a motion engine logic error firmware logic issue or memory crash for one axis detected during motion engine cyclic operation One possible reason can be motion engine data memory crash Perform the following e Clear the fault and switch the controller to RUN mode again e f fault is consistent do power cycle for whole motion setup including controller drive and moving mechanism e Re download the User Application OxF210 The expansion I O terminator is missing
330. ouple and RTD Plug in Modules Thermocouple Sensor Types and Ranges The module supports B E J K N R S T types of thermocouple sensors The module channels are referred to as Channel 0 Channel 1 and CJC respectively The cold junction compensation is provided by an external NTC thermistor which comes with the module The thermistor has to be fitted to the screw terminals A3 and B3 of the module This CJC is common to channel 0 and 1 thermocouple sensors and provides open circuit overrange and underrange detection and indication Overrange and Underrange Conditions If the channel temperature input is below the minimum value of its normal temperature range for the represented sensor the module reports an underrange error through the Connected Components Workbench global variables If the channel reads above the maximum value of its normal temperature range for the represented sensor an over range error is flagged The table below defines thermocouple types and their associated full scale temperature ranges Thermocouple Sensor Types and Temperature Ranges Thermocouple Temperature Range Accuracy ADC Update Type C F C F Rate in Hz 7 Accuracy C Min Max 1 0 C 3 0 C B 40 104 1820 90 1700 lt 90 194 4 17 6 25 10 16 7 3308 194 3092 gt 1700 3092 1 0 19 6 33 50 62 E 270 454 1000 200 930 lt 200 328 123 242 470 3 0 1832
331. page 140 e Function Block and Axis Status Error Codes on page 142 e Homing Function Block on page 157 Jerk 118 Rate of change of acceleration The Jerk component is mainly of interest at the start and end of motion Too high of a Jerk may induce vibrations e See Acceleration Deceleration and Jerk Inputs on page 125 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Input and Output Signals Fixed PTO Input Output Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO Chapter 9 To use the Micro800 motion feature you need to 1 Configure the Axis Properties See Motion Axis Configuration in Connected Components Workbench on page 145 for instructions Write your motion program through the Connected Components Workbench software For instructions on how to use the Micro800 motion control feature see the quickstart instructions Use the Motion Control Feature on Micro800 Controllers publication 2080 QS001 Wire the Controller a refer to Input and Output Signals on page 119 for fixed and configurable inputs outputs b See Sample Motion Wiring Configuration on 2080 LC30 xxOQVB 2080 LC50 xxOVB on page 122 for reference The next sections provide a more detailed description of the motion components You can also refer to the Connected Components Workbench Online Help for more information about each motion function block and their variable inputs and o
332. part moves to its right side in positive direction in creep velocity to detect home switch On Off edge 2 Once home switch On Off edge is detected record the position as mechanical home position and decelerate to stop 3 Move to the configured home position The mechanical home position recorded during moving right sequence plus the home offset configured for the axis in the Connected Components Workbench software Scenario 4 Moving part at left negative side of Lower Limit switch before homing starts In this case the homing motion fails and moves continuously to the left until drive or moving part fails to move User needs to make sure the moving part at the proper location before homing starts MC_HOME_LIMIT_SWITCH IMPORTANT f Lower Limit switch is not configured as Enabled MC_HOME_LIMIT_SWITCH 1 homing will fail Error ID MC_FB_ERR_PARAM For Homing against Lower Limit switch one positive home offset can be configured for Homing against Upper Limit switch one negative home offset can be configured MC_HOME_LIMIT_SWITCH 1 homing procedure performs a homing operation against Limit switch The actual motion sequence is dependent on the limit switch configuration and the actual status for the switch before homing starts that is when the MC_Home function block is issued Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO Chapter 9 Sce
333. pe Use copper conductors only Terminal screw 0 6 Nm 4 4 Ib in max torque using a 2 5 mm 0 10 in flat blade screwdriver Input circuit type 120V AC 24V DC sink source standard and high speed Output circuit type Relay 24V DC sink standard and 24V DC source standard and high speed high speed Event input interrupt support Yes inputs 0 15 only Power consumption 10 56 W Power supply voltage range 20 4 26 4V DC Class 2 0 rating Input 120V AC 16 mA Output 2 A 240V AC Input 24V DC 8 8 mA Output 2 A 240V AC Input 24V DC 8 8 mA Output 24V DC 1 A per point Surrounding air temperature general use general use 30 C 24 V DC 0 3 A per point Surrounding air temperature 65 C Insulation stripping 7 mm 0 28 in length Enclosure type Meets IP20 rating Pilot duty rating C300 R150 Isolation voltage 250V continuous Reinforced Insulation Type Outputs to Aux and Network Inputs to Outputs Type tested for 60 s 3250V DC 1 0 to Aux and Network Inputs to Outputs 250V continuous Reinforced Insulation Type Outputs to Aux and Network Inputs to Outputs Type tested for 60 s 720V DC Inputs to Aux and Network 3250V DC Outputs to Aux and Network Inputs to Outputs 50V continuous Reinforced Insulation Type 1 0 to Aux and Network Inputs to Outputs Type tested for 60 s 720V DC 1 0 to Aux and Network Inputs t
334. peed Counter HSC5 1024 bit 10 HSC High Speed Counter HSC4 512 bit 9 HSC High Speed Counter HSC3 256 bit 8 HSC High Speed Counter HSC2 128 bit 7 HSC High Speed Counter HSC1 64 bit 6 HSC High Speed Counter HSCO 32 bit 5 Ell Event Input Interrupt Event 3 16 bit 4 EIl Event Input Interrupt Event 2 8 bit 3 Ell Event Input Interrupt Event 1 4 bit 2 Ell Event Input Interrupt Event 0 2 bit 1 UFR User Fault Routine Interrupt UFR 1 bit 0 reserved To flush interrupt s 1 2 Select which interrupts you want to flush Find the Decimal Value for the interrupt s you selected Add the Decimal Values if you selected more than one type of interrupt Enter the sum into the UIF instruction For example to disable EH Event 1 and EII Event 3 EII Event 1 4 EII Event 3 16 4 16 20 enter this value UIC User Interrupt Clear UIC Enable UIC name or Pin ID IROType or ENO Pin ID 46055 This C function clears Interrupt Lost bit for the selected User Interrupt s Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 295 Appendix D User Interrupts Types of Interrupts Disabled by the UIC Instruction Interrupt Type Element Decimal Corresponding _ Value Bit Plug In Module UPM4 8388608 bit 23 Plug In Module UPM3 4194304 bit 22 Plug In Module UPM2 2097152 b
335. process Deviation REAL Deviation for auto tuning This is the standard deviation used to evaluate the noise band needed for AutoTune noise band 3 Deviation Step REAL Step value for AutoTune Must be greater than noise band and less than load ATDynamSet REAL Auto Tune time Set the time to wait for stabilization after the step test in seconds Auto Tune process will be stopped when ATDynamSet time expires ATReset BOOL Determines whether the output value is reset to zero after an AutoTune sequence e True Reset IPIDCONTROLLER output to zero after Auto tune process e False leaves output at load value 1 The application engineer can e For example in a project that i stimate the value of ATParams Deviation by observing the value of Proces input nvolves the control of temperature if the temperature stabilizes around 22 C and a fluctuation of 21 7 22 5 C is observed the value of ATParams Deviation will be 22 5 21 7 2 0 4 How to AutoTune Before you continue be sure that e the system is stable e the Auto input to the PIDCONTROLLER is set to false e AT_Param is set The input Gain and DirectActing must be set according to the process and DerivativeGain set typically to 0 1 To auto tune perform the following steps 1 Set the Initialize input to TRUE 2 Set the AutoTune input to TRUE 3 Wait for the Process input to stabilize or go to steady state 4 Ch
336. processor before the power supply shuts down the system Understanding this concept is important The user program should be written to take this effect into account Other Types of Line Conditions Occasionally the power source to the system can be temporarily interrupted It is also possible that the voltage level may drop substantially below the normal line voltage range for a period of time Both of these conditions are considered to be a loss of power for the system For most applications normal convective cooling keeps the controller within the specified operating range Ensure that the specified temperature range is maintained Proper spacing of components within an enclosure is usually sufficient for heat dissipation In some applications a substantial amount of heat is produced by other equipment inside or outside the enclosure In this case place blower fans inside the enclosure to assist in air circulation and to reduce hot spots near the controller Additional cooling provisions might be necessary when high ambient temperatures are encountered TIP Do not bring in unfiltered outside air Place the controller in an enclosure to protect it from a corrosive atmosphere Harmful contaminants or dirt could cause improper operation or damage to components In extreme cases you may need to use air conditioning to protect against heat build up within the enclosure A hard wired master control relay MCR provides a reliable me
337. pt occurs e Overflow Interrupt occurs Programmable Limit Switch Position HSCSTS PLSPosition Description Data Format HSC Modes JUser Program Access HSCSTS PLSPosition Word INT 0 9 read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode HSCAPPHSCMode on page 172 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Use the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Chapter 10 When the HSC is in Counting mode and PLS is enabled this parameter indi cates which PLS element is used for the current HSC configuration Error Code HSCSTS ErrorCode Description Data Format HSC Modes User Program Access HSCSTS ErrorCode Word INT 0 9 read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode HSCAPRHSCMode on page 172 The Error Codes detected by the HSC sub system are displayed in this word Errors include Error Code Sub element HSC counting Error Error Description Code Bit 15 8 high byte 0 255 The non zero value for high byte indicates that the HSC error is due to PLS data setting The value of high byte indicates which element of PLS data triggers the error Bit 7 0 low byte 0x00 No error 0x01 Invalid HSC counting mode 0x02 Invalid High preset 0x03 Invalid overflow 0x04 Invalid underflow 0x05 No PLS data Writing to this element is not recommended except for clearing existing errors and to capture new HSC erro
338. pter 1 Thermocouple and RTD Plug in Modules 236 Event Input Interrupt Support cveriesg sce ate eae eans 237 HSC SUpport es a I u Iit dant ak OM RRE oe ate its 237 Expansion I O iima a r E REEE a a 240 Discrete Expansion Oren e a aa a i S 240 Analog Expansion I O sscjcnc es caeiedons ios Sserewbanaees 244 Specialty Expansion Os isc 5asercsncseedas avis eee ie ranean 246 Appendix B Modbus Mapping reren etr eaves unin oigateuseven ETRE 249 Endian Configuration ics cucso 955 yauoatneeesed ees eeeesneeans 249 Mapping Address Space and supported Data Types 249 Example 1 Panel View Component HMI Master to Micro800 OS Lave arene Sai tee ae a eases tes Dah ol E 250 Example 2 Micro800 Master to PowerFlex 4M Drive Slave 251 Pertorniance AE O Aa dent E oi Suh GG 0 BT 254 Appendix C Flash Upgrade Your Micro800 Firmware 0 00 ee ee ee eee 255 Establish Communications Between RSLinx and a Micro830 Micro850 Controller through USB 065 260 Configure Controller Password o n xsricnnorie nm aretemtcnste wid doeaees 267 Set Controller Password iaacticcicne id 2d dwt ceoetenaed thas 267 Change Passwordics iis eyo Ae e ston eene say eee rege 268 Cleat Password sacicta chat dusid pe abn oy 2S ahaa he TRA 269 Use the High Speed Counteteacesy demas nhses hae werewnsetew sake 270 Create the HSC Project and Variables vik ou cies eanave hee 272 Assign Values to the HSC Variables
339. r General Memory Serial Port USB Port E Ethernet Internet Protocol Port Settings Port Diagnostics Date and Time Interrupts Startup Faults Modbus Mapping Embedded 1 0 Plug In Modules lt Empty gt lt Empty gt lt Empty gt lt Empty gt lt Empty gt lt Empty gt lt Empty gt 2 Select CIP Serial from the Driver field Controller Serial Port Driver Baud Rate Parity Station Address Advanced Settings Protocol Control DF1 Mode Control Line Error Detection Embedded Responses ACK Timeout x20ms NAK Retries Expansion Modules ao me i J DF1 Full Duplex No Handshake CRC Z Packet after One Received Y 50 ENQRetries g Transmit Retries configuration tree go to the Controller properties Click Serial Port RTS Off Delay 0 RTS Send Delay 0 3 Specify a baud rate Select a communication rate that all devices in your system support Configure all devices in the system for the same communication rate Default baud rate is set at 38400 bps 4 In most cases parity and station address should be left at default settings Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Communication Connections Chapter 5 5 Click Advanced Settings and set Advanced parameters Refer to the table CIP Serial Driver Parameters on page 49 for a description of the CIP Serial parameters
340. r connections No protocol configuration is required other than configuring the Modbus mapping table For information on Modbus mapping see Modbus Mapping for Micro800 on page 249 CIP Symbolic Server CIP Symbolic is supported by any CIP compliant interface including Ethernet EtherNet IP and Serial Port CIP Serial This protocol allows HMIs to easily connect to the Micro830 Micro850 controller Micro850 controllers support up to 16 simultaneous EtherNet IP server connections CIP Serial supported on both Micro830 and Micro850 controllers makes use of DF1 Full Duplex protocol which provides point to point connection between two devices It combines data transparency American National Standards Institute ANSI X3 28 1976 specification subcategory D1 and 2 way simultaneous transmission with embedded responses subcategory F1 The Micro800 controllers support the protocol through RS 232 connection to external devices such as computers running RSLinx Classic software PanelView Component terminals firmware revisions 1 70 and above or other controllers Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Communication Connections Chapter 5 that support CIP Serial over DF1 Full Duplex such as ControlLogix and CompactLogix controllers that have embedded serial ports To configure CIP Serial see Configure CIP Serial Driver on page 48 To configure for EtherNet IP see Configure Ethernet Settings on
341. r software described in this manual Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations WARNING Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequence SHOCK HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present BURN HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures PP gt IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product Allen Bradley Rockwell Software Rockwell Automation Micro800 Micro830 Micro850 Connected Components Workbench and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies Preface Who Should Use this Manual Purpose of th
342. ram to set and clear this bit Mask for IN HSCO MN Description Data Format HSC Modes User Program Access MN Underflow Mask bit 25 39 read only 1 For Mode descriptions see Count Down HSCSTS CountDownFlag on page 183 The MN Underflow Mask control bit is used to enable allow or disable not allow a underflow interrupt from occurring If this bit is clear 0 and a Underflow Reached condition is detected by the HSC the HSC user interrupt is not executed This bit is controlled by the user program and retains its value through a power cycle It is up to the user program to set and clear this bit Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 HSC Interrupt Status Information Use the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Chapter 10 Mask for IH HSCO0 MH Description Data Format HSC Modes JUser Program Access MH High Preset Mask bit 0 9 read only 1 For Mode descriptions see Count Down HSCSTS CountDownFlag on page 183 The MH High Preset Mask control bit is used to enable allow or disable not allow a high preset interrupt from occurring If this bit is clear 0 and a High Preset Reached condition is detected by the HSC the HSC user interrupt is not executed This bit is controlled by the user program and retains its value through a power cycle It is up to the user program to set and clear this bit Mask for IL H
343. rce to 5 Comm Port e Defaults for the remaining Inputs e Accept Defaults for the remainder and click Finish 5 Select Parameters from the Connected Components Workbench window Fle Edt View Buld Debug Tools Communications Window Help De id amp 4a a Project Organizer ax Powerflex 4M_1 be Name 94 Start U 2 J PowerFlex 4M t E 9 Upload Parameters JPropertes wizards Faults Reset me B ronerFiex a_i La Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Modbus Mapping for Micro800 Appendix B 6 The Parameter window opens Resize it to view the parameters From this window you can view and set data values of Parameters Parameter List PowerHex 4M_I Internal value Defadt Commanded Freg 5 0 0 0 0 Output Current 0 00 Output Yoltage o o oD 0 0 OC Bus Yoltage o o 0000000000000010 0000000000000 0000002000000 0DD0000000001 1200 7 From the Parameter window change the following Parameters to set the communications for Modbus RTU so that the PowerFlex 4M Drive will communicate with Micro830 850 via Modbus RTU communication Parameter Description Setting C302 Comm Data Rate Baud Rate 4 19200 bps 4 C303 Communication Node Address address range is 1 127 2 C304 Comm Loss Action Action taken when loss communication 0 0 Fault with coast stop C305 Comm Loss Time Time remain in c
344. re rated 90 C 194 F insulation max Wiring category 2 on signal ports 2 on power ports Wire type Use Copper Conductors only Terminal screw torque 0 6 Nm 4 4 Ib in max using a 2 5 mm 0 10 in flat blade screwdriver Input circuit type 24V DC sink source standard and high speed Output circuit type Relay 24V DC sink standard and high 24V DC source standard and high speed speed Event input interrupt support Yes Power consumption 5 28 W Power supply voltage range 20 4 26 4V DC Class 2 1 0 rating Input 24V DC 8 8 mA Input 24V DC 8 8 mA Output 2 A 240V AC general use Output 24V DC Class 2 1 A per point Surrounding air temperature 30 C 24 V DC Class 2 0 3 A per point Surrounding air temperature 65 C 210 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 General Specifications 2080 LC30 240QWB 2080 LC30 240VB 2080 LC30 240BB Attribute 2080 LC30 240WB 2080 LC30 240VB Specifications Appendix A 2080 LC30 240BB Isolation voltage 250V continuous Reinforced Insulation Type Outputs to Aux and Network Inputs to Outputs Type tested for 60 s 720V DC Inputs to Aux and Network 3250 V DC Outputs to Aux and Network Inputs to Outputs 50V continuous Reinforced Insulation Type 1 0 to Aux and Network Inputs to Outputs Type tested for 60 s 720V DC 1 0 to Aux and Network Inputs to Outputs Pilot du
345. response to be taken by the module during an open circuit e Upscale Sets input to full upper scale value of channel data word The full scale value is determined by the selected input type data format and scaling e Downscale Sets input to full lower scale value of channel data word The low scale value is determined by the selected input type data format and scaling e Hold Last State Sets input to last input value e Zero Sets input to 0 to force the channel data word to 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Configure Your Expansion 1 0 Module Expansion I O Support Chapter 6 Filter frequency The 2085 IRT4 module uses a digital filter that provides noise rejection for the input signals The filter is set by default at 4 Hz per The digital filter provides 3 db 50 amplitude attenuation at 4 Hz filter frequency The 3dB frequency is the filter cut off frequency The cut off frequency is defined as the point on the frequency response curve where frequency components of the input signal are passed with 3dB of attenuation All input frequency components at or below the cut off frequency are passed by the digital filter with less than 3 dB of attenuation All frequency components above the cutoff frequency are increasingly attenuated The cut off frequency for each channel is defined by its filter frequency selection and is equal to the filter frequency setting Choose a filter fr
346. ring operation an HSC error is generated and causes a controller fault You can use the PLS in Up high Down low or both directions If your application only counts in one direction ignore the other parameters The PLS function can operate with all of the other HSC capabilities The ability to select which HSC events generate a user interrupt are not limited PLS Example Setting Up the PLS data Using Connected Components Workbench define the PLS data HSC_PLS s dimension as 1 4 PLS Data Definition Data Description Data Format HSCHP High Preset 32 bit signed integer HSCLP Low Preset HSCHPOutput Output High Data 32 bit binary HSCLPOutput Output Low Data E 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 193 Chapter 10 Use the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Name Projects Name Data Type Dimension Initial alue Attribute TI Micro830 mgt 7 A of hti HSC HSC m Readwrite E A Programs HSC_STS HSCSTS a Readwrite HSC_APP HSCAPP n ReadWrite SEC untitledto s Bun s E HSC PLS PLS gt 1 4 Ea Readwrite ie Local variables zi HSC_PLS 1 PLS nit Readwrite J HSC_PLS t HscHP DINT 250 Readwrite i Global Variables HSC_PLS 1 HscLP DINT 2 Readwrite O patar HS5C_PLS 1 HscHPOutPut UDINT 3 ReadWrite Up Datatypes HSC_PLS 1 HscLPOutPut UDINT o Readwrite D Function Blocks B crsa PLS F
347. rking on a machine or process controlled by a controller Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Chapter2 About Your Controller Power Considerations 14 Safety Circuits WARNING Explosion Hazard Do not connect or disconnect connectors while circuit is live Circuits installed on the machine for safety reasons like overtravel limit switches stop push buttons and interlocks should always be hard wired directly to the master control relay These devices must be wired in series so that when any one device opens the master control relay is de energized thereby removing power to the machine Never alter these circuits to defeat their function Serious injury or machine damage could result Power Distribution There are some points about power distribution that you should know e The master control relay must be able to inhibit all machine motion by removing power to the machine I O devices when the relay is de energized It is recommended that the controller remain powered even when the master control relay is de energized e Ifyou are using a DC power supply interrupt the load side rather than the AC line power This avoids the additional delay of power supply turn off The DC power supply should be powered directly from the fused secondary of the transformer Power to the DC input and output circuits should be connected through a set of master control relay contacts Periodic Tests of Master Contro
348. rogram The High Speed Counter function operates as described in the following diagram High Speed Counter Operation Variable Overflow z 4 442 147 483 647 maximum 0 Underflow ee minimum Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Use the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Chapter 10 TIP You must set a proper value for the variables OFSetting HPSetting and UFSetting before triggering Start Run HSC Otherwise the controller will be faulted Setting a value for LPSetting is optional for certain counting modes To learn more about HscAppData variable input see HSC APP Data Structure on page 171 When using HSC function blocks it is recommended that you e set HSCAppData underflow setting UF Setting and low preset setting LPSetting to a value less than 0 to avoid possible HSC malfunction when the HSC accumulator is reset to 0 e set HSCAppData overflow setting OF Setting and high preset setting HPSetting to a value greater than 0 to avoid possible HSC malfunction when the HSC accumulator is reset to 0 In some cases a sub counter will be disabled by master counter mode See the section HSC Mode HSCAPP HSCMode on page 172 TIP HSCO is used in this document to define how any HSC works IMPORTANT The HSC function can only be used with the controller s embedded 1 0 It cannot be used with expansion I O modules HSC Inputs and All Micro830 and Micro850 cont
349. rollers except 2080 LCxx xxAWB have Wiring Mapping Micro830 and Micro850 High Speed Counters 100 kHz high speed counters Each main high speed counter has four dedicated inputs and each sub high speed counter has two dedicated inputs 10 16 point 24 point 48 point Number of HSC 2 4 6 Main high speed counters 1 counter 0 2 counter 0 2 3 counters 0 2 and 4 Sub high speed counters 1 counter 1 2 counter 1 3 3 counters 1 3 and 5 High Speed Counter Inputs used HSCO 0 3 HSC1 2 3 HSC2 4 7 HSC3 6 7 HSC4 8 11 HSC5 10 11 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 167 Chapter 10 Use the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch HSCO s sub counter is HSC1 HSC2 s sub counter is HSC3 and HSC4 s sub counter is HSCS Each set of counters share the input The following table shows the dedicated inputs for the HSCs depending on the mode HSC Input Wiring Mapping Embedded Input 0 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 HSCO A C B D Reset Hold HSC1 A C B D HSC2 A C B D Reset Hold HSC3 A C B D HSC4 A C B D Reset Hold HSC5 A C B D The following tables show the input wiring mapping for the different Micro830 and Micro850 controllers Micro830 10 and 16 point Controller HSC Input Wiring Mapping Modes of Operation Input 0 HSCO Input 1 HSCO Mode Value in Input 2 HSC1 Input 3 HSC1 User Program
350. rrupts 4 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 285 Appendix D User Interrupts Plug in Module Interrupts 5 An interrupt must be configured and enabled to execute When any one of the interrupts is configured and enabled and subsequently occurs the user program 1 suspends its execution of the current POU 2 performs a pre defined POU based upon which interrupt occurred and 3 returns to the suspended operation Interrupt Operation Example f POU 2 POU 2 is the main control program rung 0 POU 10 POU 10 is the interrupt routine e An Interrupt Event occurs at rung rung 123 Pa 123 e POU 10 is executed e POU 2 execution resumes immediately after POU 10 is rung 275 scanned Specifically if the controller program is executing normally and an interrupt event occuts 1 the controller stops its normal execution 2 determines which interrupt occurred 3 goes immediately to the beginning of the POU specified for that User Interrupt 4 begins executing the User Interrupt POU or set of POU FBs if the specified POU calls a subsequent FB 5 completes the POU 6 resumes normal execution from the point where the controller program was interrupted When Can the Controller Operation be Interrupted The Micro830 controllers allow interrupts to be serviced at any point of a program scan Use UID UIE instructions to protect program block whic
351. rs Accumulator HSCSTS Accumulator Description Data Format User Program Access HSCSTS Accumulator long word 32 bit INT read only HSCSTS Accumulator contains the number of counts detected by the HSC sub system If either mode 0 or mode 1 is configured the accumulator is reset to 0 when a high preset is reached or when an overflow condition is detected High Preset HSCSTS HP Description Data Format User Program Access HSCSTS HP long word 32 bit INT read only The HSCSTS HP is the upper setpoint in counts that defines when the HSC sub system generates an interrupt The data loaded into the high preset must be less than or equal to the data resident in the overflow HSCAPP OFSetting parameter or an HSC error is generated Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 187 Chapter 10 188 Use the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch This is the latest high preset setting which may be updated by PLS function from the PLS data block Low Preset HSCSTS LP Description Data Format User Program Access HSCSTS LP long word 32 bit INT read only The HSCSTS LP is the lower setpoint in counts that defines when the HSC sub system generates an interrupt The data loaded into the low preset must greater than or equal to the data resident in the underflow HSCAPP UFSetting parameter or an HSC error is generated If the und
352. s Process IXL messages 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Sleep until next cycle In a case where bindings are defined variables consumed by a resource are updated after the inputs are scanned and the variables produced for other resources are sent before updating inputs When a cycle time is specified a resource waits until this time has elapsed before starting the execution of a new cycle The POUs execution time varies depending on the number of active steps in SFC programs and instructions such as jumps IFs and returns When a cycle exceeds the specified time the loop continues to execute the cycle but sets an overrun flag In such a case the application no longer runs in real time When a cycle time is not specified a resource performs all steps in the loop then restarts a new cycle without waiting Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Program Execution in Micro800 Chapter 8 Controller Load and eee one a T o of i anni steps as ae in the Execution Rules diagram could be interrupted by other controller activities eee which have higher priority than the main steps Such activities include onsiderations 1 User Interrupt events including STI EII and HSC interrupts 2 Communication data packet receiving and transmitting 3 Motion engine periodical execution When one or several of these activities occupy a significant percentage of the Micro800 controller execution t
353. s configuration OxF850 An error occurred in the STI Review and change the STI configuration in the Micro800 controller properties configuration OxF860 A data overflow occurred Perform the following A data overflow error is generated when c s the ladder structured text or function orrect the program to ensure that there is no data overflow A execution encounters a e Build and download the program using Connected Components Workbench e Put the Micro800 controller into Run mode 0xF870 An index address was out of data space Perform the following e Correct the program to ensure that there is no index address out of data space e Build and download the program using Connected Components Workbench e Put the Micro800 controller into Run mode 0xF880 A data conversion error occurred Perform the following Correct the program to ensure that there is no data conversion error e Build and download the program using Connected Components Workbench e Put the Micro800 controller into Run mode 0xF888 The call stack of the controller cannot Change the project to reduce the quantity of blocks being called within a block support the sequence of calls to function blocks in the current project Too many blocks are within another block OxF898 An error occurred in the user interrupt Correct the user interrupt configuration for plug in I O module in the user program to configuration for the plug in 1 0 module match that of the actual hardware
354. s can abort the currently executing function block This is mostly useful for on the fly adjustments to position velocity or to halt after a specific distance Example Move to Position Ignored Due to Busy Simple move position using one instance of MC_MoveRelative MC_MoveAbsolute Velocity This command is ignored Execute T Busy1 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 ooo Time For simple moves the movement function block finishes Busy output indicates that the function block is executing and must be allowed to finish before Execute input is toggled again If Execute is toggled again before Busy is false the new command is ignored No error is generated 46053 129 Chapter 9 130 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO Example Successful Aborted Move Velocity Aborted move is possible if using two instances of MC_MoveRelative MC_MoveAbsolute The second instance can immediately abort the first instance and vice versa for applications where on the fly corrections are needed Time Execute1 Busy1 CommandAborted1 Execute2 Busy2 46052 Example Changing Velocity With No Abort When changing velocity generally an aborted move is not necessary since the function block is only Busy during acceleration or deceleration Only a single instance of the function block is required To bring the axis to a s
355. s make sure that there is 50 8 mm 2 in of space on all sides after attaching the optional parts DIN Rail Mounting The module can be mounted using the following DIN rails 35 x 7 5 x 1 mm EN 50 022 35 x7 5 TIP For environments with greater vibration and shock concerns use the panel mounting method instead of DIN rail mounting Before mounting the module on a DIN rail use a flat blade screwdriver in the DIN rail latch and pry it downwards until it is in the unlatched position 1 Hook the top of the DIN rail mounting area of the controller onto the DIN rail and then press the bottom until the controller snaps onto the DIN rail 2 Push the DIN rail latch back into the latched position Use DIN rail end anchors Allen Bradley part number 1492 EAJ35 or 1492 EAHJ35 for vibration or shock environments To remove your controller from the DIN rail pry the DIN rail latch downwards until it is in the unlatched position Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 23 Chapter 3 24 Install Your Controller Panel Mounting The preferred mounting method is to use four M4 8 screws per module Hole spacing tolerance 0 4 mm 0 016 in Follow these steps to install your controller using mounting screws 1 Place the controller against the panel where you are mounting it Make sure the controller is spaced properly 2 Mark drilling holes through the mounting screw holes and mounting feet then re
356. s and Accessories Notes 110 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Overview of Program Execution Chapter 8 Program Execution in Micro800 This section provides a brief overview of running or executing programs with a Micro800 controller A Micro800 cycle or scan consists of reading inputs executing programs in sequential order updating outputs and performing communications housekeeping Program names must begin with a letter or underscore followed by up to 127 letters digits or single underscores Use programming languages such as ladder logic function block diagrams and structured text Up to 256 programs may be included in a project depending on available controller memory By default the programs are cyclic executed once per cycle or scan As each new program is added to a project it is assigned the next consecutive order number When you start up the Project Organizer in Connected Components Workbench it displays the program icons based on this order You can view and modify an order number for a program from the program s properties However the Project Organizer does not show the new order until the next time the project is opened The Micro800 supports jumps within a program Call a subroutine of code within a program by encapsulating that code as a User Defined Function Block UDFB Although a UDFB can be executed within another UDFB a maximum nesting depth of five is supported
357. s are listed below Error is flagged whenever there is violation to these relationships e Lower Soft Limit should be less than the Upper Soft Limit e Start Stop velocity should not be greater than the maximum velocity e Emergency Stop velocity should not be greater than the maximum velocity e Homing velocity should not be greater than the maximum velocity e Homing acceleration should not be greater than maximum acceleration e Homing deceleration should not be greater than maximum deceleration e Homing jerk should not be greater than maximum jerk Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO Chapter 9 e Homing creep velocity should not be greater than maximum velocity Delete an Axis 1 On the device configuration tree and under Motion right click the axis name and select Delete Motion Sf axis a Rename Dynamics Homing 2 A message box appears asking to confirm deletion Click Yes Motion S axis gg Rename Delete Dynamics Homing Monitor an Axis To monitor an axis the Connected Components Workbench software should be connected to the controller and in DEBUG mode 1 On the device configuration page click Axis Monitor 2 The Axis Monitor window appears with the following characteristics available for viewing e axis state e axis homed e movement e error description e command position in user unit e command velocity
358. s is not operational due to PTO Accumulator moving beyond the PTO Accumulator logic limit or logic limit error detected or due to expected PTO the function block is aborted as the PTO accumulator logic limit error in a function block Accumulator logic limit has been reached Reset the state of the axis using the MC_Reset Check the velocity or target position settings for function block the function block Or use MC_SetPosition Check the velocity or target position settings for function block to adjust the axis coordinate system the function block Or use MC_SetPosition function block to adjust the axis coordinate system 13 MC_FB_ERR_ENGINE A motion engine execution error is detected during The axis is not operational due to a motion engine the execution of this function block execution error Power cycle the whole motion setup including Power cycle the whole motion setup including controller drives and actuators and re download controller drives and actuators and re download the User Application the User Application If the fault is persistent call Tech support If the fault is persistent contact your local Rockwell Automation technical support representative For contact information see http support rockwellautomation com MySuppor t asp 16 MC_FB_ERR_NOT_HOMED The Function Block cannot execute because the The axis is not operational because the axis is not axis needs to be homed first homed Execute homing against the
359. s specified in the user program the actual hardware base e Reconfigure the program to match the target hardware type 308 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Troubleshooting Appendix F List of Error Codes for Micro800 controllers Error Code Description Recommended Action OxF003 One of the following occurred Perform one of the following e The memory module hardware faulted Remove the memory module and plug it in again e The memory module connection e Obtain anew memory module faulted e Upgrade the Micro800 controller s firmware revision to be compatible with the e The memory module was incompatible memory module For more information on firmware revision compatibility go to with the Micro800 controller s http www rockwellautomation com support firmware html firmware revision OxF004 A failure occurred during the memory Attempt the data transfer again If the error persists replace the memory module module data transfer OxF005 The user program failed an integrity Perform one of the following ae Micro800 controller was Cycle power on your Micro800 controller Then download your program using Connected Components Workbench and start up your system e Refer to the Wire Your Controller on page 29 OxF006 The user program is incompatible with Perform one of the following Toe controller s tirinware e Upgrade the Micro800 controller s firmware revision
360. se Train Outputs PTO Chapter 9 Example Error Stop using MC_Stop cannot be Aborted Velocity This command is ignored Time MC_Stop Execute Busy Motion function block Execute 46049 MC_Halt and MC_Stop are both used to bring an axis to a Standstill but MC_Stop is used when an abnormal situation occurs TIP MC_Stop can abort other motion function blocks but can never be aborted itself TIP MC_Stop goes to the Stopping state and normal operation cannot resume Motion Axis and The following state diagram illustrates the behavior of the axis at a high level when multiple motion control function blocks are activated The basic rule is that Pa rameters motion commands are always taken sequentially even if the controller has the capability of real parallel processing These commands act on the axis state diagram The axis is always in one of the defined states see diagram below Any motion command is a transition that changes the state of the axis and as a consequence modifies the way the current motion is computed Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 133 Chapter9 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO Motion Axis State Diagram MC_MoveAbsolute MC_MoveRelative MC_MoveVelocity MC_Halt MC_MoveAbsolute MC_MoveRelative MC_Halt MC_MoveVelocity s k n i Error lt sprror Stopping z 5 N Note 6 i e i Done N Error SY Note 1 i rd
361. seeleaers ose 183 Count Down HSCSTS CountDownFlag 55 183 Mode Done HSCSTS Mode1Done 0 0 cece cece ees 183 Overflow USCS PSV Bien ace dees ta ie oheeiess 183 Underflow HSCSTS UNF 46 v0 5 an danas ettee eareamsis 184 Count Direction HSCSTS CountDir 0 00 cee eee 184 High Preset Reached HSCSTS HPReache d cscs sa tagees 184 Low Preset Reached HSCSTS LPReached 0 0000 185 Overflow Interrupt HSCSTS OFCauselnter 4 185 Underflow Interrupt HSCSTS UFCauseInter 185 High Preset Interrupt HSCSTS HPCauselnter 186 Low Preset Interrupt HSCSTS LPCauseInter 186 Programmable Limit Switch Position HSCSTS PLSPosition 186 Error Code HSCSTS ErrorCode cccccesceceeencees 187 Accumulator HSCSTS Accumulator 0 cece eee ee 187 High Preset HSCSTS HP oc0siccp ho icin dela eetieis bei 187 Low Preset HSCSTS LP ih pale eeadae ede clita teat rekes 188 High Preset Output HSCSTS HPOutput 0006 188 Low Preset Output HSCSTS LPOutput icicesientencsiweess 188 HSC High Speed Counter Function Block 0 0005 189 HSC Commands HScCmd srsisoagtu keh eed aioe 189 ASC SET SES Function Block 1s 2s dccn ae rans ae ate ne eeeees amr 191 Programmable Limit Switch PLS Function 04 191 PLS ata Stree ea gs ie Acoranwatach ost eie Sa win ole Nieaten tata 192 Rockwell Automati
362. set block and correct the profile or re execute the function block function block when the axis velocity is compatible Correct the motion profile in the function block or with the requested motion profile re execute the function block when the axis velocity is compatible with the requested motion profile 10 MC_FB_ERR_SOFT_LIMIT This function block cannot execute as it will end up The axis is not operational due to soft limit error moving beyond the soft limit or the function block detected or due to expected soft limit error in a is aborted as the soft limit has been reached function block Check the velocity or target position settings in the Reset the state of the axis using the MC_Reset function block or adjust soft limit setting function block Check the velocity or target position settings for the function block or adjust Soft Limit setting 11 MC_FB_ERR_HARD_LIMIT This function block is aborted as the Hard Limit The axis is not operational due to hard limit error switch active state has been detected during axis detected movement or aborted as the Hard Limit switch Reset the state of the axis using the MC_Reset active state has been detected before axis function block and then move the axis away from movement starts the hard limit switch in the opposite direction Move the axis away from the hard limit switch in the opposite direction 12 MC_FB_ERR_LOG_LIMIT This function block cannot execute as it will end up The axi
363. show a Micro830 24 point controller with three plug in slots to illustrate the configuration process 1 Launch the Connected Components Workbench software and open your Micro830 project On the Project Organizer pane right click Micro830 and select Open Build a Upload Import gt Export p Delete Rename Properties 326 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Non isolated Thermocouple and RTD Plug in Modules Appendix G The Controller Properties page appears Program Major Fault PA Mode Mada Disconnected Micro830 wi Run Controller Mode cong t d Upload Manuals 2080 LC30 24QWB DD E Controller Rroperties General Memory Serial Port USB Port Date and Time Interrupts Startup Faults Modbus Mapping Embedded I O Plug In Modules lt Empty gt lt Empty gt lt Empty gt 2 To adda Micro800 plug in you can do any of the following e Right click the plug in slot you would like to configure and choose the plug in as shown below 2080 LC30 24QWB P 2080 IF2 2080 IF4 LO i 2080 OF2 2080 SERIALISOL 2080 TC2 2080 TRIMPOT6 General E Controller Properti E Controller roperties Memor Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 327 Appendix G Non isolated Thermocouple and RTD Plug in Modules 328 the plug in you E Plug In Modules lt Empty gt lt Empty
364. sition Distance Input For MC_MoveAbsolute function block the position input is the absolute location commanded to the axis For MC_MoveRelative the distance input is the relative location considering current axis position is 0 from current position Velocity Input Velocity can be a signed value Users are advised to use positive velocity Direction input for the MC_MoveVelocity function block can be used to define the direction of the move that is negative velocity x negative direction positive velocity For MC_MoveRelative and MC_MoveAbsolute function blocks the absolute value of the velocity is used Velocity input does not need to be reached if Jerk input is equal to 0 Direction Input For MC_MoveAbsolute direction input is ignored This is reserved for future use For MC_MoveVelocity direction input value can be 1 positive direction 0 current direction or 1 negative direction For any other value only the sign is taken into consideration For example 3 denotes negative direction 2 denotes positive direction and so on For MC_MoveVelocity the resulting sign of the product value derived from velocity x direction decides the motion direction if the value is not 0 For example if velocity x direction 300 then direction is positive Acceleration Deceleration and Jerk Inputs e Deceleration or Acceleration inputs should have a positive value If Deceleration or Acceleration is set to be
365. six HSC interrupts 194 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Use the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Chapter 10 An HSC interrupt is a mechanism that Micro830 and Micro850 controllers provide to execute selected user logic at a pre configured event Micro83v0 Re rivyrant mai row li i Pirosso Run Controller Mode iR vores as 2080 LC30 48QWB E KO untitleaLo i Local Yariables Micro830 E O untitleaoz Local Yariables i Global Variables a Properties l DataTypes Interrupt Type D Function Blocks HSC ID HSC Description HSCO F General ERPS FERE Memory Program UntitledLD E Communication Ports Serial Port Parameters L USB Port Auto Start Fase Date and Time nee C Interrupts Mask for IV True x Mask for IH False x4 Startup Faults Mask for IN FR a Mask for IL five Modbus Mapping L Ji Embedded 1 0 E Plug In Modules lt Empty gt HSC is used in this document to define how HSC interrupts work HSC Interrupt Configuration In the User Interrupt configuration window select HSC and HSC ID which is the interrupt triggering the User Interrupt The following diagram shows the selectable fields in the Interrupt configuration window Configure High Speed Counter HSC User Interrupt HSCO X Properties Interrupt Type HSC ID HSC Description HSCO Program UntitledLD Paane UntitledLD2 Auto Start Fase v Mask f
366. solated Unipolar Analog Input Non isolated Unipolar Analog Output The 2080 IF2 or 2080 IF4 plug in adds extra embedded Analog I O up to 10 analog inputs for 2080 IF2 and 20 analog inputs for 2080 IF4 and offers 12 bit resolution This plug in can be used in any slot of your Micro830 850 controller Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP is not supported Wire the Module Follow the pinout diagram to wire your plug in module 12 Pin Female Terminal Block Back 2080 IF2 View into terminal block B OOOO Pin A1 COM Pin A5 Not used Pin B3 COM Pin A2 Not used Pin A6 Not used Pin B4 VI 1 i San Pin A3 Not used Pin B1 VI 0 Pin B5 Cl 1 Pin A4 COM Pin B2 Cl 0 Pin B6 COM 2080 IF4 View into terminal block Pin A1 COM Pin A5 VI 3 Pin B3 COM Pin A2 VI 2 Pin A6 CI 3 Pin B4 VI 1 Pin A3 Cl 2 Pin B1 VI 0 Pin B5 Cl 1 Pin A4 COM Pin B2 Cl 0 Pin B6 COM Micro800 Non isolated Unipolar Analog Output Plug in Module The 2080 OF2 plug in adds extra embedded Analog I O up to 10 analog outputs and offers 12 bit resolution This plug in can be used in any slot of your Micro830 Micro850 controller Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP is not supported Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 105 Chapter 7 106 Micro800 Plug In Modules and Accessories Wire the Module Follow the pinout diagram to wire your plug in module Do not connect both the voltage and current terminals at the sam
367. sts possible error codes for your controller as well as recommended actions for recovery If an error persists after performing the recommended action contact your local Rockwell Automation technical support representative For contact information go to http support rockwellautomation com MySupport asp 307 Appendix F Troubleshooting List of Error Codes for Micro800 controllers Error Code Description Recommended Action OxF000 The controller was unexpectedly reset Perform one of the following a oran internal Download the program through Connected Components Workbench e A Micro800 controller revision e Refer to Wiring Requirements and Recommendation on page 29 2 xx attempts to save the program If the fault persists contact your local Rockwell Automation technical support and clear the user data If the system representative For contact information see variable _SYSVA_USER_DATA_LOST http support rockwellautomation com MySupport asp is set the controller is able to recover the user program but the user data is cleared If not the Micro800 controller program is cleared e A Micro800 controller revision 1 xx clears the program Note that the system variable SYSVA_USER_DATA_LOST is not available on Micro800 controllers revision 1 xx OxF001 The controller program has been cleared Perform one of the following This happened because e Download the program using Conne
368. successfully With multiple function blocks working on the same axis in a sequence the following rule applies When one movement on an axis is aborted with another movement on the same axis without having reached the final goal output Done will not be set on the first function block Behavior of Busy Output Every function block has a Busy output indicating that the function block is not yet finished for function blocks with an Execute input and new output values are pending for function blocks with Enable input Busy is set at the rising edge of Execute and reset when one of the outputs Done Aborted or Error is set or it is set at the rising edge of Enable and reset when one of the outputs Valid or Error is set It is recommended that the function block continue executing in the program scan for as long as Busy is true because the outputs will only be updated when the instruction is executing For example in ladder diagram if the rung becomes false before the instruction finishes executing the Busy output will stay true forever eventhough the function block has finished executing Always_on Dietna Velocity Acceleration Deceleration Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 127 Chapter9 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO General Rules for the Motion Function Block Parameter General Rules Output Active In current implementation buffered moves are not supp
369. sword Protected Controller To debug a locked controller you have to connect to the controller through the Connected Components Workbench software and provide the password before you can proceed to debug Launch the Connected Components Workbench software On the Device Toolbox expand Catalog by clicking the sign Select the catalog number of your controller 1 2 3 4 When requested provide the controller password 5 Build and save your project 6 Debug Download to a Password Protected Controller 1 Launch the Connected Components Workbench software 2 Click Connect 3 Select the target controller 4 When requested provide the controller password 5 Build and save the project if needed 6 Click Download 7 Click Disconnect Transfer Controller Program and Password Protect Receiving Controller In this scenario the user needs to transfer user application from controller locked to another Micro800 controller with the same catalog number The transfer of the user application is done through the Connected Components Workbench software by uploading from controller1 then changing the target controller in the Micro800 project and then downloading to controller2 Finally controller2 will be locked On the Device Toolbox open Discover and click Browse Connections Select target controllerl When requested enter the controller password for controller1 1 2 3 4 Build and save the pr
370. system whenever the accumulated value HSCSTS Accumulator has counted through the underflow variable HSCAPP UFSetting This bit is transitional and is set by the HSC sub system It is up to the control program to utilize track if necessary and clear 0 the underflow condition Underflow conditions do not generate a controller fault Count Direction HSCSTS CountDir Description Data Format HSCModes User Program Access HSCSTS CountDir bit 0 9 read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode HSCAPPHSCMode on page 172 The Count Direction status flag is controlled by the HSC sub system When the HSC accumulator counts up the direction flag is set 1 Whenever the HSC accumulator counts down the direction flag is cleared 0 If the accumulated value stops the direction bit retains its value The only time the direction flag changes is when the accumulated count reverses This bit is updated continuously by the HSC sub system whenever the controller is in a run mode High Preset Reached HSCSTS HPReached Description Data Format HSC Modes User Program Access HSCSTS HPReached bit 2 9 read write 1 For Mode descriptions see Count Down HSCSTS CountDownFlag on page 183 The High Preset Reached status flag is set 1 by the HSC sub system whenever the accumulated value HSCSTS Accumulator is greater than or equal to the high preset variable HSCAPP HPSet
371. t BOOL Start AutoTune sequence AlParameters Input AT_Param Auto tune parameters See AT_Param Data Type Output Output Real Output value from the controller AbsoluteError Output Real AbsoluteError is the difference between Process value and set point value ATWarnings Output DINT Warning for the Auto Tune sequence Possible value are e 0 No auto tune done e 1 Auto tuning in progress e 2 Auto tuning done e 1 Error 1 Controller input Auto is TRUE please set it to False e 2 Error 2 Auto tune error the ATDynaSet time expired OutGains Output GAIN_PID Gains calculated from AutoTune Sequences See GAIN PID Data type ENO Output BOOL Enable out Only applicable to LD ENO is not required in FBD Programming GAIN_PID Data Type Parameter Type Description DirectActing BOOL Types of acting e TRUE Direct acting e FALSE Reverse acting ProportionalGain REAL Proportional gain for PID gt 0 0001 Timelntegral REAL Time integral value for PID gt 0 0001 TimeDerivative REAL Time derivative value for PID gt 0 0 DerivativeGain REAL Derivative gain for PID gt 0 0 332 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 IPID Function Block Appendix H AT_Param Data Type Parameter Type Description Load REAL Initial controller value for Auto tuning
372. t TS LN fo Ny met ASG ry aN PIL oar o il Z l T Me6 666666666646 6660 WSS VVEVSeESSEESe9SE9C CRC COW I TETE TITE TOUTED OT UTD ppe TREE Se IC if ma a eee oP o oo S E 5 E E O i 2 AN lc M LJ MENIT IN as oo ok N J U e Y ah a SA Ay J LA A A J g 9060999909009099 9686890Q w IHE RE A TEY E N YV Y U U ass Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 25 Chapter3 Install Your Controller Micro830 48 Point Controllers 2080 LC30 48AWB 2080 LC30 48QWEB 2080 LC30 48QBB 108 mm 4 25 in 2080 LC30 48QVB 108 mm 4 25 in gi oo 666666 SOD e660 _ Coop a am o a A oro n Ao oas aa A wa A amr A mas a Aa A a A mar a A ma A a S 6 S Mg co e eS es ees 100mm
373. t Registers 4 Holding Registers 000001 to 065536 100001 to 165536 300001 to 365536 400001 to 465536 Supported Modbus Supported Modbus Supported Modbus Supported Modbus Address Used Address Used Address Used Address Used BE aege ae aI Aa oir lt i a a SINT Y 8 Y 8 BYTE Y 8 Y 8 USINT Y 8 Y 8 NT Y 16 Y 16 Y 1 Y 1 UINT Y 16 Y 16 Y 1 Y 1 WORD Y 16 Y 16 Y 1 Y 1 REAL Y 32 Y 32 Y 2 Y 2 DINT Y 32 Y 32 Y 2 Y 2 UDINT Y 32 Y 32 Y 2 Y 2 DWORD Y 32 Y 32 Y 2 Yy 2 LWORD Y 64 Y 64 Y 4 Y 4 ULINT Y 64 Y 64 Y 4 Y 4 LINT Y 64 Y 64 Y 4 Y 4 LREAL Y 64 Y 64 Y 4 Y 4 NOTE Arrays and strings are not supported In order to make it easier to map variables to five digit Modbus addresses the Connected Components Workbench mapping tool checks the number of characters entered for the Modbus Address If only five digits are entered the address is treated as a five digit Modbus address This means that the Discrete Inputs are mapped from 00001 09999 Coils are mapped from 10001 19999 Input Registers are mapped from 30001 39999 and Holding Registers are mapping from 40001 49999 Example 1 PanelView Component HMI Master to Micro800 Slave The embedded serial port is targeted for use with HMIs using Modbus RTU The maximum recommended cable distance is 3 meters Use the 2080 SERIALISOL serial port plug in module if longer distances or more noise immunity is needed The HMI is typically configured for Master and the Micro800 embed
374. t as the following in msec e 4 8 e 16 e 32 e 40 e 48 e 60 e 101 e 120 e 160 e 200 e 240 e 320 e 480 Filter Frequency 3dB Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Set as the following in Hz e 114 e 60 e 30 e 14 e N e ny vn WH FF FF amp CO Oo wo O A O Oo N O gt See Filter frequency on page 79 NOTE Filter update time 4 ms is not available for Thermocouple sensor types B R S E J C K L N or T or 0 10 mV Filter update time 8 ms is not available for Thermocouple sensor types B R S 91 Chapter6 Expansion 1 0 Support Configuration Parameters for 2085 IRT4 Configuration Property What to do Description 50 60 Hz Noise Rejection Set as See Noise Rejection on page 74 e Both default e 50 Only e 60 Only e Neither Open Circuit Response Choose from the following Defines the response to be taken during options an open circuit whether to upscale downscale hold last state or zero e Upscale p Upscale Sets input to full upper scale e Downscale value of channel data word The full scale value is determined by the selected e Hold Last State input type data format and scaling e Zero Downscale Sets input to full lower scale value of channel data word The low scale value is determined by the selected input type data format and scaling Hold Last State Sets input to last input value Zero
375. t module 2085 OF4 you can configure output unit minimum to maximum output range high clamp and low clamp values and overrange and underrange values Configuration Parameters for 2085 OF4 Configuration Property Enable channel What to do Select or deselect the checkbox Channel is not enabled by default Description Enable or disable a channel through this checkbox By default each channel is disabled Minimum maximum output range Choose from a range of values e 0 20 mA e 4 20 mA default e 10 10 V e 0 10V For more information see e Input Output Types and Ranges on page 72 e Valid Range of the Data Formats for 2085 IF4 2085 IF8 and 2085 OF4 on page 72 Data format Select from the following options e Raw Proportional Data e Engineering Units default e Percentage Data See Data formats on page 72 for detailed information High clamp value Click the checkbox to enable and enter a high clamp value Low clamp value Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Click the checkbox to enable and enter a low clamp value Sets an appropriate alarm that limits the output from the analog module to remain within a range configured by the controller even when the controller commands an output outside that range This safety feature sets a high clamp and a low clamp Once clamps are determined for a module any data receive
376. table enclosure with proper wiring method that complies with the governing electrical codes WARNING If you connect or disconnect the serial cable with power applied to this module or the serial device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding WARNING The local programming terminal port is intended for temporary use only and must not be connected or disconnected unless the area is assured to be nonhazardous WARNING The USB port is intended for temporary local programming purposes only and not intended for permanent connection If you connect or disconnect the USB cable with power applied to this module or any device on the USB network an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding The USB port is a nonincendive field wiring connection for Class Division2 Groups A B C and D WARNING Exposure to some chemicals may degrade the sealing properties of materials used in the Relays It is recommended that the User periodically inspect these devices for any degradation of properties and replace the module if degradation is found WARNING If you insert or remove the plug in module while backplane power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion i
377. table for definition of each bit 2085 IF8 Status Data Mapping 2085 IF8 I O Data Mapping Analog input values are read from Global Variables_IO_Xx_AI_yy where x represents the expansion slot number 1 4 and yy represents the channel number 00 07 Analog input status values can be read from Global Variables IO_Xx_ST_yy where x represents the expansion slot number 1 4 and yy represents the status word number 00 04 Individual bits within a status word can be read by appending a zz to the Global Variable name where zz is the bit number 00 15 Word R W 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Status 0 R PU GF CRC Reserved Status 1 R Reserved HHA1 LLA1 HA1 LA1 DE1 S1 Reserved HHAO LLAO HAO LAO DEO S0 Status 2 R Reserved HHA3 LLA3 HA3 LA3 DE3 S3 Reserved HHA2 LLA2 HA2 LA2 DE2 S2 Status 3 R Reserved HHA5 LLA5 HA5 LA5 DE5 S5 Reserved HHA4 LLA4 HA4 LA4 DE4 S4 Status 4 R Reserved HHA7 LLA7 HA7 LA7 DE7 S7 Reserved HHA6 LLAG HA6 LA6 DE6 S6 1 See Bit Field Descrip 96 ions table for a detailed de inition of each bit Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Expansion I O Support Chapter 6 Field Descriptions for 2085 IF4 and 2085 IF8 Input Modules Field Description CRC CRC error This bit is set 1
378. tandstill use MC_Halt Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Velocity Execute Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO Chapter 9 Time Busy Halt Execute Busy 46051 It is possible for the movement function blocks and MC_Halt to abort another motion function block during acceleration deceleration This is not recommended as the resulting motion profile may not be consistent A ATTENTION If MC_Halt aborts another motion function block during acceleration and the MC_Halt Jerk input parameter is less than the Jerk of the currently executing function block the Jerk of the currently executing function block is used to prevent an excessively long deceleration Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 131 Chapter9 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO Example Aborted Movement Function Block During Acceleration Deceleration Velocity Time Execute Busy CommandAborted Halt Execute Busy 46050 IMPORTANT f MC_Halt aborts another movement function block during acceleration and the MC_Halt Jerk input parameter is less than the Jerk of the currently executing FB the Jerk of the currently executing function block is used to prevent excessively long deceleration 132 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Positioning with Embedded Pul
379. tartup Faults Modbus Mapping Motion lt New Axis gt me 5 Plug In Modules lt Empty gt lt Empty gt lt Empty gt lt Empty gt lt Empty gt Si g 5 dl ing Falling v Falling v lt lt ing Falling o T T T n g oe ing Falling gig HE a a lt lt 3 Make sure that your encoder is connected to the Micro830 controller 4 Power up the Micro830 controller and connect it to your PC Build the program in Connected Components Workbench and download it to the controller Run the High Speed Counter 1 To test the program go into debug mode by doing any of the following e Click Debug menu then choose Start Debugging e Click the green play button below the menu bar or e Hit the F5 windows key d Components Workbench Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 279 AppendixC Quickstarts Now that we are on debug mode we can see the values of the HSC output The HSC function block has two outputs one is the STS MyStatus and the other is the HSCSTS MyInfo 2 Double click the Direct Contact labeled _IO_EM_DI_05 to bring up the Variable Monitoring window 3 Click the I O Micro830 tab Select the IO _EM_DI_05 row Check the boxes Lock and Logical Value so that this input will be forced in the ON position fill Variable Monitoring Global Variables Micro830 Local Variables UntitledLD1 System Variables Micro830 1 0
380. tatus 309 run status 309 serial communications 310 STI Function Configuration 300 Status Information 300 STS instruction 292 surge suppressors for motor starters 32 recommended 32 using 30 system assembly 26 27 zZzggzgzz T timing diagrams quadrature encoder 178 touch probe input switch 119 121 Trimpot analog 108 troubleshooting 309 U UID instruction 294 UIE instruction 295 UIF instruction 296 underrange 322 323 trigger 88 upper Positive Limit switch 119 120 user fault routine creating a user fault routine 291 recoverable and non recoverable faults 291 Index 341 user interrupts 287 configuration 291 disable instruction 294 enable instruction 295 flush instruction 296 emergency stop switches 17 V velocity input 125 Ww wiring 2085 1Q32T 67 diagrams 33 examples 38 recommendation 29 your controller 29 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 342 Index Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 343 Rockwell Automation Support Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At http www rockwellautomation com support you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the
381. terminal block 0 32 in 8 mm REF Male MIL C 83503 Header j a 24 12 AWG f 0 2 4 mm d U 46045 1492 IFM40xx DIN rail mountable terminal block 1 Maximum user cable length is dependent on how much voltage drop current x ohms ft x feet the user system can tolerate The user system should take into account the minimum turn on voltage required by external loads connected to the module the minimum turn on voltage required by the module and all of the voltage drops associated with wiring to and from the load sensors terminal blocks power sources and the module itself See the table on page 70 for voltage drop values for the 1492 cables shown above Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 69 Chapter 6 Discrete Expansion 1 0 Features 70 Expansion 1 0 Support Allen Bradley 1492 wiring systems are available for connecting the I O module to external I O These wiring systems include a pre wired cable available in four lengths 0 5m 1 6 feet 1 0m 3 3 feet 2 5m 8 2 feet 5 0m 16 4 feet An Interface Module for connecting external devices is also available Cables are equipped with keyed connectors at both ends for proper connections Interface modules are DIN rail mountable and are available with or without field side status indicating LEDs Stick on labels are provided with the Interface modules to identify I O wiring termination points 1
382. th a password and the correct password is not provided Micro800 controllers with firmware revision 2 are shipped with no password but a password can be set through the Connected Components Workbench software revision 2 or later The controller password is also backed up to the memory backup module that is 2080 MEMBAK RTC for Micro830 and Micro850 and 2080 LCD for Micro8 10 controllers If the password in the backup module is different from the memory backup module then restore operation will fail TIP For instructions on how to set change and clear controller passwords see Configure Controller Password on page 267 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 199 Chapter 11 Controller Security Compatibility Work with a Locked Controller 200 The Controller Password feature is supported on e Connected Components Workbench revision 2 and later e Micro800 controllers with revision 2 firmware For users with earlier versions of the software and or hardware refer to the compatibility scenarios below Connected Components Workbench revision 1 with Micro800 controller firmware revision 2 Connection to a Micro800 controller with firmware revision 2 using an earlier version of the Connected Components Workbench software revision 1 is possible and connections will be successful However the software will not be able to determine whether the controller is locked or not If the controller is not
383. the lost condition if necessary To use HSC refer to Use the High Speed Counter on page 270 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Exclusive Access Password Protection Chapter 11 Controller Security Micro800 security generally has two components Exclusive Access which prevents simultaneous configuration of the controller by two users e Controller Password Protection which secures the Intellectual Property contained within the controller and prevents unauthorized access Exclusive access is enforced on the Micro800 controller regardless of whether the controller is password protected or not This means that only one Connected Components Workbench session is authorized at one time and only an authorized client has exclusive access to the controller application This ensures that only one software session has exclusive access to the Micro800 application specific configuration Exclusive access is enforced on Micro800 firmware revision 1 and 2 When a Connected Components Workbench user connects to a Micro800 controller the controller is given exclusive access to that controller By setting a password on the controller a user effectively restricts access to the programming software connections to the controller to software sessions that can supply the correct password Essentially Connected Components Workbench operation such as upload and download are prevented if the controller is secured wi
384. the Motor Load properties as defined in the table axisl Motor and Load User Defined Unit Position mm bd Time sec Motor Revolution Modifying Motor Revolution parameters may cause Axis runaway Pulses per Revolution 200 0 Travel per Revolution 10 mm Direction Polarity Non inverted Mode BiDirectional Change Delay Time 10 ms IMPORTANT Certain parameters for Motor and Load are Real values For more information see Real Data Resolution on page 153 148 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO Chapter 9 Motor and Load Parameters Parameter User defined unit Description and Values Defines user unit scaling that matches your mechanical system values These units shall be carried forward into all command and monitor axis in user unit values throughout programming configuration and monitoring functions Position Select from any of the following options mm cm inches revs custom unit ASCII format of up to 7 characters long Time Read only Predefined in seconds Motor revolution Defines pulse per revolution and travel per revolution values Pulse per revolution Defines the number of pulses needed to obtain one revolution of the drive motor Range 0 0001 8388607 Default 200 0 Travel per revolution Travel per revolution defines the distance ei
385. the controller is proportional to the selected input and scaled into the maximum data range allowed by the bit resolution of the A D converter For example the data value range for a 10V DC user input is 32 768 32 767 which covers the full scale range of 10 5 10 5V See Valid Range of the Data Formats for 2085 IF4 2085 IF8 and 2085 OF4 on page 72 e Engineering Units The module scales the analog input data to the actual current or voltage values for the selected input range The resolution of the engineering units is 0 001 V or 0 001 mA per count e Percent Range The input data is presented as a percentage of the normal operating range For example OV 10V DC equals 0 100 The amount over and under the normal operating range the full scale range is also supported Valid Range of the Data Formats for 2085 IF4 2085 IF8 and 2085 OF4 The valid range of each Data Format corresponds to the full range of each Type Range or normal range For example the full range of 0 20 mA is 0 21 mA 72 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Expansion I O Support Chapter 6 Valid Range of the 2085 IF4 and 2085 IF8 Data Formats Data Format Type Range 0 20mA 4 20mA 10 10v 0 10 v4 Raw Proportional Data 32768 32767 Engineering Units 2 0 21000 3200 21000 10500 10500 500 10500 Percent Rangel 0 10500 500 10625 Not supported 500 10500
386. ther linear or rotational that the load moves per revolution of the motor Range 0 0001 8388607 Default 1 0 user unit Direction Defines polarity mode and change of delay time values Polarity Direction polarity determines whether the direction signal received by the controller as a discrete input should be interpreted on the input as received by the motion controller that is the non inverted case or whether the signal should be inverted prior to interpretation by the motion control logic Set as Inverted or Non inverted default Mode Set as Bi directional default Positive clockwise or Negative counter clockwise direction Change delay time Configure from 0 100 ms Default value is 10 ms The parameter is set as REAL float value in Connected Components Workbench To learn more about conversions and rounding of REAL values see Real Data Resolution on page 153 TIP A red border on an input field indicates that an invalid value has been entered Scroll over the field to see tooltip message that will let you know the valid value range for the parameter Supply the valid value ATTENTION Modifying Motor Revolution parameters may cause axis runaway Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 149 Chapter 9 150 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO Limits Edit the Limits parameters based on the table below axisl
387. ting This bit is updated continuously by the HSC sub system whenever the controller is in an executing mode Writing to this element is not recommended Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Use the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Chapter 10 Low Preset Reached HSCSTS LPReached Description Data Format HSC Modes User Program Access HSCSTS LPReached bit 2 9 read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode HSCAPPHSCMode on page 172 The Low Preset Reached status flag is set 1 by the HSC sub system whenever the accumulated value HSCSTS Accumulator is less than or equal to the low preset variable HSCAPP LPSetting This bit is updated continuously by the HSC sub system whenever the controller is in an executing mode Writing to this element is not recommended Overflow Interrupt HSCSTS OFCauselnter Description Data Format HSC Modes User Program Access HSCSTS OFCauselnter bit 0 9 read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode HSCAPRHSCMode on page 172 The Overflow Interrupt status bit is set 1 when the HSC accumulator counts through the overflow value and the HSC interrupt is triggered This bit can be used in the control program to identify that the overflow variable caused the HSC interrupt If the control program needs to perform any specific control action based on the overflow this bit is used as condit
388. tinue lt Back Cancel 260 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Quickstarts Appendix C 5 Click Install the software automatically Recommended and then click Next Found New Hardware Wizard L This wizard helps you install software for Rockwell Automation USB CIP O If your hardware came with an installation CD lt 9 or floppy disk insert it now What do you want the wizard to do Install the software automatically Recommended Install from a list or specific location Advanced Click Next to continue lt Back Cancel The Wizard searches for new hardware Found New Hardware Wizard Please wait while the wizard searches S Q a Rockwell Automation USB CIP ki lt Back Next gt Cancel Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 261 AppendixC Quickstarts 6 Click Finish when the wizard completes the installation Found New Hardware Wizard Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard The wizard has finished installing the software for Rockwell Automation USB CIP Click Finish to close the wizard lt Back Cancel 7 Open RSLinx Classic and run RSWho by clicking the E icon If the proper EDS file is installed the Micro830 Micro850 controller should be properly identified and show up under both the Virtual Backplane VBP driver and the USB dri
389. tion 125 DF1 point to point connection 46 DHCP Client 43 digital filter 79 DIN rail mounting 23 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 direction input 125 disconnecting main power 13 E electrical noise 37 Ell function configuration 302 Ell Function Status Information 303 embedded serial port cables 7 embedded serial port wiring 41 EMC directive 10 enable and valid status general rules 128 encoder quadrature 178 Endian configuration 251 engineering units x 1 77 engineering units x 10 77 error codes 311 312 error conditions 311 error handling general rules 128 error recovery model 319 Ethernet configuration settings 53 EtherNet IP Server 43 European Union Directive compliance 9 EMC Directive 10 Event Input Interrupt Ell Function Configuration 302 exclusive access 201 execution rules 112 expansion I 0 add 80 analog 71 72 configuration 79 data mapping 94 discrete 70 discrete input 70 discrete output 71 hardware features 56 installation 58 panel mounting 60 external AC power supply 108 F fault routine description of operation 291 priority of interrupts 290 faults recoverable and non recoverable 291 filter frequency 3dB 91 filter update time 91 force status 310 forcing I Os 285 G grounding 33 guidelines for advanced users 114 H hardware features 1 heat protection 16 high alarm 85 high high alarm 85 High Speed Counter HSC 168 high speed counter funct
390. tion 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Forcing I Os Quickstarts Appendix C Inputs are logically forced LED status indicators do not show forced values but the inputs in the user program are forced Forcing is only possible with I O and does not apply to user defined variables and non I O variables and special functions such as HSC and Motion which execute independently from the User Program scan For example for motion Drive Ready input cannot be forced Unlike inputs outputs are physically forced LED status indicators do show forced values and the user program does not use forced values The following diagram illustrates forcing behavior Physical Outputs Physica Inputs Logical Logical Force gt Force p gt Inputs Outputs e LED status indicators always match the physical value of I O e Normal non physical internal variables cannot be forced e Special functions such as HSC and Motion cannot be forced Checking if Forces locks are Enabled If Connected Components Workbench is available check the Variable Monitor while debugging online Forcing is performed by first Locking an I O variable and then setting the Logical Value for Inputs and Physical Value for Outputs Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 283 Appendix C Quickstarts 284 Remember you cannot force a Physical Input and cannot force a Logical Output able Monitoring E ox ariables Micro830
391. tion Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 205 AppendixA Specifications Environmental Specifications Attribute Radiated RF immunity Value IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 80 2000 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 1890 MHz 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 2000 2700 MHz EFT B immunity IEC 61000 4 4 2 kV at 5 kHz on power ports 2 kV at 5 kHz on signal ports Surge transient immunity IEC 61000 4 5 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on power ports 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF immunity Certifications Certification when roduct Parked D c UL us Value IEC 61000 4 6 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E322657 UL Listed for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations certified or U S and Canada See UL File E334470 CE EN 6 EN 61 EN 61 EN 61 EN 61 European Union 2004 108 EC EMC Directive compliant with 326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements 000 6 2 Industrial Immunity 000 6 4 Industrial Emissions 131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B European Union 2006 95 EC LVD compliant with 131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 11 C Tick Australian Radiocomm
392. tion Selector dialog Choose HSC You can do a quick search for HSC function block by typing hsc on the name field Click OK E Instruction Block Selector HSC c Controller 2080LC3048QBBB z m HSC_SET_STS Input Output Manually set reset H o Parameters Dimensic C EN ZENO CT Com 274 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Quickstarts Appendix C Your ladder rung should appear as shown below _lO_EM_DI_06 8 On the Project Organizer pane double click Local Variables to bring up the Variables window Add the following variables with the corresponding data types as specified in the table Variable Name Data Type MyCommand USINT MyAppData HSCAPP Mylnfo HSCSTS MyPLS PLS MyStatus UINT After adding the variables your Local Variables table should look like this UntitledLD AR UntitledLD POU MyCommand MyAppData MyInfo MyPLS MyStatus ot USINT z HSCAPP HSCSTS PLS UINT Assign Values to the HSC Variables Next you need to assign values to the variables you have just created Typically a routine is used to assign values to your variables For illustration purposes this quickstart assigns values through the Initial Value column of the Local Variables table TIP Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 In a real program you should write a routine t
393. to establish the HSC counting mode required by 270 your application See HSC Mode HSCAPP HSCMode on page 172 for available modes on Micro800 controllers The following sample project guides you through the creation of a project which uses HSC mode 6 a quadrature counter with phased inputs A and B It shows you how to write a simple ladder program with the HSC function block create variables and assign variables and values to your function block You will also be guided through a step by step process on how test your program and enable a Programmable Light Switch PLS This sample project makes use of a quadrature encoder The quadrature encoder is used for determining direction of rotation and position for rotating such as a lathe The Bidirectional Counter counts the rotation of the Quadrature Encoder The figure below shows a quadrature encoder connected to inputs 0 and 1 The count direction is determined by the phase angle between A and B If A leads B the counter increments If B leads A the counter decrements Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Quickstarts Appendix C A Input 0 g Quadrature Encoder e Input 1 B i Forward Rotation Reverse Rotation A ry ry A Y Y y B a 1 2 3 2 1 Count This
394. to stop 5 Move to the configured home position The mechanical home position recorded during moving back sequence plus the home offset configured for the axis in the Connected Components Workbench software Scenario 2 Moving part is in between Lower Limit and Home switch before homing starts The homing motion sequence for this scenario is as follows 1 Moving part moves to its left side negative direction 2 When lower limit switch is detected the moving part decelerates to stop or stop immediately according to limit switch hard stop configuration Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 159 Chapter 9 160 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO 3 Moving part moves back in positive direction in creep velocity to detect home switch On Off edge 4 Once home switch On Off edge is detected record the position as mechanical home position and decelerate to stop 5 Move to the configured home position The mechanical home position recorded during moving back sequence plus the home offset configured for the axis in the Connected Components Workbench software TIP If Lower Limit switch is not configured or not wired the homing motion fails and moves continuously to the left until the drive or moving part fails to move Scenario 3 Moving part on Lower Limit or Home switch before homing starts The homing motion sequence for this scenario is as follows 1 Moving
395. ts 4 Resolution 12 bits unipolar 11 bits plus sign bipolar Voltage 2 56 mV cnt unipolar 5 13 mV cnt bipolar Current 5 13 pA cnt Data format Left justified 16 bit 2s complement Step response time up to 63 2ms Conversion rate max 2 ms per channel Output current terminal user 0 mA output until module is configured configurable 4 20 mA default 0 20 mA Output voltage terminal user 10V configurable 0 10V Current load on voltage output max 3mA Absolute accuracy Voltage terminal 0 133 Full Scale 25 C or better Current terminal 0 425 Full Scale 25 C or better Accuracy drift with temp Voltage terminal 0 0045 Full Scale C Current terminal 0 0069 Full Scale C Resistive load on mA output 15 500 ohm 24V DC Specialty Expansion 1 0 2085 IRT4 Temperature Input Module Attribute 2085 IRT4 Number of inputs 4 Dimensions HxWxD 44 5 x 90 x 87 mm 1 75 x 3 54 x 3 42 in Shipping weight approx 220 g 7 76 02 Bus current draw max 5V DC 160 mA 24V DC 50 mA Wire size 0 25 2 5mm 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated 75 C 167 F or greater 1 2 mm 3 64 in insulation max Wiring category 2 on signal ports Terminal screw torque 0 5 0 6 Nm 4 4 5 3 Ib in 2 246 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 2085 IRT4 Temperature Input Attribute Input type Specifications Appendix A Module 2085 IRT4 Thermocouple type B C E J K TXK XK
396. ts normal operating range The module automatically resets the bit when the under range condition is cleared and the data value is within the normal operating range The analog modules are shipped to you calibrated See Expansion I O on page 240 for a list of specifications for each of the analog and digital expansion I O modules 100 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Chapter 7 Micro800 Plug In Modules and Accessories This chapter provides a brief description of plug in modules and accessories that can be used with the Micro830 and Micro850 controllers It includes the following sections Topic Page Accessory 08 External AC Power Supply 08 Plug In Modules 101 Micro800 RS 232 RS 485 Isolated Serial Port Plug in Module 106 Micro800 Non isolated Unipolar Analog Input Non isolated Unipolar 05 Analog Output Micro800 Non isolated Unipolar Analog Output Plug in Module 105 Micro800 Non isolated Thermocouple and RTD Plug in Modules 06 Micro800 Memory Backup and High Accuracy RTC Plug In Module 07 Micro800 6 Channel Trimpot Analog Input Plug In Module 108 Plug In Modules With plug in modules you can enhance the functionality of your base unit controller You can e Extend the functionality of embedded I O without increasing the footprint of your controller e Improve performance by adding additional processing power or capabilities e Add additional commu
397. ty rating C300 R150 2080 LC30 240QWB only Insulation stripping length 7 mm 0 28 in Enclosure type rating Meets IP20 North American temp code T4 1 Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Inputs Attribute High Speed DC Input Standard DC Input Inputs 0 7 Inputs 8 and higher Number of Inputs 8 6 Voltage category 24V DC sink source Operating voltage range 16 8 26 4V DC 10 26 4V DC Off state voltage max 5V DC Off state current max 1 5mA On state current min 5 0 mA 16 8V DC 1 8 mA 10V DC On state current nom 8 8 mA 24V DC 8 5 mA 24V DC On state current max 12 0 mA 30V DC Nominal impedance 3kQ 3 74 kQ IEC input compatibility Type 3 AC input filter setting 8 ms for all embedded inputs In Connected Components Workbench go to the Embedded 1 0 configuration window to re configure the filter setting for each input group Isolated AC Inputs 2080 LC30 240WB 2080 LC30 240VB 2080 LC30 240BB Inputs 0 3 Attribute Value On state voltage nom 12 24V AC 50 60 Hz Off state voltage min 4V AC 50 60Hz Operating frequency nom 50 60 Hz Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 211 Appendix A Specifications Outputs Attribute 2080 LC30 240WB 2080 LC30 240VB 2080
398. ublication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 User Interrupts Appendix D STI User Interrupt Executing STIO EX Sub Element Description Data Format User Program Access EX User Interrupt Executing binary bit read only The EX User Interrupt Executing bit is set whenever the STI mechanism completes timing and the controller is scanning the STI POU The EX bit is cleared when the controller completes processing the STI subroutine The STI EX bit can be used in the control program as conditional logic to detect if an STI interrupt is executing STI User Interrupt Enable STI0 Enabled Sub Element Description Data Format User Program Access Enabled User Interrupt Enable binary bit read only The User Interrupt Enable bit is used to indicate STI enable or disable status STI User Interrupt Lost STIO LS Sub Element Description Data Format User Program Access LS User Interrupt Lost binary bit read write The LS is a status flag that indicates an interrupt was lost The controller can process 1 active and maintain up to 1 pending user interrupt conditions before it sets the lost bit This bit is set by the controller It is up to the control program to utilize track the lost condition if necessary STI User Interrupt Pending STIO PE Sub Element Description Data Format User Program Access PE User Interrupt Pending binary bit read o
399. uctor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 219 Appendix A Specifications DC Input Specifications 2080 LC50 240BB 2080 LC50 240VB 2080 LC50 240WB Attribute High Speed DC Input Standard DC Input Inputs 0 7 Inputs 8 and higher Number of Inputs 8 6 Voltage category 24V sink source Input group to Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 720V DC for 2 s backplane isolation 50V DC working voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation On state voltage range 16 8 26 4V DC 65 C 149 F 10 26 4V DC 65 C 149 F 16 8 30 0V DC 30 C 86 F 10 30 0V DC 30 C 86 F Off state voltage 5V DC max Off state current 1 5 mA max On state current 5 0 mA 16 8V DC min 1 8 mA 10V DC min 7 6 mA 24V DC nom 6 15 mA 24V DC nom 12 0 mA 30V DC max 12 0 mA 30V DC max Nominal impedance 3 kQ 3 74 kQ IEC input compatibility Type 3 AC Input Specifications 2080 LC50 24AWB Attribute Value Number of Inputs 14 On state voltage 79 V AC min 132V AC max On state current 5 mA min 16 mA max Input frequency 50 60 Hz nom 47 Hz min 63 Hz max Off state voltage 20V AC 120V AC max Off state current 2 5 mA 120V AC max Inrush current 250 mA 120V AC max Inrush delay time constant 22 ms max IEC input co
400. ug a Password Protected Controller 00 005 201 Download to a Password Protected Controller 201 Transfer Controller Program and Password Protect Receiving Controller ws Ec be end acer nate edo e bee ana E 201 Back Up a Password Protected Controller 04 202 Configure Controller Password iniuissacksuy tie sciwren ae eternenka 202 Recover from a Lost Password uit scot tias oeeda Nace eees pee 202 Appendix A Micro830 Controllers sfnicnte toa thewnca hie ter ete ae lane ries 203 Micro830 10 Point Controllers 0 0 c cece cece eee ee 203 Micro830 16 Point Controllers 0 00 cece cece ee eee ee 206 Micro830 24 Point Controllers 0 0 0 cece cence cee ceeee 210 Micro830 48 Point Controllers 2 0 0 cece cece ee eens 214 Micro830 and Micro850 Relay Charts 0 eee eee e ee 218 Micro850 GOntiralletsicis citockelnn ns 28th ans tals ad i 28 ote Raed 218 Micro850 24 Point Controllers 0 0c cece ccc ence e ee 219 Micro850 48 Point Controllers 0 00 c cece cece ecnees 222 Micro800 Programmable Controller External AC Power Supply 226 Micro800 Plug In Modules swcawan s ecu eitets ahs enn REN a eecarates 228 Digital Plug Ins snee aae e e eh thud Aa Aho dalled 228 Analog Plug In Modules nensusueenenrrrrerrererrren 233 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM001D EN E September 2012 Modbus Mapping for Micro800 Quickstarts User Interrupts Cha
401. ules and Accessories Accessory 108 Status Indicator State Description Solid red 2 s Startup cycle test in progress Flashing red Back up in progress Solid red contunuous Battery low Back Up Restore the project Backup data can be retrieved through the USB adapter using the software provided Micro800 6 Channel Trimpot Analog Input Plug In Module The 2080 TRIMPOT6 plug in offers an affordable method of adding six analog presets for speed position and temperature control Channels Se ooo sey a p Sy 45068 3 a j This plug in can be used in any slot of your Micro830 Micro850 controller Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP is not supported External AC Power Supply Use this optional power supply 2080 PS120 240VAC in applications with smaller systems when a 24V DC power supply is not available Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Micro800 Plug In Modules and Accessories Chapter 7 Wire the Module PAC 1 PAC 2 PAC 3 45062 DC 1 DC 2 DC 3 DC 4 45061 AC Input Connectors DC Output Connectors DC 24V 1 6 A PAC 1 AC hot 100 240V AC DC 1 PAC 2 AC neutral 100 240V AC DC 2 PAC 3 Safety DC 3 ground DC 4 Specific ations For Micro800 plug in specifications see Micro800 Plug In Modules on page 228 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 109 Chapter 7 Micro800 Plug In Module
402. umber 00 15 for 2085 IQ16 and 00 31 for 2085 IQ32T 2085 OV16 and 2085 0B16 I O Data Mapping Discrete output states can be read from Global Variables _IO_Xx_ST_yy where x represents the expansion slot number 1 4 and yy represents the point number 00 15 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Expansion I O Support Chapter 6 Discrete output states can be written to Global Variables _IO_Xx_DO_yy where x represents the expansion slot number 1 4 and yy represents the point number 00 15 2085 IA8 and 2085 IM8 I O Data Mapping Discrete input states can be read from Global Variables _IO_Xx_DI_yy where x represents the expansion slot number 1 4 and yy represents the point number 00 07 2085 0A8 I O Data Mapping Discrete output states can be read from Global Variables _IO_Xx_ST_yy where x represents the expansion slot number 1 4 and yy represents the point number 00 07 Discrete output states can be written to Global Variables _IO_Xx_DO_yy where x represents the expansion slot number 1 4 and yy represents the point number 00 07 2085 OW8 and 2085 OW16 1 0 Data Mapping Discrete output states can be read from Global Variables _IO_Xx_ST_yy where x represents the expansion slot number 1 4 and yy represents the point number 00 07 for 2085 OW8 and 00 15 for 2085 OW 16 Discrete output states can be written to Global Variables _IO_Xx_DO_yy where
403. unications Act compliant with AS N ZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions 1 See the Product Certification link at http www rockwellautomation com products certification for Declaration of Conformity Certificates and other certification details Micro830 16 Point Controllers General 2080 LC30 16AWB 2080 LC30 160WB 2080 LC30 160VB 2080 LC30 16AWB 16 10 inputs 6 outputs Attribute Number of 0 2080 LC30 160WB 2080 LC30 160VB Dimensions 90 x 100 x 80 mm HxWxD 3 54 x 3 94 x 3 15 in Shipping weight approx 0 302 kg 0 666 Ib rated 90 C 194 F insulation max Wire size 0 14 2 5 mm 26 14 AWG solid copper wire or 0 14 1 5 mm 26 14 AWG stranded copper wire 206 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 General 2080 LC30 16AWB 2080 LC30 160WB 2080 LC30 160VB Specifications Appendix A Attribute 2080 LC30 16AWB 2080 LC30 160WB 2080 LC30 160VB Wiring category 2 on signal ports 2 on power ports Wire type Use Copper Conductors only Terminal screw torque 0 6 Nm 4 4 Ib in max using a 2 5 mm 0 10 in flat blade screwdriver Input circuit type 120V AC 12 24V sink source standard 24V sink source high speed Output circuit type Relay 12 24V DC sink transistor standard and high speed Event input interrupt Yes support Power consumption 3 6 W Power supply voltage range 20 4 26 4V DC
404. upt STI Function Configuration and Status 297 STI Function Configuration 106 3 sscaawk vex ah vetoes ga raniien 298 STI Function Status Information i as suvee tous even dad 298 Using the Event Input Interrupt EI Function 300 Event Input Interrupt EII Function Configuration and Status 300 EII Function Conneurationts cccs co oceans ape ektateswe sy ones 300 EII Function Status Information 2404 aes ia siden eneren 301 Appendix E Calculate Total Power for Your Micro830 Micro850 Controller 303 Appendix F Status Indicators on the Controller 5 434 s3auaat ayia 305 Normal Operation o eeen a sae E E E RE 306 Error Conditi nss s ee EE T teu a E E E E usb ok 306 Errorcode wie a onre O aE ea E EEEO 307 Controller Error Recovery Model onnenn 315 Calling Rockwell Automation for Assistance 000 000 eee 316 Appendix G CIVIC W vas 25S iaacerainereig dis sha Ga bis RES lg na ala Ae ReaD plea 317 Thermocouple Module 2080 TC2 0 eee cece eee eeeeee 317 Thermocouple Sensor Types and Ranges 000eee0e 318 RID Module O08OR TDD anu datscs ASA 319 RTD Sensor Types atid Ranges conc consnsetugeaceeyerdeewemeioss 319 Connected Components Workbench Global Variables Data Maps cent sass role cer ian e sy AAE ENN E 320 Temperature Conversion Data to Degree Celsius C 321 Wire the 2080 TC2 Module xi c 200stie andi Cee bieuena reno 323 Type or CJE Sensor nut aaure vata roten N E
405. using ControlFlash e Contact your local Rockwell Automation technical support representative for more information about firmware revisions for your Micro800 controller For more information on firmware revision compatibility go to http www rockwellautomation com support firmware html 0xF010 The user program contains a function Perform the following ean A supported by Modify the program so that all functions function blocks are supported by the Micro800 controller e Build and download the program using Connected Components Workbench e Put the Micro800 controller into Run mode 0xF014 A memory module memory error Reprogram the memory module If the error persists replace the memory module occurred 0xF015 An unexpected software error occurred Perform the following 1 Cycle power on your Micro800 controller 2 Build and download your program using Connected Components Workbench and then reinitialize any necessary data 3 Start up your system e Refer to the Wire Your Controller on page 29 OxF016 An unexpected hardware error occurred Perform the following 1 Cycle power on your Micro800 controller 2 Build and download your program using Connected Components Workbench and then reinitialize any necessary data 3 Start up your system e Refer to the Wire Your Controller on page 29 OxF020 The base hardware faulted or is Perform one of the following incompatible with the Micro800 controller s firmware revision
406. ustration input and output circuits are shown with MCR protection However in most applications only output circuits require MCR protection The following illustrations show the Master Control Relay wired in a grounded system TIP In most applications input circuits do not require MCR protection however if you need to remove power from all field devices you must include MCR contacts in series with input power wiring 18 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 X1 About Your Controller Chapter 2 Schematic Using IEC Symbols L1 L2 230V AC lt Disconnect Fuse MCR 230V AC e 0 hd Circuits Isolation l Operation of either of these contacts will Transformer remove power from the external 1 0 Master Control Relay MCR JNA y circuits stopping machine motion Cat No 700 PK400A1 or 230V AC Emergency Stop Stop Start Suppressor Fuse Push Button Overtravel T Cat No 700 N24 mm Limit Switch m a e f l al MCR Sf ag O i G KCR t Suppr MCR 115V AC or tT 230VAC hd 1 0 Circuits DC Power Supply Use IEC 950 EN 60950 z MCR F 24V DC Lo Hi i 1 0 Line Terminals Connect to terminals of Power Circuits Supply Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Line Terminals Connect to 24V DC terminals o
407. utputs Multiple input output control signals are required for each motion axis as described in the next tables PTO Pulse and PTO Direction are required for an axis The rest of the input outputs can be disabled and re used as regular I O Motion Signals PTOO EM_00 PTO1 EM_01 PTO2 EM_02 Logical Name Name on Logical Name Name on Logical Name in Name on in Software Terminal in Software Terminal Software Terminal Block Block Block PTO pulse _l0_EM_DO_00 0 00 _10_EM_DO_01 0 01 1O_EM_DO_02 0 02 PTO direction _l0_EM_DO_03 0 03 _l0_EM_DO_04 0 04 IO_EM_DO_05 0 05 Lower Negative Limit switch _I0_EM_DI_00 1 00 _IO_EM_DI_04 1 04 1O_EM_DI_08 I 08 Upper Positive Limit switch _I0_EM_DI_01 I 01 _I0_EM_DI_05 1 05 1O_EM_DI_09 I 09 Absolute Home switch _IO_EM_DI_02 1 02 _IO_EM_DI_06 1 06 1O_EM_DI_10 I 10 Touch Probe Input switch _I0_EM_DI_03 1 03 _I0_EM_DI_07 I 07 1O_EM_DI_11 I 11 Configurable input output Motion Signals Servo Drive On Input Output Notes OUTPUT Can be configured as any embedded output Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 119 Chapter 9 120 Positioning with Embedded Pulse Train Outputs PTO Configurable input output Motion Signals Input Output Notes Servo Drive Ready INPUT Can be configured as any embedded input In Position signal from INPUT Can be configured as any embedded input Servo motor
408. vely constant time interval One can typically achieve this using STI interrupt 336 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Numerics 1492 CAB010P62 69 1492 CAB010U62 69 1492 CAB025P62 69 1492 CAB025U62 69 1492 CAB050P62 69 1492 CAB050U62 69 1761 CBL PM02 47 2080 IF2 105 2080 IF4 105 2080 MEMBAK RTC 107 2080 O0F2 105 2080 PS120 240VAC 23 108 2080 RTD2 106 323 cable 334 data maps 324 2080 SERIALISOL 106 2080 TC2 106 321 cable 334 data maps 324 features 321 thermocouple sensor types and ranges 322 wiring 327 2080 TRIMPOTE 108 2085 IA8 71 I O data mapping 95 wiring 62 2085 IF4 72 I O data mapping 96 normal mode rejection 75 wiring 65 2085 IF8 72 I O data mapping 96 wiring 66 2085 IM8 71 I O data mapping 95 wiring 62 2085 1016 71 I O data mapping 94 wiring 62 2085 1032T 71 hardware components 5 wiring 63 2085 IRT4 76 configuration parameters 89 data format 76 data formats valid range 77 filter frequency 79 open circuit response 78 sensor type 76 90 wiring 67 Index 2085 0A8 86 I O data mapping 95 wiring 63 2085 0B16 configuration parameters 86 I O data mapping 94 wiring 64 2085 OF4 72 configuration parameters 87 I O data mapping 97 wiring 66 2085 0V16 I O data mapping 94 wiring 64 2085 OW16 configuration parameters 86 I O data mapping 95 wiring 65 2085 OW8 86 I O data mapping 95 wiring 64 2711P CBL EX04 8 A absolute home switch 119 120 AC power supp
409. ver which was automatically created RSLinx Classic Gateway RSWho 1 s5 File Edit View Communications Station DDE OPC Security Window Help 5 amp s lle IV Autobrowse By Ea Browsing node 0 found 9 AB_VBP 1 1789 A17 A Virtual Chassis A a 00 workstation RSLinx Server Micro830 2080 LC30 16QWB HE 16 Micro830 2080 LC30 16QWB USB m 16 Micro830 2080 LC30 16QWB iin For Help press F1 NUM 07 14 10 02 10PM 4 If instead the Micro830 Micro850 shows up as a 1756 Module under the AB_VBP 1 Virtual Chassis driver then the proper EDS file for this major revision of firmware has not yet been installed or the controller is running pre release firmware Major Revision 0 RSLinx Classic Gateway RSWho 1 s File Edit Yiew Communications Station DDE OPC Security Window Help 5 amp 218 Blk x MV Autobrowse amp AB_VBP 1 1789 A17 A Virtual Chassis a 00 workstation RSLinx Server workstation RSLinx Server 1756 module 2080 LC30 16QWB For Help press F1 Num 07 14 10 02 15PM 4 262 Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Quickstarts Appendix C Since Micro830 Micro850 controllers support embedded EDS files right click this device and select Upload EDS file from device Remove Driver Diagnostics Configure Driver Upload EDS file f Device Properties 8 On the EDS wizard that appears click Next to continue Rockwell Automation s EDS
410. voltage max 5V DC Off state current max 1 5mA 1 2 mA On state current min 1 8 mA 10V DC On state current nom 6 0 mA 24V DC 5 2 mA 24V DC On state current max 8 0 mA 30V DC 7 0 mA 30V DC Input impedance max 3 9 KQ 4 6 kQ IEC input compatibility Type 3 Type 1 1 Meets IEC Type 1 24V DC Input Specifications 2 Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 3 RTB hold down screws should be tightened by hand They should not be tightened using a power tool Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Specifications Appendix A Derating Curve for 2085 1016 Input voltage V 30 26 4 Temp 45302 Derating Curve for 2085 1032T Input voltage V Number of inputs 45301 2085 OV16 Sink and 2085 0B16 Source DC Output Module Attribute 2085 0V16 2085 0B16 Number of outputs 16 sinking 16 sourcing Operating voltage range 10 30V DC On state voltage min 10V DC On state voltage nom 24V DC On state voltage max 30V DC On state current max 0 5 A 30V DC per output 8 A per module Dimensions HxWxD 44 5 x 90 x 87 mm 1 75 x 3 54 x 3 42 in Shipping weight approx 220 g 7 76 02 Bus current draw max 200 mA 5V DC Wire size 0 25 2 5 mm 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated
411. wever the effect of a voltage sag on other equipment should be considered For example a deep voltage sag may reset a computer connected to the same power source The following considerations determine whether the power source must be required to supply high inrush current e The power up sequence of devices in a system e The amount of the power source voltage sag if the inrush current cannot be supplied e The effect of voltage sag on other equipment in the system If the entire system is powered up at the same time a brief sag in the power source voltage typically will not affect any equipment Loss of Power Source The optional Micro800 AC power supply is designed to withstand brief power losses without affecting the operation of the system The time the system is operational during power loss is called program scan hold up time after loss of power The duration of the power supply hold up time depends on power consumption of controller system but is typically between 10 milliseconds and 3 seconds Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 15 Chapter2 About Your Controller Preventing Excessive Heat Master Control Relay 16 Input States on Power Down The power supply hold up time as described above is generally longer than the turn on and turn off times of the inputs Because of this the input state change from On to Off that occurs when power is removed may be recorded by the
412. wiring requirements for the Thermocouple 2080 TC2 and RTD 2080 RTD2 plug in modules These modules allow for temperature measurement and control when used with PID This chapter includes the following sections Topic Page Thermocouple Module 2080 TC2 317 Thermocouple Sensor Types and Ranges 318 RTD Module 2080 RTD2 319 RTD Sensor Types and Ranges 319 Connected Components Workbench Global Variables Data Maps 320 Temperature Conversion Data to Degree Celsius C 321 Wire the 2080 TC2 Module 323 Type of CJC Sensor 323 Wire the CJC Thermistor on the 2080 TC2 Module 323 Wire the Thermocouple Module and Thermocouple Sensor in the Field 324 Wire the RTD Module 324 Wire the RTD Sensors 324 Wire the RTD Module and RTD Sensor in the Field 325 Recommended Cable Specifications 330 This plug in can be used in any slot of your Micro830 850 controller Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP is not supported Th ermocou p e M 0 d u e The 2080 TC2 two channel plug in module supports thermocouple measurement 2080 TC2 It digitally converts and transmits temperature data from any combination of up to eight types of thermocouple sensors Each input channel is individually configurable through the Connected Components Workbench software for a specific sensor filter frequency Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 317 Appendix G 318 Non isolated Thermoc
413. y the DIN rail latch downwards until it is in the unlatched position Panel Mounting The preferred mounting method is to use two M4 8 per module Hole spacing tolerance 0 4 mm 0 016 in Follow these steps to install your module using mounting screws 1 Place the module next to the controller against the panel where you are mounting it Make sure the controller and module are spaced properly 2 Mark drilling holes through the mounting screw holes and mounting feet then remove the module 3 Drill the holes at the markings then replace the module and mount it Leave the protective debris strip in place until you are finished wiring the module and any other devices System Assembly The Micro850 expansion I O module is attached to the controller or another I O module by means of interconnecting latches and hooks The Micro850 controller and expansion I O modules must terminate with a 2085 ECR Bus Terminator module ATTENTION Failure to connect a bus terminator module to the last expansion I O module will result in a controller fault Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 Expansion I O Support Chapter 6 y Slide up both locks located at either side of each expansion I O and then attach the 1 0 to the connecting latch hooks and bus connector on the controller or the last expansion I O After latching slide down both locks to securely fasten the 1 0 to the controller ca A I
414. ype it can accommodate from two to five plug in modules The Micro850 controller has Rockwell Automation Publication 2080 UM002D EN E September 2012 1 Chapter 1 Hardware Overview expandable features and can additionally support up to four expansion I O modules The controllers also accommodate any class 2 rated 24V DC output power supply that meets minimum specifications such as the optional Micro800 power supply See Troubleshooting on page 305 for descriptions of status indicator operation for troubleshooting purposes Micro830 Controllers Micro830 10 16 point Controllers and Status Indicators

Plug-In Modules - Electrocomponents

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents